Navigation

  • Page 1

    FANUC Series 30+-MODEL BFANUC Series 31+-MODEL BFANUC Series 32+-MODEL BCommon to Lathe System / Machining Center SystemOPERATOR'S MANUALB-64484EN/03

  • Page 2

    • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series 30i-B, Series 31i-...

  • Page 3

    B-64484EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section a...

  • Page 4

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64484EN/03 s-2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WARNING 1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, th...

  • Page 5

    B-64484EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-3 CAUTION The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect. NOTE Programs, parameters, and macro variable...

  • Page 6

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64484EN/03 s-4 WARNING 4 Inch/metric conversion Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement...

  • Page 7

    B-64484EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-5 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully, such that you are fully familiar with their...

  • Page 8

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64484EN/03 s-6 WARNING 8 Software operator's panel and menu switches Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operator's panel, such as mode change, override ...

  • Page 9

    B-64484EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-7 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE WARNING 1 Memory backup battery replacement When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the p...

  • Page 10

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64484EN/03 s-8 WARNING 3 Fuse replacement Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When...

  • Page 11

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................

  • Page 12

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-2 4.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03).................................................. 46 4.5 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ..................................................... 50 4.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (G02, G03).........................................

  • Page 13

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-3 7.2.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1).....................................................163 7.2.5 Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair (G54.1 or G54) ........................165 7.2.6 Automatic Coordinate System Setting .......................

  • Page 14

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-4 11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)................................................... 248 11.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.................................... 249 11.3 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION ...........................................................

  • Page 15

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-5 16.8 BRANCH AND REPETITION..................................................................... 450 16.8.1 Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement) ...........................................................450 16.8.2 GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers ....

  • Page 16

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-6 17.8 NOTES ...................................................................................................... 534 17.9 LIMITATION .............................................................................................. 535 18 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER IN...

  • Page 17

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-7 21.8 PIVOT AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................ 661 21.9 CHOPPING FUNCTION ............................................................................ 664 21.10 SKIP FUNCTION FOR FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL...

  • Page 18

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-8 22.10 MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION .......................... 903 22.10.1 Machine Configuration Selecting Screen.............................................................903 22.10.2 Switching Machine Configuration ...................................

  • Page 19

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-9 3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 963 3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF......................................................... 966 3.6 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION...............................

  • Page 20

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-10 4.13 RETRACE................................................................................................ 1092 4.14 ACTIVE BLOCK CANCEL FUNCTION.................................................... 1101 5 TEST OPERATION .........................................

  • Page 21

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-11 7.4.2 Relationship with Other Functions.....................................................................1167 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT .....................................................................1169 8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD/USB MEMORY.......

  • Page 22

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-12 8.2.11.2 Outputting values on the workpiece setting error compensation screen ..... 1220 8.2.11.3 Input/output format of workpiece setting error values................................ 1221 8.2.12 Inputting and Outputting Tool Life Management Data.................

  • Page 23

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-13 10.11.4 Search .................................................................................................................1282 10.11.5 Replacement .......................................................................................................1283...

  • Page 24

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-14 12.1.9 Display of 3-dimensional Manual Feed (Tool Tip Coordinates, Number of Pulses, Machine Axis Move Amount)................................................................1357 12.1.10 Overall Position Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) ........................

  • Page 25

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-15 12.3.9 Setting and Displaying Tool Management Data ................................................1472 12.3.9.1 Displaying and setting magazine screen ..................................................... 1472 12.3.9.2 Displaying and setting tool management s...

  • Page 26

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-16 12.3.32 Machining Quality Level Selection (15/19-inch Display Unit) .........................1559 12.3.33 Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data (15/19-inch Display Unit)1561 12.3.33.1 Tool life management (list screen) (15-inch display unit) ..........

  • Page 27

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-17 12.4.15 Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit) .....................................................1674 12.4.16 Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)............................................................1675 12.4.17 Spindle Setting (15/19-inch Disp...

  • Page 28

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64484EN/03 c-18 12.11.5 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..................................................................................1740 13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION..............................................

  • Page 29

    B-64484EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-19 APPENDIX A PARAMETERS..................................................................................1827 A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS......................................................... 1827 A.2 DATA TYPE..................................................

  • Page 30

  • Page 31

    I. GENERAL

  • Page 32

  • Page 33

    B-64484EN/03 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 3 - 1 GENERAL This manual consists of the following parts: About this manual I. GENERAL Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this manual. II. PROGRAMMING Describes each function: Format used to program functi...

  • Page 34

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64484EN/03 - 4 - NOTE 2 Unless otherwise noted, the model names 31i-B, 31i-B5, and 32i-B are collectively referred to as 30i. However, this convention is not necessarily observed when item 3 below is applicable. 3 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to s...

  • Page 35

    B-64484EN/03 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 5 - Manual name Specification number MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64485EN PARAMETER MANUAL B-64490EN Programming Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-2 Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-66263EN C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-3 PMC PMC PROGR...

  • Page 36

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64484EN/03 - 6 - This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually connected. 1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL CAUTION 1 The...

  • Page 37

    II. PROGRAMMING

  • Page 38

  • Page 39

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 9 - 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION .......................9 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION .......................................................................

  • Page 40

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 10 - - Tool movement along an arc • For milling machining WorkpieceTool ProgramG03 X_ Y_ R_ ; • For lathe cutting ProgramG02 X_ Z_ R_ ; or G03 X_ Z_ R_ ; WorkpieceZX Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc The term interpolation refers to an operation...

  • Page 41

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 11 - 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. • For milling machining (feed per minute) ToolWorkpieceTableFmm/min • For lathe cutting (feed per revolution) Feed amount per minute(mm/rev...

  • Page 42

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 12 - 1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT 1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position. T...

  • Page 43

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 13 - 1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System • For milling machining Z Y XPart drawingZYXCoordinate systemZYXToolWorkpieceMachine toolProgramCommandCNCTool • For lathe cutting Part drawing Machin...

  • Page 44

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 14 - Explanation - Coordinate system The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations: (See Chapter, “ COORDINATE SYSTEM”) 1 Coordinate system on part drawing The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program ...

  • Page 45

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 15 - • For milling machining Y YTableWorkpieceXXCoordinate systemspecified by the CNCestablished on the tableCoordinate system onpart drawing established on the workpiece • For lathe cutting ZWorkpieceXXZCoordinate system on part drawingestablished on the ...

  • Page 46

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 16 - - Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same position M To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, simple methods shall be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machinings. 1. Using a standard plane and point of th...

  • Page 47

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 17 - T The following method is usually used to define two coordinate systems at the same location. 1 When coordinate zero point is set at chuck face WorkpieceX15040Z 6040Workpiece XZChuck - Coordinates and dimensions on part drawing- Coordinate system on lat...

  • Page 48

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 18 - 1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool (Absolute and Incremental Programming) Explanation Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See Section, “ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING...

  • Page 49

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 19 - - Incremental command Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position. • For milling machining Y ZAX=40.0Z=-10.0 Y-30.0 X B G91 X40.0 Y-30.0 Z-10.0 ; Distance and direction for movement along each axis ToolCommand speci...

  • Page 50

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 20 - - Diameter programming / radius programming Dimensions of the X-axis can be set in diameter or in radius. Which programming is used is determined according to the setting of bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No. 1006. 1. Diameter programming In diameter program...

  • Page 51

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 21 - 1.4 CUTTING SPEED - SPINDLE FUNCTION Explanation The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed. As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in min-1 unit. • For mil...

  • Page 52

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 22 - 1.5 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL FUNCTION For each of various types of machining (such as drilling, tapping, boring, and milling for milling machining, or rough machining, semifinish machining, finish machining, threading, and groov...

  • Page 53

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 23 - 1.6 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY FUNCTION When a workpiece is actually machined with a tool, the spindle is rotated, coolant is supplied, and the chuck is opened/closed. So, control needs to be exercised on the spindle motor of the machine, ...

  • Page 54

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 24 - 1.7 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off. In the program, speci...

  • Page 55

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - 25 - - Program ; Oxxxxx ; Program numberBlock Block Block : : : M30 ; End of program ::: Fig. 1.7 (c) Program configuration Normally, a program number is specified after the end-of-block (;) code at the beginning of the program, and a program end code (M02 ...

  • Page 56

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 26 - 1.8 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can move is called the stroke. Stroke area MotorLimit switch Machine zero po...

  • Page 57

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 27 - 2 CONTROLLED AXES Chapter 2, "CONTROLLED AXES", consists of the following sections: 2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES...............................................................................................27 2.2 NAMES OF AXES ..........

  • Page 58

    2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 28 - X A 13rd axis name character2nd axis name character1st axis name character NOTE 1 Axis names are predetermined according to the machine used. Refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder. 2 Since many ordinary machines use one chara...

  • Page 59

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 29 - NOTE 1 The unit (mm or inch) in the table is used for indicating a diameter value for diameter programming (when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1) or a radius value for radius programming. 2 Some increment systems are unavailable depe...

  • Page 60

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 30 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) 3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block. G codes are divided into the following two types. Type Meaning One-shot G code The G code is effect...

  • Page 61

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 31 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION) T 8. When G code system A is used, absolute or incremental programming is specified not by a G code (G90/G91) but by an address word (X/U, Z/W, C/H, Y/V). Only the initial level is provided at the return point of the canned cycle...

  • Page 62

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 32 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) 3.1 G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM M Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G00 Positioning (rapid traverse) G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed) G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW...

  • Page 63

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 33 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G33 Threading G34 Variable lead threading G35 Circular threading CW G36 01 Circular threading CCW G37 Automatic tool length measurement G38 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation...

  • Page 64

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 34 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G52 Local coordinate system setting G53 Machine coordinate system setting G53.1 Tool axis direction control G53.6 00 Tool center point retention type tool axis direction control G...

  • Page 65

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 35 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle G83 Peck drilling cycle G84 Tapping cycle G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format) G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format) G85 B...

  • Page 66

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 36 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) 3.2 G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM T Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse) G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed) G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW o...

  • Page 67

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 37 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G30.2 G30.2 G30.2 In-position check disable 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return G31 G31 G31 Skip function G31.8 G31.8 G31.8 00 EGB-axis skip G32 G33 G33 Threadin...

  • Page 68

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 38 - 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G49 (G49.1) G49 (G49.1) G49 (G49.1) 23 Tool length compensation cancel (Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 must be "1".) G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setti...

  • Page 69

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 39 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.2 (b) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeating cycle G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling cycle G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle G76 G76 G78 Multiple-thread cutt...

  • Page 70

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 40 - 4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Interpolation functions specify the way to make an axis movement (in other words, a movement of the tool with respect to the workpiece or table). Chapter 4, "INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS", consists of the fo...

  • Page 71

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 41 - • Linear interpolation type positioning The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not more than the rapid traverse rate for each axis. End position Non linear interpolation type positioning Start posit...

  • Page 72

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 42 - G60, which is a one-shot G-code, can be used as a modal G-code in group 01 by setting 1 to the bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431. This setting can eliminate specifying a G60 command for every block. Other specifications are the same as tho...

  • Page 73

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 43 - Programmed end point Programmed start pointOverrun distance in the X-axis direction Overrun distance in the Z-axis direction Z X Fig. 4.2 (b) Limitation • Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for which no overr...

  • Page 74

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 44 - 4.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) Tools can move along a line. Format G01 IP_ F_ ; IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an end point, and for an incremental programming, the distance the tool moves. F_ : Speed of tool feed (...

  • Page 75

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 45 - Example - Linear interpolation • For milling machining (G91) G01X200.0Y100.0F200.0;Y axis 100.0 200.0 0 (Start point) (End point) X axis • For lathe cutting (Diameter programming) G01X40.0Z20.1F20; (Absolute programming) or ...

  • Page 76

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 46 - 4.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) The command below will move a tool along a circular arc. Format Arc in the XpYp plane G02 I_ J_ G17 G03 Xp_ Yp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the ZpXp plane G02 I_ K_G18 G03 Zp_ Xp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the YpZp plane G02...

  • Page 77

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 47 - - Distance moved on an arc The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value, the distance of the end point which is view...

  • Page 78

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 48 - - Feedrate The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feedrate specified by the F code, and the feedrate along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the arc) is controlled to be the specified feedrate. The error between the spe...

  • Page 79

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 49 - Example M 100 60 40 0 90120 1402006050Y axis X axis The above tool path can be programmed as follows; (1) In absolute programming G92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ; G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ; G02 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0 ; or G92X200.0 Y40....

  • Page 80

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 50 - 4.5 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands. Format Arc in the XpYp plane G02...

  • Page 81

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 51 - ZYX The feedrate along the tool path is specified.Tool path Limitation • Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation is applied only for a circular arc. • Tool offset and tool length compensation cannot be used in a block in which a h...

  • Page 82

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 52 - 4.7 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired increment (decrement) for the radius per...

  • Page 83

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 53 - - Conical interpolation XpYp plane G02 G17 G03 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Z_ Q_ L_ F_ ; ZpXp plane G02 G18 G03 Z_ X_ K_ I_ Y_ Q_ L_ F_ ; YpZp plane G02 G19 G03 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ X_ Q_ L_ F_ ; X, Y, Z : Coordinates of the end point L : Number of revolutions (...

  • Page 84

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 54 - When the programmed command is assigned to this function, the following expression is obtained: 222)Q)360(L'(RJ)Y(YI)X(XSSθ++=−−+−− where XS : X coordinate of the start point YS : Y coordinate of the start point I : X coordinate ...

  • Page 85

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 55 - - Tool radius compensation M The spiral or conical interpolation command can be programmed in tool radius compensation mode. This compensation is performed in the same way as described in "When it is exceptional" in "Tool ...

  • Page 86

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 56 - Limitation - Radius During spiral interpolation and conical interpolation, the addresses "C", "R", ",C", or ",R" cannot be specified. - Feed functions The functions of feed per rotation, inverse ...

  • Page 87

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 57 - (2) With incremental values, the path is programmed as follows: Q-20.0 G91 G02 X0 Y-130.0 I0 J-100.0 L4 F300.0 ; (Either the Q or L setting can be omitted.) - Conical interpolation The sample path shown below is programmed with absolut...

  • Page 88

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 58 - 4.8 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (G12.1, G13.1) Overview Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (mo...

  • Page 89

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 59 - Rotary axis (hypothetical axis)(unit: mm or inch) Linear axis (unit: mm or inch) Origin of the local coordinate system (G52 command) (Or origin of the workpiece coordinate system) Fig. 4.8 (a) Polar coordinate interpolation plane When t...

  • Page 90

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 60 - - G codes which can be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode G01.......................Linear interpolation G02, G03..............Circular interpolation G02.2, G03.2........Involute interpolation G04.......................D...

  • Page 91

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 61 - (X, C) Hypothetical axis (C-axis) Error in the direction of hypothetical axis (P) Center of rotary axisX-axisRotary axis (X, C) : Point in the X-C plane (The center of the rotary axis is considered to be the origin of the X-C plane.) X : ...

  • Page 92

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 62 - - Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation The polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1 or G13.1) cannot be started or terminated in the tool radius/tool nose radius compensation mode (G41 or G42). G12.1 or G13.1 must be specified in t...

  • Page 93

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 63 - WARNING 1 Consider lines L1, L2, and L3. ΔX is the distance the tool moves per time unit at the feedrate specified with address F in the Cartesian coordinate system. As the tool moves from L1 to L2 to L3, the angle at which the tool mov...

  • Page 94

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 64 - C-axisABCDX-axis -10.+10. [Example] G90 G00 X10.0 C0. ; G12.1 ; G01 C0.1 F1000 ; X-10.0 : G13.1 ; Automatic speed control for polar coordinate interpolation Suppose that the maximum cutting feedrate of the rotary axis is 360 (3600 deg/mi...

  • Page 95

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 65 - Example Sample program for polar coordinate interpolation in a Cartesian coordinate system consisting of the X-axis (a linear axis) and a hypothetical axis N204N205N206N203N202N201N208N207N200ToolC axisHypothetical axis Path after cutter...

  • Page 96

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 66 - 4.9 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) 4.9.1 Cylindrical Interpolation In cylindrical interpolation function, the amount of movement of a rotary axis specified by angle is converted to the amount of movement on the circumference to allow li...

  • Page 97

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 67 - For the C axis of parameter No.1022, 6 (axis parallel with the Y axis) may be specified instead. In this case, however, the command for circular interpolation is G19 C_Z_; G02 (G03) Z_C_R_; - Tool radius/tool nose radius compensatio...

  • Page 98

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 68 - - Rotary axis control function If a rotary axis using the multiple rotary axis control function is specified at the start of the cylindrical interpolation mode, the rotary axis control function is automatically disabled in the cylindrical...

  • Page 99

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 69 - Example ZC R C2301901500 mm Z deg110 90 70 120 30 60 70 270N05 N06 N07 N08 N09N10N11N12N13 36060 Example of a Cylindrical Interpolation O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ); N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; N03 G07.1 C57299 ...

  • Page 100

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 70 - NOTE Only a positive value is effective as the radius of the workpiece. If a negative value is specified, alarm PS0175 is issued. Explanation By using bit 2 (DTO) of parameter No. 3454, it is possible to switch the rotation axis command ...

  • Page 101

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 71 - 4.10 CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the tool center so that the tool axis always moves along a specified path on the cylindrical surface, towa...

  • Page 102

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 72 - Z-axisC-axis on the cylindrical surface Y-axisS1C1C2 N1 N2V Tool center path Programmed path V : C-axis component of C1 - C2 C1 : Cutting surface of block N1 C2 : Cutting surface of block N2 Fig. 4.10 (b) Cutting point compensation betwe...

  • Page 103

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 73 - (3) When cutting point compensation is not applied between blocks When, as shown in Fig.4.10 (d) and Fig.4.10 (e), the cutting point compensation value (V in the Fig.4.10 (d) and Fig.4.10 (e)) is less than the value set in parameter No....

  • Page 104

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 74 - Z-axis C-axis on the cylindrical surface Y-axisC1C2V Tool center path Programmed pathV : C-axis component of C2 - C1 C1 : Cutting surface of blocks N1 and N2 C2 : Cutting surface at the end of block N3 C1N1 N2N3L1L2 Fig.4.10 (f) When the...

  • Page 105

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 75 - Z axis A axisY axis X axis C axis Fig. 4.10 (h) When used with normal direction control (1) When the normal direction changes between blocks N1 and N2, cutting point compensation is also performed between blocks N1 and N2. As shown in ...

  • Page 106

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 76 - Y-axis X-axis C1C2V1Tool center path (G42)Programmed path V1 : A-axis component of C2-C1 C1 : Cutting surface of block N1 C2’ : Cutting surface at the end point of block N2N1N2S1A-axis on the cylindrical surface Normal direction vector ...

  • Page 107

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 77 - (2) The actual speed indication and feedrate during circular interpolation are as described below. Actual speed indication The speed component of each axis after cutting point compensation at a point in time during circular interpolation ...

  • Page 108

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 78 - G64 : Cutting mode G65 to G67 : Macro call G90, G91 : Absolute programming, incremental programming - Parameter To enable this function, set bit 5 (CYA) of parameter No. 19530 to 1. Limitation - Overcutting during inner corner cutti...

  • Page 109

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 79 - N05 C20.0 ; ......................................................(2) N06 G02 Z110.0 C60.0 R10.0 ; ............................(3) N07 G01 Z100.0 ;..................................................(4) N08 G03 Z60.0 C70.0 R40.0 ; ............

  • Page 110

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 80 - The cutting surface in the rotary axis direction in (3) and (4) are uniform even if the tool radius compensation amount is modified. - Example of specifying cutting point interpolation for cylindrical interpolation and normal direction ...

  • Page 111

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 81 - 4.11 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (G02.3, G03.3) Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore, exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation wi...

  • Page 112

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 82 - Format Positive rotation (ω = 0) G02. 3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ; Negative rotation (ω = 1) G03. 3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ; X_ : Specifies an end point with an absolute or incremental value. Y_ : Specifies an end point with an a...

  • Page 113

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 83 - The relationship is expressed as follows. {}(0))tan()tan(*1)(*)tan(*2)(ZIBeIUrθZKθ+−−=..............(1) {})tan(1*1)(*)tan(*2)(IeIUrθXKθ−−=........................(2) θπθAω*2360*1)()(−= Where IJKtantan= ω: Helix directi...

  • Page 114

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 84 - X (linear axis)Rotation angle θΔθKX2X1 Fig. 4.11 (c) Span value K - Rotation axis θ In exponential interpolation, Expression (7) indicates the relationship between the X coordinate and the rotation angle θ about the A-axis. The expr...

  • Page 115

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 85 - XYI > 0I > 0I < 0I < 0YYYXXXExample) Fig. 4.11 (e) Taper angle I - Helix angle J The sign of the helix angle J is assigned as illustrated below. XJ > 0J > 0XExample)XJ < 0J < 0XJJJJ Fig. 4.11 (f) Helix angle J

  • Page 116

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 86 - Example N10 G90 G01 X5.0 Z1.575 ;N20 G02.3 X25.0 Z2.273 I3.0 J-45.0 K1.0 R1.238F1000 Q1000 ;ZAXr = 3.0Z(0) = 1.4J = 45°I = 3.0°U = 5.0X = 25.0B = 2.0°XeXsXs: Start point on theX-axisXe: End point on theX-axis The start point and end po...

  • Page 117

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 87 - 4.12 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (G05.1) Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. • For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactly ...

  • Page 118

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 88 - To cancel them, cancel smooth interpolation (G5.1 Q0) first, and then cancel tool length compensation (G49). [Example] O0010 … (G5.1 Q1 R1;) G43 H1; G5.1 Q2 X0 Y0 Z0; … G5.1 Q0; G49; … M30; If the following functions are required be...

  • Page 119

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 89 - Example of machined parts Automobile parts Decorative parts, such as body side moldings Length of line segment Short Long Resulting surfaces produced using high-precision contour control Smooth surface even when machining is performed exa...

  • Page 120

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 90 - - Conditions for enabling smooth interpolation Smooth interpolation is performed when all the following conditions are satisfied. If any of the following conditions is not satisfied for a block, that block is executed without smooth inter...

  • Page 121

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 91 - N04 X1000 Z50 ; G05. 1 Q0 ; N05 X1000 Z50 ; . N06 X1000 Z-25 ; . N07 X1000 Z-175 ; N08 X1000 Z-350 ; N09 Y1000 ; Interpolated by smooth curve Interpolated by smooth curve (Example)N17 N16...

  • Page 122

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 92 - • Tool retract and recover • Retrace • Active block cancel • Interruption type custom macro - Functions that cannot be used together with smooth interpolation Smooth interpolation cannot be used together with the functions below....

  • Page 123

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 93 - In the G5.1 Q3 block, specify the axis subject to nano smoothing. Note that up to three axes can be subject to the nano smoothing command at a time and that only the following axes can be specified. • Basic three axes (X,Y,Z) • Axes p...

  • Page 124

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 94 - Example: Switching from nano smoothing to nano smoothing 2 O0010 … G5.1 Q3 X0 Y0 Z0; G5.1 Q0; G5.1 Q3 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 B0; … G5.1 Q0; … M30; Nano smoothing (for 3-axis machining) Nano smoothing 2 (for 5-axis machining) Explanation Gene...

  • Page 125

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 95 - If 0 is specified in parameter No. 19581, the minimum travel distance in the increment system is considered to be the tolerance. - Nano smoothing 2 Nano smoothing 2 performs smooth interpolation for the basic three axes (or their parall...

  • Page 126

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 96 - N1 N2N3 θ1 θ2 θ1: Difference in angle between blocks N1 and N2θ2: Difference in angle between blocks N2 and N3 Fig. 4.13 (e) If the value specified in the parameter is 0, no decision is made at the corner on the basis of the d...

  • Page 127

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 97 - • Cutting mode • Coordinate system rotation/3-dimensional coordinate system conversion cancel • Polar coordinate command cancel • Normal direction control cancel • Polar coordinate interpolation cancel • Programmable mirror im...

  • Page 128

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 98 - - Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation If tool radius/tool nose radius compensation is specified in the nano smoothing mode, the nano smoothing mode is cancelled. Then, when the command of tool radius/tool nose radius compensation ca...

  • Page 129

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 99 - - Functions that cannot be used simultaneously The nano smoothing function cannot be used simultaneously with the following functions. • Parallel axis control • Twin table control - Background graphic display The background graphic...

  • Page 130

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 100 - 4.14 NURBS INTERPOLATION (G06.2) Many computer-aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies. T...

  • Page 131

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 101 - Format G06.2[P ] K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ] [F ]; K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; : K X Y Z [α ] [β ][R ]; K ; : K ; G01 . . . G06.2 : Start NURBS interpolation mode P : Rank o...

  • Page 132

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 102 - This rank is represented by k in the defining expression indicated in the description of NURBS curve below. For example, a NURBS curve having a rank of four has a degree of three. The NURBS curve can be expressed by the constants t3, t2, ...

  • Page 133

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 103 - - Command in NURBS interpolation mode In NURBS interpolation mode, any command other than the NURBS interpolation command (miscellaneous function and others) cannot be specified. - Manual intervention If manual intervention is attempt...

  • Page 134

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 104 - YZX1000.2000. 4.14.1 NURBS Interpolation Additional Functions In the FANUC Series 30i/31i, NURBS interpolation provides the following additional functions: - Parametric feedrate control The maximum feedrate of each segment is determine...

  • Page 135

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 105 - Example 1. Specified program G90 G06.2 X0. Y0. K0. F2000 ; X10. Y10. K0. F1500 ; X20. Y20. K0. F1800 ; X30. Y30. K0. ; X40. Y40. K1. X50. Y50. K2. K3. K3. K3. K3. 2. Specified speed Speed Time 1500 1800 2000 3. Parametric ...

  • Page 136

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 106 - - High-precision knot command If bit 1 (HIK) of parameter No. 8412 is set to 1, knot commands with a whole number of up to 12 digits and a decimal fraction of up to 12 digits can be specified. This function can be used only for knot comm...

  • Page 137

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 107 - G06.2 [P ] [K ] [IP ] [R ] [F ] ; K IP [R ] ; K IP [R ] ; K IP [R ] ; … K IP [R ] ; K ; … K ; G01… … G06.2 : NURBS interpolation mode ON P : Rank of the NURBS curve IP : Control poin...

  • Page 138

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 108 - 4.15 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION (G07) In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is enabled. When one of the circular interpolatio...

  • Page 139

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 109 - - Move command Specify hypothetical axis interpolation only in the incremental mode. - Coordinate rotation Hypothetical axis interpolation does not support coordinate rotation. Example - Sine interpolation YZ20.0010.0 N001 G07 X0...

  • Page 140

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 110 - 4.16 VARIABLE LEAD THREADING (G34) Specifying an increment or a decrement value for a lead per screw revolution enables variable lead threading to be performed. Fig. 4.16 (a) Variable lead screw Format G34 IP_ F_ K_ Q_ ; IP_ : End point...

  • Page 141

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 111 - 4.17 CIRCULAR THREADING (G35, G36) Using the G35 and G36 commands, a circular thread, having the specified lead in the direction of the major axis, can be machined. LL: Lead Fig. 4.17 (a) Circular threading Format A sample format for t...

  • Page 142

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 112 - FXZKRIEnd point (Z, X)Arc centerStart point Explanation - Specifying the arc radius If R is specified with I and K, only R is effective. - Shift angle If an angle greater than 360° is programmed, it is set to 360°. M - Specifying ...

  • Page 143

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 113 - Limitation - Range of specifiable arc An arc must be specified such that it falls within a range in which the major axis of the arc is always the Z-axis or always the X-axis, as shown in Fig. 4.17 (b) and Fig. 4.17 (c). If the arc inclu...

  • Page 144

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 114 - Start pointCenterEnd pointrCenterEnd pointrStart point Fig. 4.17 (e) Movement when the end point is not on an arc

  • Page 145

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 115 - 4.18 SKIP FUNCTION (G31) Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupte...

  • Page 146

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 116 - Example - The next block to G31 is an incremental programming G31 G91 X100.0 F100;Y50.0;50.0100.0Skip signal is input hereActual motionMotion without skip signalYX Fig. 4.18 (a) The next block is an incremental programming - The next b...

  • Page 147

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 117 - 4.19 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G31) In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4-point or 8-point ; 8-point when a high-speed skip signal is used) is tu...

  • Page 148

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 118 - Format G31 IP ; G31; One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified) 4.21 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT Overview In macro variables #100151 to #100200 (#5061 to #5080) for reading the skip position...

  • Page 149

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 119 - Explanation - Custom macro variables If a high-speed skip signal is input when G31P90 is issued, absolute coordinates are stored in custom macro variables #5061 to #5080. For a system exceeding 20 axes, they are stored in variables #100...

  • Page 150

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 120 - Format G31 P98 Q_ α_ F_ G31 P99 Q_ α_ F_ G31 : Skip command (one-shot G code) P98 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor reaches the limit value. P99 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor re...

  • Page 151

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 121 - (1) At point A, the machine comes in contact with the object under measurement and stops. At this time, because the torque limit value is not reached, no skip operation is performed, move commands are continuously output, and the current...

  • Page 152

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 122 - Position during a skip operation Current position of the CNCMachine position Error Position compensated for by reflecting the delay Position not reflecting the delayCoordinate origin Stop point NOTE 1 Specify only a single axis with th...

  • Page 153

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 123 - Explanation - G code group G02.4 and G03.4 are modal G codes of group 01. They therefore remain effective until another G code in group 01 is specified. - Start point, mid-point, and end point An arc in a 3-dimensional space is uniqu...

  • Page 154

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 124 - - Velocity commands As the velocity command, specify the tangential velocity along the arc in the 3-dimensional space. Limitation - Cases in which linear interpolation is performed • f the start point, mid-point, and end-point are on...

  • Page 155

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 125 - • 2nd reference position return G30 • 3rd, 4th reference position return G30 • Skip G31 • Threading G33 • Automatic tool length measurement G37 • 3-dimensional cutter compensation G41 • Tool offset G45,G46,G47,G48 • Progr...

  • Page 156

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 126 - - Other limitations When the following function is used, 3-dimensional circular interpolation cannot be used: • Arbitrary angular axis control A limitation may be imposed on other NC command combinations. See the description of each f...

  • Page 157

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 127 - 5 FEED FUNCTIONS Chapter 5, "FEED FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 5.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................127 5.2 ...

  • Page 158

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 128 - - High-speed and high-precious machining function The machining precision can be improved by using AI contour control function I or II. Refer to the Section of "AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION I AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION II" in "...

  • Page 159

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 129 - 5.3 CUTTING FEED Overview Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded with numbers after the F code. In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block ...

  • Page 160

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 130 - T Feed per minute G98 ; G code (group 05) for feed per minute F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min) Feed per revolution G99 ; G code (group 05) for feed per revolution F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/rev or inch/rev) Inverse time feed (G93) G93 ; I...

  • Page 161

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 131 - • For milling machining WorkpieceTableToolFeed amount per minute(mm/min or inch/min) • For lathe cutting Feed amount per minute (mm/min or Íinch/min) F Fig. 5.3 (b) Feed per minute CAUTION No override can be used for some commands such ...

  • Page 162

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 132 - • For lathe cutting Feed amount per spindle revolution(mm/rev or inch/rev)F Fig. 5.3 (c) Feed per revolution CAUTION When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the more frequently f...

  • Page 163

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 133 - Example - For linear interpolation (G01) distancefeedratetime(min)1FRN== Feedrate: mm/min (for metric input) inch/min (for inch input) Distance: mm (for metric input) inch (for inch input) - To end a block in 1 (min) 1(min)11(min)1=...

  • Page 164

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 134 - N04 G94 X10.0 F100.0 ; N05 Y10.0 ; N06 G95 X10.0 ; ⇒ Alarm PS0011 is issued. N07 Y10.0; M30; NOTE 1 In G93 mode, if the axis command and the feedrate (F) command are not in the same block, alarm PS1202, "NO F COMMAND AT G93" is issued...

  • Page 165

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 135 - Reference See Appendix D for range of feedrate command value.

  • Page 166

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 136 - 5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4 (a). Table 5.4 (a) Cutting Feedrate Control Function name G code Validity of G code Description Exact stop G09 This function is valid for specified blocks ...

  • Page 167

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 137 - 5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64), Tapping Mode (G63) Explanation The inter-block paths followed by the tool in the exact stop mode, cutting mode, and tapping mode are different (Fig. 5.4.1 (a)). Tool path in the exact stop modeTool...

  • Page 168

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 138 - θ θ θ θ : Tool : Programmed path : Tool center path 1. Straight line-straight line 2. Straight line-arc 3. Arc-straight line 4. Arc-arc Fig. 5.4.2 (a) Inner corner - Override range When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the fee...

  • Page 169

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 139 - c daLsLebLsLe(2)Programmed pathTool center path Tool Fig. 5.4.2 (d) Override Range (Straight Line to Arc, Arc to Straight Line) - Override value An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run and ...

  • Page 170

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 140 - If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc/Rp 0; the tool stops. A minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is to be specified with parameter No. 1710. When Rc/Rp≤MDR, the feedrate of the tool is (F×MDR). If parameter No. 1710 is 0, the minimum deceleration ra...

  • Page 171

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 141 - Feedrate of liner axis(X axis) ()minmmXLXFF/′Δ×= Feedrate of rotary axis(C axis) ()mindegCLCFF/′Δ×= Synthetic movement distance ()mmCClZYXL2222180⎟⎠⎞⎜⎝⎛Δ××+Δ+Δ+Δ=′π Movement time ()minFLT′=′ lC : imaginary rad...

  • Page 172

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 142 - (1) If 10.000 (10 mm) is set for the imaginary radius parameter No. 1465, the calculating formula is: ())()()/()()/()()(min/)(2)()(24719755.1017453292.0107453292.12957795.577453292.110107453292.11801010180secminminmmmmmindegmmdegmmCmmdegmmCFLTFBl...

  • Page 173

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 143 - Reference position The speed component on the rotary axis is excluded.The specified speed F is regarded as the movement speed at the reference position. Fig. 5.5 (b) Limitation The feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis supp...

  • Page 174

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 144 - 5.6 DWELL Format M G04 X_; or G04 P_; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted) P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted) T G04 X_ ; or G04 U_ ; or G04 P_ ; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decim...

  • Page 175

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 145 - M Specify dwell also to make an exact check in the cutting mode (G64 mode). If the specification of P and X is omitted, an exact stop occurs. Diagnosis display 2 Dwell execution status While dwell is being executed, “1” is displayed.

  • Page 176

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 146 - 6 REFERENCE POSITION A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position. Chapter 6, "REFERENCE POSIT...

  • Page 177

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 147 - A (Starting point for reference position return) C (Destination of return from the reference position) R (Reference position) Automatic reference position return (G28) A → B → R Movement from the reference position (G29) R → B → C B (I...

  • Page 178

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 148 - Format - Automatic reference position return and 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return In-position check disable reference position return G28 IP_; Reference position return G30 P2 IP_; 2nd reference position return (P2 can be omitted.) G30 P...

  • Page 179

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 149 - - Movement from the reference position (G29) This function is executed after the tool is returned to the reference position by G28 or G30. For incremental programming, the command value specifies the incremental value from the intermediate p...

  • Page 180

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 150 - NOTE 1 To this feedrate, a rapid traverse override (F0,25,50,100%) is applied, for which the setting is 100%. 2 After a reference position has been established upon the completion of reference position return, the automatic reference position ...

  • Page 181

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 151 - In this case, the tool moves in the direction for reference position return specified in parameter ZMIx (bit 5 of No. 1006). Therefore the specified intermediate position must be a position to which reference position return is possible. NOTE...

  • Page 182

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 152 - - When the movement passes an intermediate position. G28G90X1000.0Y500.0 ; (Programs movement from A to B. The tool moves to reference position R via intermediate position B.) T1111 ; (Changing the tool at the reference position) G29X1300.0Y...

  • Page 183

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 153 - traverse rate. Before using G30.1, cancel the compensation functions, such as tool radius compensation and tool length compensation. A floating reference point is not lost even if power is turned off. The function for movement from the referen...

  • Page 184

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 154 - 7 COORDINATE SYSTEM By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes. When three program ...

  • Page 185

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 155 - The reference position is not always the origin of the machine coordinate system. (See Item, "Setting a machine coordinate system" described later.) Format M (G90)G53 IP _ P1; IP_ : Absolute command dimension word P1 : Enables the hi...

  • Page 186

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 156 - Limitation - Cancel of the compensation function When the G53 command is specified, cancel the compensation functions such as the cutter compensation, tool length compensation, tool nose radius compensation, and tool offset beforehand. - G5...

  • Page 187

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 157 - Y axis 100050 150 X axisTemporarily decelerates and stops.

  • Page 188

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 158 - 7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM Overview A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 189

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 159 - Example M 25.2 X Z 23.0 0 XZ600.01200.00If an absolute command is issued, the base point moves to the commanded position. In order to move the tool tip to the commanded position, the difference from the tool tip to the base point is compensate...

  • Page 190

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 160 - Example 1 Block in which G43/G44 is issued 2 Block which is in the G43 or G44 mode and in which an H code is issued 3 Block which is in the G43 or G44 mode and in which G49 is issued 4 Block in which, in the G43 or G44 mode, compensation vector...

  • Page 191

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 161 - 7.2.3 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing an external workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin offset value. Three methods are available to chan...

  • Page 192

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 162 - - Changing by setting a workpiece coordinate system By specifying a workpiece coordinate system setting G code, the workpiece coordinate system (selected with a code from G54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpiece coordinate system so that ...

  • Page 193

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 163 - Example T XX'Tool positionA160100100100200If G50X100Z100; is commanded when the tool ispositioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, workpiececoordinate system 1 (X' - Z') shifted by vector A iscreated.New workpiece coordinate systemOriginal workpiece...

  • Page 194

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 164 - Format M G92.1 IP 0 ; IP 0 : Specifies axis addresses subject to the workpiece coordinate system preset operation. Axes that are not specified are not subject to the preset operation. T G50.3 IP0 ; (G92.1 IP 0; for G code system B or C) IP 0 :...

  • Page 195

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 165 - WZn-Machine zero pointWorkpiece originoffset valueWZoG54 workpiececoordinate system beforemanual interventionG54 workpiece coordinatesystem after manualinterventionPoPnAmount ofmovement duringmanual intervention In the operation above, a workp...

  • Page 196

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 166 - Format - Selecting the additional workpiece coordinate systems G54.1Pn ; or G54Pn ; Pn : Codes specifying the additional workpiece coordinate systems n : 1 to 48 or 1 to 300 - Setting the workpiece origin offset value in the additional work...

  • Page 197

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 167 - 7.2.6 Automatic Coordinate System Setting When bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 for automatic coordinate system setting is 1, a coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is performed. Once α, β, and...

  • Page 198

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 168 - Format - Changing the workpiece coordinate system shift amount G10 P0 IP_; IP : Settings of an axis address and a workpiece coordinate system shift amount CAUTION A single block can contain a combination of X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, and H (in G ...

  • Page 199

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 169 - 7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system. Format G...

  • Page 200

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 170 - CAUTION 3 Whether the local coordinate system is canceled at reset depends on the parameter setting. The local coordinate system is canceled when either bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 or bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No.1202 is set to 1. In 3-dim...

  • Page 201

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 171 - Example Plane selection when the X-axis is parallel with the U-axis. G17 X_Y_ ; XY plane, G17 U_Y_ ; UY plane G18 X_Z_ ; ZX plane X_Y_ ; Plane is unchanged (ZX plane) G17 ; XY plane G18 ; ZX plane G17 U_ ; UY plane G18Y_ ; ZX plane...

  • Page 202

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 172 - XYZG17 plane Fig.7.5 (b) G17 The circle at the origin indicates that the positive direction of the axis perpendicular to this page is the direction coming out of the page (in this case, the Z-axis is perpendicular to the XY plane). XYZG...

  • Page 203

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 173 - YZXG19 plane Fig.7.5 (e) G17.1P3 X ZYG18 plane Fig.7.5 (f) G17.1P4 Y ZXG19 plane Fig.7.5 (g) G17.1P5 Program commands on the G17 plane are converted to the following commands by plane conversion: Table7.5 (b) Program commands ...

  • Page 204

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 174 - Plane conversion Command G17.1P1 G17.1P2 G17.1P3 G17.1P4 G17.1P5 I I I J -I -J J J K K K K K K -J I J -I G41 G41 G42 G41 G41 G42 G42 G42 G41 G42 G42 G41 Tool length compensation + - + + - Direction of coordinate rotation + - + + - Direction of ...

  • Page 205

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 175 - Example The machining program created on the G17 plane in the right-hand Cartesian coordinate system is converted to appear the same figure when viewed from the direction indicated by G17.1P2 command. XYZ Y X Z - Z Y XG17 G17.1P2 ZMachine co...

  • Page 206

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 176 - - Automatic reference position return (G28 and G30) - Floating reference position return (G30.1) - Return from the reference position (G29) - Selecting the machine coordinate system (G53) - Stored stroke limit (G22) - Setting the coordinate sys...

  • Page 207

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 177 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Chapter 8, "COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION", consists of the following sections: 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING ...............................................................177...

  • Page 208

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 178 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Example M Absolute programming Incremental programming G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ; G91 X-60.0 Y40.0 ; YX70.0 30.0 40.0100.0End point Start point T Tool movement from point P to point Q (diameter programming is used for the X-axis) G cod...

  • Page 209

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 179 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be selected by G code. Format G20 ; Inch input G21 ; Metric input This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting t...

  • Page 210

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 180 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION • Manual intervention performed with the manual absolute signal being off • Move command issued with the machine locked • Move command issued using a handle interrupt • Mirror image-based operation • Workpiece coordinat...

  • Page 211

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 181 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION• Move command issued using a handle interrupt • Mirror image-based operation • Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece coordinate system setting (G92) If an axis is unde...

  • Page 212

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 182 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION 8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses: M X, Y, Z, U...

  • Page 213

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 183 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSIONNOTE 2 When more than eight digits are specified, an alarm occurs. If a value is entered with a decimal point, the number of digits is also checked after the value is converted to an integer according to the least input increment. E...

  • Page 214

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 184 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Item Notes Display of axis position Displayed as diameter value 8.5 DIAMETER AND RADIUS SETTING SWITCHING FUNCTION Overview Usually, whether to use diameter specification or radius specification to specify a travel distance on e...

  • Page 215

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 185 - 8.COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION - Switching method using a G code (programmable diameter/radius specification switching) The format of a G code for diameter/radius specification switching is as follows: Format G10.9 IP_ ; IP_ : Address and command value of an ...

  • Page 216

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 186 - 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Limitation - Feedrate A radius-based feedrate is specified in both of diameter specification and radius specification at all times. - Data not switchable The following data follows the setting of parameter DIAx, so that diamet...

  • Page 217

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 187 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value following address S. Chapter 9, "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 9.1 SPECIFYIN...

  • Page 218

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 188 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - Constant surface speed controlled axis command G96Pα ; P0 : Axis set in the parameter No. 3770 P1 : 1st axis, P2 : 2nd axis, P3 : 3rd axis, P4 : 4th axis P5 : 5th axis, P6 : 6th axis, P7 : 7th axis, P8 : 8th axis NOTE ...

  • Page 219

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 189 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) The spindle speed (min-1) almost coincideswith the surface speed (m/min) at approx.160 mm (radius). Spindle speed (min-1) Relation between workpiece radius, spindle speed and surface speedRadius (mm)Surface speed S is 600 m/mi...

  • Page 220

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 190 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - Surface speed specified in the G96 mode G96 modeG97 modeSpecify the surface speed in m/min(or feet/min)G97 commandStore the surface speed in m/min(or feet/min)Command forthe spindlespeedSpecifiedThe specifiedspindle speed...

  • Page 221

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 191 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - Constant surface speed control for rapid traverse (G00) In a rapid traverse block specified by G00, the constant surface speed control is not made by calculating the surface speed to a transient change of the tool position, ...

  • Page 222

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 192 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle positioning function involves the following three operations: 1. Canceling the spindle rotation mode and entering the spindle positioning mode Place the spindle in the spindle positioning mode and establish a re...

  • Page 223

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 193 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)9.4.2 Spindle Positioning The spindle can be positioned with a semi-fixed angle or arbitrary angle. - Positioning with a semi-fixed angle Use an M code to specify a positioning angle. The specifiable M code value may be one o...

  • Page 224

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 194 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) Program reference positionAB180°90° G-code system A in lathe systemG-code system B or C in lathe system, and machining center system Command format Address used Command A-B in the above figureAddress used and G code Comma...

  • Page 225

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 195 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) CAUTION 5 The spindle positioning axis is handled as a controlled axis. Therefore, controlled axis-related signals (such as the overtravel signal) must be set. 6 When using the rigid tapping function and the spindle positionin...

  • Page 226

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 196 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) 9.5 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION Overview With this function, an overheat alarm OH0704, “OVERHEAT” is raised and the spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle speed deviates ...

  • Page 227

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 197 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)G25 disables the spindle speed fluctuation detection function. When G25 is specified, the parameters Nos. 4914, 4911, 4912, and 4913 are unchanged. When the power is turned on or after a reset (clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of param...

  • Page 228

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 198 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - Examples of spindle speed fluctuation detection (Example 1) When an alarm OH0704 is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed Specified speed Actual speed Time AlarmStart of checkSpecification of a...

  • Page 229

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 199 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)Si : Allowable variation width Parameter No.4913, address I If the difference between the specified speed and actual speed exceeds both Sr and Si, an alarm OH0704 is raised. - Relationship between spindle speed control and ea...

  • Page 230

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 200 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) When you turn SV speed control mode signal OFF while rotating, spindle indexing is executed. Then SV speed control mode is turned off. Spindle indexing is executed with R0(absolute position 0). Format G96.4 P_ ; SV speed co...

  • Page 231

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 201 - 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - SV speed control mode cancellation If G96.1 is used to perform spindle indexing, the SV speed control mode is canceled when spindle indexing is completed. If G96.2 is used to perform spindle indexing, G96.3 can be used to ch...

  • Page 232

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 202 - 10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) Chapter 10, "TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .........................................................................................

  • Page 233

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 203 - NOTE 1 The maximum number of digits of a T code can be specified by parameter No.3032 as 1 to 8. 2 When parameter No.5028 is set to 0, the number of digits used to specify the offset number in a T code depends on the number of tool of...

  • Page 234

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 204 - Tool management function 64 sets 64 sets in total Tool management function 240 sets 240 sets in total Tool management function 1000 sets 1000 sets in total NOTE For the number of tool management data sets, refer to the relevant manu...

  • Page 235

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 205 - The machine (PMC) determines tool breakage and stores corresponding information through the window. In tool management of the CNC, a broken tool is regarded as being equivalent to tools whose lives have expired. • Tool information ...

  • Page 236

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 206 - NOTE When the machine control type is the combined system type, tool length compensation and cutter compensation numbers are used for paths for the machining center system, and for paths for the lathe system, tool geometry compensati...

  • Page 237

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 207 - • Spindle positions and standby positions, regarded as special cartridge positions, have fixed cartridge numbers 11 to 14 (the positions of the first to fourth spindles) and 21 to 24 (the first to fourth standby positions). • With...

  • Page 238

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 208 - . . . . . Tool management data- Data of each tool such as type number, life status, and compensation number - The number of sets of data is 64, 240, or 1000. Cartridge management table- This table indicates the cartridge and pot to ...

  • Page 239

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 209 - - Tool search order Tools having a tool type number (T) specified by a program are searched sequentially from tool management data number 1 while registered data contents are checked. The following shows how a search operation is mad...

  • Page 240

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 210 - - System variables The following tool management data of the tool being used as a spindle after a tool change by M06 and the tool to be used next which is specified by a T code can be read through custom macro variables: Being used I...

  • Page 241

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 211 - Being used Item #8468 Customize data 38 #8469 Customize data 39 #8470 Customize data 40 When a cartridge number of a spindle position (11 to 14) or standby position (21 to 24) is specified in #8400, information about the correspondin...

  • Page 242

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 212 - Multi-path system Depending on whether the local path is a machining center system or a lathe system, tool compensation numbers are specified by using one of the above methods. Spindle selection When specifying compensation numbers o...

  • Page 243

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 213 - G10 L75 P1; N_ ; Tool management data number specification T_ C_ L_ I_ B_ Q_ H_ D_ S_ F_ J_ K_ ; P0 R_ ; Customization data 0 P1 R_ ; Customization data 1 P2 R_ ; Customization data 2 P3 R_ ; Customization data 3 P4 R_ ; Customization...

  • Page 244

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 214 - Modifying tool management data Tool management data can be modified. The specification of those items that are not modified may be omitted. G10 L75 P2 ; N_ ; T_ C_ L_ I_ B_ Q_ H_ D_ S_ F_ J_ K_ ; P_ R_ ; N_ ; : G11 ; Deleting to...

  • Page 245

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 215 - For a spindle position table and standby position table, only cartridge number data is specified. Example) G10 L76 P2 ; N11 R1; Changes the tool management data number of the spindle position to No. 1. N21 R29; Changes the tool manag...

  • Page 246

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 216 - N3 ; Specifies customization data 3. P1 R32 ; character ‘space’ ASCII code 20h P2 R77 ; character “M” ASCII code 4Dh P3 R69 ; character “E” ASCII code 45h P4 R65 ; character “A” ASCII code 41h P5 R83 ; character “S...

  • Page 247

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 217 - P6 R76 ; character “L” ASCII code 4Ch P7 R0 ; Clears data. (Not displayed. End) G11 ; 10.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT EXTENSION FUNCTION Overview The following functions have been added to the tool management function: 1. Customization of...

  • Page 248

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 218 - R Item Display width Remarks 6 L-COUNT 10 7 MAX-LIFE 10 8 NOTICE-L 10 9 L-STATE 6 or 12 The display width is switched by bit 1 of parameter No. 13201. 10 S (Spindle speed) 10 11 F (Feedrate) 10 12 Tool figure number (A) 3 • O...

  • Page 249

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 219 - R Item Display width Remarks 84 CUSTOM 4 10 85 CUSTOM 5 10 86 CUSTOM 6 10 87 CUSTOM 7 10 88 CUSTOM 8 10 89 CUSTOM 9 10 90 CUSTOM 10 10 91 CUSTOM 11 10 92 CUSTOM 12 10 93 CUSTOM 13 10 94 CUSTOM 14 10 95 CUSTOM 15 10 96 CUSTOM 16 10 97...

  • Page 250

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 220 - Example Example of setting tool offset memory A G10L77P3; N1 R1; N2 R2; N3 R3; N4 R4; N5 R5; N6 R6; N7 R7; N8 R8; N9 R9; N10 R11; N11 R21; N12 R22; N13 R80; N14 R81; N15 R-1; G11; Set tool management data screen display customization...

  • Page 251

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 221 - Example 1: Page 2 NOTE 1 This setting is enabled when bit 0 (TDC) of parameter No. 13201 is set to 1. 2 Up to 20 pages can be set. 3 Be sure to specify an end. 4 If an item that requires the corresponding option is specified without...

  • Page 252

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 222 - Explanation - Spindle position/standby position setting (N_) Specify a spindle position or standby position to be renamed. The table below indicates the values to be specified. Spindle position First Second Third Fourth 1st path 111...

  • Page 253

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 223 - In the MG item on the tool management data screen, spindle 1 is displayed as "SP1", and standby 1 is displayed as "WT1". NOTE Data registered becomes effective after the screen display is switched to the tool ma...

  • Page 254

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 224 - NOTE 1 If G10 L77 P5 is terminated normally, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 2 The setting becomes effective after the power is turned off then back on. 3 When the number of decimal places is set for custom...

  • Page 255

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 225 - G10L77P5; <1> Set customize data decimal point position N1 R3; <2> Set 3 as decimal point position of customize data 1 N2 R1; <3> Set 1 as decimal point position of customize data 2 G11; <4> Cancel the setting...

  • Page 256

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 226 - Item Description Data length 1 byte (flag data) #5 REV 0: A life count period of 1 sec is used. (S) 1: A life count period of 8 msec is used. (M) Range of count is as follows. 1sec: 0 to 3,599,999 seconds (999 hours 59 minutes 59 sec...

  • Page 257

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 227 - <Registration of new tool management data> G10 L75 P1 ; N_; A_; G11 ; N_: Tool management data number A_: Specify tool figure number (0 to 20). <Modification of tool management data> G10 L75 P2; N_; A_; G11 ; N_: Tool ...

  • Page 258

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 228 - 10.5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Tools are classified into several groups, and a tool life (use count or use duration) is specified for each group in advance. Each time a tool is used, its life is counted, and when the tool life expires, a n...

  • Page 259

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 229 - M If the tool life management B function is enabled, the function for selecting a tool group by an arbitrary group number can be used. T The tool life management B function can be used. However, the function for selecting a tool grou...

  • Page 260

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 230 - Table 10.5.1 Maximum numbers of registrable groups and tools Bit 1 (GS2) of parameter No. 6800 Bit 0 (GS1) of parameter No. 6800Number of groups Number of tools 0 0 1/8 of maximum number of groups (parameter No. 6813) 32 0 1 1/4 of ma...

  • Page 261

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 231 - - Arbitrary group number M If a function for allowing specification of arbitrary group numbers is used (bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1), an arbitrary group number can be specified with a T code to select a tool life management...

  • Page 262

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 232 - Format - Registration after deletion of all groups M Format Meaning G10L3; P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : G11; M02(M30); G10L3: Register data after deleting data of all groups. P-: Group number L-: Tool life value ...

  • Page 263

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 233 - - Change of tool life management data M Format Meaning G10L3P1; P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : P-L-; T-H-D-; T-H-D-; : G11; M02(M30); G10L3P1: Start changing group data. P-: Group number L-: Tool life value T-: Tool number H-: Code for sp...

  • Page 264

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 234 - CAUTION If the Q command is omitted, the life count type is set according to the setting of bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800. - Arbitrary group number M If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter...

  • Page 265

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 235 - NOTE 1 If the remaining life setting (R) is 0 or omitted, the remaining life is assumed to be 0. In this case, the tool life expiration prior notice function is disabled. 2 The remaining life setting (R) cannot exceed the life value (...

  • Page 266

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 236 - 10.5.3 Tool Life Management Commands in Machining Program Explanation M - Commands The following commands are used for tool life management: T○○○○○○○○; Specifies a tool group number. The tool life management funct...

  • Page 267

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 237 - D99; Selects the D code registered in tool life management data for the currently used tool to perform cutter compensation. Parameter No. 13266 can be used to enable compensation according to a D code other than D99. D00; Cance...

  • Page 268

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 238 - T If the tool change type is the ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1), commands are specified in the same manner as for the M series except that neither H99 nor H00 is used for the T series. See the description for the M s...

  • Page 269

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 239 - NOTE If life counting is not performed, or if the specified tool does not belong to the group for which life counting is being performed, alarm PS0155 is issued. The numbers of digits in and 99/88 vary as follows: No.5028 99 88 1 T ...

  • Page 270

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 240 - Example: Suppose that the tool life management ignore number is 100. T101 ; : M06 ; : T102 ; : M06 T101 ; : : : T103 ; : M06 T102 ; : G43 H99 ; : G41 D99 ; : D00 ; : H00 ; A tool whose life has not expired is selected from group 1. (S...

  • Page 271

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 241 - - Tool change type D For a tool selected by a tool group command (T code), life counting is performed by a tool change command (M06) specified in the same block as the tool group command. Specifying a T code alone does not results in...

  • Page 272

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 242 - 10.5.4 Tool Life Counting and Tool Selection Either use count specification or duration specification is selected as the tool life count type according to the state of bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No. 6800. Life counting is performed for...

  • Page 273

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 243 - - Use count specification (LTM=0) If a tool group command (T○○99 code) is issued, a tool whose life has not expired is selected from the specified tool group, and the life counter for the selected tool is incremented by one. Unle...

  • Page 274

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 244 - - M99 If the life count is specified by use count and bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 6802 is 1, the tool change signal TLCH is output and the automatic operation is stopped if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M9...

  • Page 275

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 245 - Example: Suppose that M16 is a tool life count restart M code and that the tool life management ignore number is 100. Also suppose that the life count is specified by use count. T101 ; A tool whose life has not expired is selected ...

  • Page 276

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 246 - M T NOTE 1 The tool life count restart M code is treated as an M code not involved in buffering. 2 If the life count type is use count specification, the tool change signal is output if the life of at least one tool group has expire...

  • Page 277

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 247 - If the setting of parameter No. 6846 is 0, the remaining tool number notice signal TLAL is not output. The remaining tool number notice signal TLAL becomes "0" when: • A value is input to parameter No. 6846. • Using a G...

  • Page 278

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 248 - 11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION Overview There are two types of auxiliary functions; auxiliary function (M code) for specifying spindle start, spindle stop, program end, and so on, and secondary auxiliary function (B code) for specifying index table po...

  • Page 279

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 249 - - M98 (Calling of subprogram) This code is used to call a subprogram. The code and strobe signals are not sent. See the Section, “SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)” for details. - M99 (End of subprogram) This code indicates the end of a subprogram...

  • Page 280

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 250 - 11.3 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION Overview Classifying a maximum of 500 M codes into a maximum of 127 groups allows the user: • To receive an alarm if an M code that must be specified alone is included when multiple M codes are specified in a b...

  • Page 281

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 251 - 4 Move the cursor to the M code to be set using page keys and cursor keys. You can also enter the number of the M code to be set and press soft key [NO.SRH] to move the cursor to the M code. 5 Enter a group number and press soft key [INPUT] o...

  • Page 282

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 252 - NOTE 1 If the format is invalid, an alarm PS1144, “G10 FORMAT ERROR” is issued. 2 If an M code group cannot be set for the M code specified for the P command or if the group number specified for the R command is not within the range betwe...

  • Page 283

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 253 - Explanation - Range of specification -99999999 to 99999999 - Output value The value specified after the address of the second auxiliary function is output on the code signals B00 to B31. Note the following about a output value. 1. When a ...

  • Page 284

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 254 - Table 11.4 (a) Magnifications for an output value when the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified for desktop calculator decimal point input Setting unit Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No.3405 = 0 Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No.34...

  • Page 285

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 255 - 12 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Chapter 12, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", consists of the following sections: 12.1 FOLDERS..................................................................................................................................

  • Page 286

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 256 - [Initial folder configuration] / SYSTEM/ //CNC_MEM MTB1/ USER/ PATH1/ PATH2/ LIBRARY/(1) Root folder (2) System folder (SYSTEM) (3) MTB dedicated folder 1 (MTB1) (5) User folder (b) Common program folder (LIBRARY) (a) Path folders (PATHn) Th...

  • Page 287

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 257 - /SYSTEM/[Sample folder configuration]//CNC_MEMMTB1/USER/PATH1/PATH2/LIBRARY/User created foldersPrograms are grouped bypart to be machined, and theprogram groups are stored inindividual folders.CYLINDER/PISTON/GEAR1/GEAR2/MTB2/ 12.1.2 Folder...

  • Page 288

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 258 - - Foreground default folder A folder used for foreground operations except automatic operations and program editing is set. The target operations include: • Program input/output • External data input • External workpiece number search ...

  • Page 289

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 259 - Example) Program names that can be treated as program numbers O123 Program number 123 O1 Program number 1 O3000 Program number 3000 O9999 Program number 9999 O12345678 Program number 12345678 Program names that cannot be treat...

  • Page 290

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 260 - 12.2.2 Program Attributes The following attributes can be set for programs: • Edit disable • Edit/display disable • Encoding • Change protection level/output protection level - Edit disable Editing of a specified program can be disa...

  • Page 291

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 261 - <1> Folders containing the main program <2> Common program folder, which is an initial folder (LIBRARY) Bit 7 (SCF) of parameter No. 3457 can be used to add the following search folders. (The folders are searched in the order l...

  • Page 292

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 262 - • Subprogram call in figure copying (G72.1, G72.2) • Program I/O with external devices - Subprogram call by program name - Macro call by program name • Subprogram call (M98) • Macro call (G65/G66/G66.1) • Interruption type macro ...

  • Page 293

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 263 - 12.3.3 Related Parameters This subsection lists the meanings of parameters related to program numbers and the folders and programs to be manipulated or executed. Parameter No. Bit No. Description Manipulation/execution target 0 (NE8) Disable...

  • Page 294

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 264 - Part program storage size Number of registerable programs Number of registerable programs expansion 1 Number of registerable programs expansion 2 (*2) 128Kbyte 63 250 - 256Kbyte 63 500 - 512Kbyte 63 1000 - 1Mbyte 63 1000 2000 2Mbyte 63 1000 4...

  • Page 295

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 265 - 13 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION Overview - Main program and subprogram There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountere...

  • Page 296

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 266 - - Program section configuration A program section consists of several blocks. A program section starts with a program number or program name and ends with a program end code. Program section configuration Program section Program numb...

  • Page 297

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 267 - A leader section generally contains information such as a file header. When a leader section is skipped, even a TV parity check is not made. So a leader section can contain any codes except the EOB code. - Program start The program start...

  • Page 298

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 268 - The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, when a file is output, the mark is automatically output at the end of the file. If an attempt is made to execute % when M02 or M30 is not placed at the end of the program, the alarm PS5010,...

  • Page 299

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 269 - Example) % ; <PARTS_1> ; N1 ... : M30 ; % NOTE A program name can be coded: - At the beginning of a program - Immediately after M98, G65, G66, G66.1, M96, G72.1, or G72.2 Do not code a file name in other than the above. - ...

  • Page 300

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 270 - Table 13.2 (b) Major functions and addresses Function Address Meaning Program number O(*) Program number Sequence number N Sequence number Preparatory function G Specifies a motion mode (linear, arc, etc.) X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C Coordi...

  • Page 301

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 271 - Function Address Input in mm Input in inch Increment system IS-A ±999999.99 mm ±999999.99 deg. ±99999.999 inch *3 ±999999.99 deg. Increment system IS-B ±999999.999 mm ±999999.999 deg. ±99999.9999 inch *3 ±999999.999 deg. Increment ...

  • Page 302

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 272 - The values and uses for some codes are limited by parameter setting. (For example, some M codes are not buffered.) For details, refer to the parameter manual. - Optional block skip When a slash followed by a number (/n (n=1 to 9)) is sp...

  • Page 303

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 273 - 3. When the signal BDTn is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block that contains /n, the block is ignored. BDTn "1" "0" Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200.; N234 . . . . This range of information is ...

  • Page 304

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 274 - 13.3 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99) If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify the program. A subprogram can be called from the main program....

  • Page 305

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 275 - NOTE 1 When calling a subprogram of a 4-digit or shorter subprogram number repeatedly (P8 digit), make the subprogram number 4 digits by prefixing it with “0” if the subprogram number is shorter than 4 digits. Example) P100100: Call su...

  • Page 306

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 276 - Example M98 P51002 ; This command specifies "Call the subprogram (number 1002) five times in succession." A subprogram call command (M98P_) can be specified in the same block as a move command. X1000.0 M98 P1200 ; This examp...

  • Page 307

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 277 - - Using a subprogram only A subprogram can be executed just like a main program by searching for the start of the subprogram with the MDI. (See Section, “PROGRAM SEARCH” for information about search operation.) In this case, if a bloc...

  • Page 308

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 278 - NOTE If bit 0 (SQC) of parameter No. 6005 is ”0”, and an M98 Pxxxx Qxxxxx command is specified, alarm PS0009, "IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS", is issued.

  • Page 309

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 279 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING14 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Chapter 14, "FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING", consists of the following sections: 14.1 FIGURE COPYING (G72.1, G72.2) ...............................................................

  • Page 310

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 280 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Explanation - First block of the subprogram Always specify a move command in the first block of a subprogram that performs a rotational or linear copying. If the first block contains only the program number such as O1234; an...

  • Page 311

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 281 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Block end position The coordinates of a figure moved rotationally or linearly (block end position) can be read from #5001 and subsequent system variables of the custom macro of rotational or linear copying. - Disagreement ...

  • Page 312

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 282 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Commands that must not be specified Within a program that performs a rotational or linear copying, the following must not be specified: • Command for changing the selected plane (G17 to G19) • Command for specifying po...

  • Page 313

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 283 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Rotational copying (spot boring) Main programO3000 ;N10 G92 G17 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0)N20 G72.1 P4000 L6 X0 Y0 R60.0 ;N30 G80 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0)N40 M30 ;SubprogramO4000 N100 G90 G81 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ ; ...

  • Page 314

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 284 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Combination of rotational copying and linear copying (bolt hole circle) Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 G17 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N20 G72.1 P2000 X0 Y0 L8 R45.0 ; N30 G80 G00 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N40 ...

  • Page 315

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 285 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING• For lathe cutting XX'Z'ZSurface to bemachinedB#3#2#1#4YZMachining such as milling, pocketing, and drilling is performed. Format M G68 XpX1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rα ; Starting 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion : ...

  • Page 316

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 286 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING Explanation - Command for 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion (program coordinate system) N1 G68 Xp x1 Yp y1 Zp z1 I i1 J j1 K k1 R α ; N2 G68 Xp x2 Yp y2 Zp z2 I i2 J j2 K k2 R β ; N3 : Nn G69 ; 3-dimensional coor...

  • Page 317

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 287 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Format error If one of the following format errors is detected, alarm PS5044, “G68 FORMAT ERROR” occurs: 1. When I, J, or K is not specified in a block with G68 (a parameter of coordinate system rotation is not specifie...

  • Page 318

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 288 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING (2) Coordinate system conversion on the YZ plane ⎟⎟⎟⎠⎞⎜⎜⎜⎝⎛−=θθθθcossin0sincos0001M (3) Coordinate system conversion on the ZX plane ⎟⎟⎟⎠⎞⎜⎜⎜⎝⎛−=θθθθcos0sin010sin0cosM - T...

  • Page 319

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 289 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGG30 Second, third, or fourth reference position return G31 Skip function G53 Selecting the machine coordinate system G65 Custom macro call G66 Custom macro modal call G67 Custom macro modal call cancel G40 Canceling tool ...

  • Page 320

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 290 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING For acceleration/deceleration after interpolation When bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221 is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), rapid traverse in the drilling direction in a canned cycle for drilling in the tilted worki...

  • Page 321

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 291 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - Relationship between 3-dimensional and two-dimensional coordinate system conversion 3-dimensional and two-dimensional coordinate system conversion use identical G codes (G68 and G69). A G code specified with I, J, and K is p...

  • Page 322

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 292 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING (Example) Limitation - Manual intervention 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion does not affect the degree of manual intervention or manual handle interrupt. - Positioning in the machine coordina...

  • Page 323

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 293 - 14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING - 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion and other continuous-state commands M Canned cycles, G41, G42, or G51.1 must be nested between G68 and G69. (Example) G68 X100. Y100. Z100. I0. J0. K1. R45. ; : G41 D01 ; : G40 ; ...

  • Page 324

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 294 - 14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING - Manual reference position return If manual reference position return is performed in the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, alarm PS5324 occurs. If you want to perform manual reference position return, cancel...

  • Page 325

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 295 - 15 COMPENSATION FUNCTION Chapter 15, "COMPENSATION FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 15.1 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49)...................................................................295 15.2 SCALING (...

  • Page 326

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 296 - Format Type Format Description Tool length compensation A G43 Z_ H_ ; G44 Z_ H_ ; Tool length compensation B G17 G43 Z_ H_ ; G17 G44 Z_ H_ ; G18 G43 Y_ H_ ; G18 G44 Y_ H_ ; G19 G43 X_ H_ ; G19 G44 X_ H_ ; Tool length compensation C G43 α_...

  • Page 327

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 297 - Example : H1 ; The offset value of offset number 1 is selected. : G43 Z_ ; Offset is applied according to the offset value of offset number 1. : H2 ; Offset is applied according to the offset value of offset number 2. : H0 ; Offset is ...

  • Page 328

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 298 - Example 1 When tool length compensation B is executed along the X-axis and Y-axis G19 G43 H_ ; Offset in X axis G18 G43 H_ ; Offset in Y axis Example 2 When tool length compensation C is executed along the X-axis and Y-axis G43 X_ H...

  • Page 329

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 299 - Example Actual positionProgrammed position Offset value =4mm #1203030120 #3#2+Y +X3050 +Z 335301822 8Tool length compensation (in boring holes #1, #2, and #3)(1) (2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7) (8)(9)(13)(10)(11) (12) Program H1=-4.0 (Tool length c...

  • Page 330

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 300 - 15.1.2 G53, G28, G30, and G30.1 Commands in Tool Length Compensation Mode This section describes the tool length compensation cancellation and restoration performed when G53, G28, G30, or G31 is specified in tool length compensation mode. ...

  • Page 331

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 301 - - Tool length compensation vector restoration Tool length compensation vectors, canceled by specifying G53, G28, G30, or G30.1 in tool length compensation mode, are restored as described below. Type Bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001Restor...

  • Page 332

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 302 - 15.2 SCALING (G50, G51) Overview A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). Two types of scaling are available, one in which the same magnification rate is applied to each axis and the other in which different magnification...

  • Page 333

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 303 - NOTE 1 Entering electronic calculator decimal point input mode (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 = 1) does not cause the units of the magnification rates P, I, J, and K to change. 2 Setting the least input increment equal to 10 times the ...

  • Page 334

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 304 - Y axis X axis bad a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis o : Scaling center Programmed figure Scaled figure o c Fig. 15.2 (b) Scaling of each axis CAUTION Specifying the following commands at the ...

  • Page 335

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 305 - Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted into a vector in the center direction of each axis. If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, ...

  • Page 336

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 306 - - Scaling and optional chamfering/corner R Chamfering Scaling x 2 in the X direction x 1 in the Y direction Corner R If different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner R results in a spiral, not an arc, because scalin...

  • Page 337

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 307 - T This function is available to G code systems B and C only; it is not available to G code system A. During scaling, the following functions cannot be used. If any of them is specified, alarm PS0300, “ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING” will o...

  • Page 338

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 308 - NOTE 1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. 2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the following results: (1) Circular command ......................................... Directio...

  • Page 339

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 309 - 15.3 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with respect to a programmed axis of symmetry (Fig. 15.3 (a)). Y100605050X60100(1)(2)(3)(4)(1) Original image of a programmed command(2) I...

  • Page 340

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 310 - - Mirror image on a single axis in a specified plane Applying a mirror image to one of the axes on a specified plane changes the following commands as follows : Command Explanation Circular command G02 and G03 are interchanged. Tool radiu...

  • Page 341

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 311 - 15.4 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) Overview When a tool with a rotation axis (C-axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that the C-axis is always perpendic...

  • Page 342

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 312 - Explanation - Angle of the C axis When viewed from the center of rotation around the C-axis, the angular displacement about the C-axis is determined as shown in Fig. 15.4 (d). The positive side of the X-axis is assumed to be 0, the posit...

  • Page 343

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 313 - Center of the arcProgrammed tool path Tool center path The tool is controlled so that the C-axis is always normal to the tool path determined by circular interpolation. A rotation command is inserted so that the C-axis becomes normal to th...

  • Page 344

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 314 - - Movement for which arc insertion is ignored Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with the same normal direction as that of the preceding block. • Linear movement When distance N2, shown below, is smaller than...

  • Page 345

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 315 - 15.5 WORKPIECE SETTING ERROR COMPENSATION When a workpiece is placed on the machine, the workpiece is not always placed at an ideal position. With this function, a displaced workpiece can be machined according to the program. This function...

  • Page 346

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 316 - [About Δx, Δy, and Δz] Δx, Δy, and Δz represent the coordinate values of the origin of the workpiece coordinate system (X'Y'Z' in the Fig. 15.5 (b), which is hereinafter referred to as the "workpiece setting coordinate system&...

  • Page 347

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 317 - X (= X') Z YZ’ Y’ΔaX Z YZ’ Y’ΔbX' X Z YZ’ Y’ΔcX' X Z YZ’Y’X'( Δx, Δy, Δz ) The workpiece coordinate system (X,Y,Z) is rotated about the X-axis by Δa. Further rotated about the Y-axis by Δb. Further rotated about th...

  • Page 348

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 318 - When no table rotation axis is used, or the machine used is not a 5-axis machine, table rotation axis position 1 and table rotation axis position 2 need not be set. No setting can be made for a hypothetical axis. In the descriptions ab...

  • Page 349

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 319 - Table 15.5 (b) No. 00 (COMMON) No. 01 X 0.000 x 5.000 y 10.000 y 0.000 z 0.000 z 0.000 a 0.000 b 0.000 c 2.000 C -90.000 C 90.000 First, the error values of No. 00 are converted to those based on C = 0.000. C positive direction XY X'Y'...

  • Page 350

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 320 - Table 15.5 (c) For metric input Unit system of reference axis IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 Maximum settable value (mm) ±999,999.99 ±999,999.999±99,999.9999±9,999.99999 ±9...

  • Page 351

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 321 - The numbers of macro variables correspond to Errors as follows (Table 15.5 (h)) : Table 15.5 (h) Error No.00 (COMMON)Error No.01Error No.02Error No.03Error No.04Error No.05 Error No.06 ErrorNo.07X direction error Δx #26000 #26010#26020#2...

  • Page 352

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 322 - Format G10 L23 P_ X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ I_ J_; P : Workpiece setting error number 0 to 7 X : X-direction error Δx Y : Y-direction error Δy Z : Z-direction error Δz A : Rotational error Δa B : Rotational error Δb C : Rotational error Δc ...

  • Page 353

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 323 - - Settings on a 5-axis machine With a 5-axis machine, the following parameters must be set: Table 15.5 (i) Parameter No. Description 19680 Type of mechanical section 19681 Controlled axis number of the first rotation axis 19682 Axis dire...

  • Page 354

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 324 - NOTE 2 In a block for starting workpiece setting error compensation, the absolute coordinate on a rotation axis is changed considering the workpiece setting error. At this time, depending on the machine configuration, a rotation axis for o...

  • Page 355

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 325 - NOTE 2 Set the following parameters for acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation since acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation is automatically enabled: (1) Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401=1: Linear ra...

  • Page 356

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 326 - Tool rotation type Table rotation typeComposite typeRotation axis closer to the tool Rotation axis closer to the workpiece - Singular point and singular point posture on a 5-axis machine A tool posture is uniquely determined w...

  • Page 357

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 327 - - Conditions to decide that Tool is in singular posture When the angle between the tool and the singular posture is less than the parameter No.11204, it is decided that the tool is in singular posture. In the descriptions below, the descr...

  • Page 358

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 328 - X Y The tool posture in the machine coordinate systemThe calculated tool posture after movement (Singular) The tool posture before movement (Singular) In this case, the rotation axis about the Z-axis (the rotation axis closer to the work...

  • Page 359

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 329 - X Y The tool posture in the machine coordinate systemThe tool posture after movement (Singular) The tool posture before movement (Singular) In this case, the rotation axis about Z-axis (the rotation axis closer to the workpiece) moves ...

  • Page 360

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 330 - (3) In the case that the current machine position is singular and the position after movement in real time is not singular. : In order to position the tool to the correct direction, there are two pairs of solutions of rotation axes angles ...

  • Page 361

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 331 - Assume that the tool posture after the compensation of tool direction becomes like following figure. X Y The tool posture in the machine coordinate systemThe tool posture after movement (Not singular) The tool posture before movement (N...

  • Page 362

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 332 - In the case that rotary axes have movable range and a singular point exists in that range, Workpiece setting error compensation must be activated after the rotary axes have been moved to the range where the rotary axes should move, that is...

  • Page 363

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 333 - X Y Z N40 end B C Absolute -1.0 0.0Machine -1.0 0.0 X Y Z In the middle of N50 X Y Z N50 end B C Absolute 90.0 90.0Machine 90.0 90.0 At N50, machine position moves to B90.0 and C90.0, as commanded. Next, suppose there is the ...

  • Page 364

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 334 - B axis movable range -45deg 100deg B axis position of N20 before Workpiece setting error compensation is activated Singular point 0deg O2 N10 G5.1 Q1 N20 G90 G01 B-1.0 C0 F1000 ; B axis machine position is between the lower limit and the ...

  • Page 365

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 335 - B axis movable range -45deg 100deg Singular point 0degB axis position of N20 before Workpiece setting error compensation is activated O3 N10 G5.1 Q1 N20 G90 G01 B1.0 C0 F1000 ; B axis machine position is between the upper limit and the s...

  • Page 366

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 336 - X Y Z N50 end B C Absolute 90.0 90.0 Machine 90.0 90.0 This time, machine position moves to B90.0,C90.0 during N50. As the result, B axis does not move over the lower limit of B axis movable range. In O2, the case that B axis moves o...

  • Page 367

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 337 - X Y Z In the middle of N50 X Y Z N50 end B C Absolute 90.0 90.0Machine 90.0 90.0 At N50, the machine position moves to B90.0,C90.0. As the result, B axis does not move over the lower limit of B axis movable range. - Error for which...

  • Page 368

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 338 - [Table rotation type example] In a table rotation type, specify the A-axis (rotating about the X-axis) and C-axis (rotating about the Z-axis), respectively, as the master and slave rotation axes. The C-axis is a rotation axis closer to t...

  • Page 369

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 339 - X axis Z axis Workpiece coordinate system WorkpieceControl point Tool length compensation vector Tool tip position (= commanded position) Fig.15.5 (e) Tool tip cutting when there is no workpiece setting error If tool direc...

  • Page 370

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 340 - error, the position of tool tip cutting is correct and the tool direction on workpiece coordinate system matches tool direction when there is no workpiece setting error. (Fig.15.5 (g)) X axis Z axis Workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 371

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 341 - X axisZ axis Workpiece coordinate system WorkpieceTool holder tip Fig.15.5 (i) When there is no workpiece setting error X axisZ axisWorkpiece coordinate systemWorkpieceTool holder tip Workpiece setting error Fig.1...

  • Page 372

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 342 - X axisZ axisWorkpiece coordinate systemWorkpieceTool holder tip Workpiece setting error Tool tip point Fig.15.5 (k) When there is workpiece setting error (When RCM=0) When tool cutter compensation mode: As the above-mentioned...

  • Page 373

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 343 - Tool cutter compensation vector Tool length compensation vector Tool tip point Command pointWorkpieceWorkpiece setting error Fig.15.5 (m) Tool cutter compensation when there is workpiece setting error (When RCM=1) To...

  • Page 374

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 344 - Z axis X axisY axisTool Workpiece setting error Fig.15.5 (p) Tool cutter compensation when there is only workpiece setting error around Z axis (When RCM=0) When drilling is performed, or the workpiece is machined with the side ...

  • Page 375

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 345 - Tool length compensation vector X axis Z axis Workpiece coordinate system Workpiece Fig.15.5 (q) The workpiece is machined with the side of a tool when there is no workpiece setting error Tool length compensat...

  • Page 376

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 346 - Tool length compensation vector X axis Z axis Workpiece coordinate system WorkpieceWorkpiece setting error (rotation error around Y axis) Fig.15.5 (s) The workpiece is machined with the side of a tool when there is workpiec...

  • Page 377

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 347 - - Tolerance for assuming rotation direction errors to be 0 Tolerance for assuming rotation direction errors to be 0 can be set in parameters Nos. 1750 to 11752. When the machine has a table rotation axis When the machine has a table rota...

  • Page 378

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 348 - Since B = 90.0 is set for the table rotation axis position when workpiece setting errors are measured, when the position about the B-axis in the machine coordinate system is 90.0, workpiece setting errors Δa, Δb, and Δc are defined as s...

  • Page 379

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 349 - If a rotation direction error is outside the range set in the corresponding parameters Nos. 11753 to 11758, alarm PS0517, “SETTING ERROR AMOUNT IS OUT OF RANGE” is issued when workpiece setting error compensation is started. When the m...

  • Page 380

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 350 - Parameters Nos.19709 to 19714 are set to 0. (Intersection offset vector) Workpiece setting error compensation axes X, Y, Z, B, C G54 Workpiece coordinate system offset X0.0 Y0.0 Z-150.0 B0.0 C0.0 Workpiece setting error compensation val...

  • Page 381

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 351 - For acceleration/deceleration after interpolation When bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221 is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), rapid traverse in the drilling direction in a canned cycle for drilling in the tilted working plane index...

  • Page 382

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 352 - G54 G55Original workpiece setting position Actual workpiece setting position Workpiece setting error P1 (for G54) Workpiece setting error P2 (for G55) Workpiece setting coordinate system for G54 Workpiece setting coordinate system for G55 ...

  • Page 383

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 353 - Set the number of the workpiece coordinate system on which each of workpiece setting errors Nos. 01 to 07 is based in parameters Nos. 11411 to 11417. For G54 to G59, set 54 to 59. For G54.1P1 to G54.1P300, set 1001 to 1300. When one of th...

  • Page 384

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 354 - Suppose that the workpiece is displaced from the "correct workpiece setting position" as shown in Fig. 15.5 (y). Workpiece setting coordinate system (X'Y'Z') XY Workpiece coordinate system G55 (XYZ) Correct workpiece setting posi...

  • Page 385

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 355 - The machine is of tool rotation type, the C-axis is the master rotation axis and rotates about the Z-axis, and the B-axis is the slave axis and rotates about the Y-axis. For cutting on the plane normal to the movement direction, the tool i...

  • Page 386

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 356 - O2 ; N10 G55 ; Set coordinate system N15 G05.1 Q1 AI contour control mode ON N16 G54.4 P1 Workpiece setting error compensation mode ON N20 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Move to initial position N30 G01 G43.4 H01 Z40.0 F500. ; Start tool c...

  • Page 387

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 357 - G02 Circular interpolation (CW) G03 Circular interpolation (CCW) G04 Dwell G05.1 Q0/Q1 AI contour control mode OFF/ON G10 Programmable data input G11 Programmable data input mode cancel G17 Plane selection (XY) G18 Plane selection (ZX) G19...

  • Page 388

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 358 - T G69.1 Coordinate system rotation / 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion/Tilted working plane indexing cancel G90 Absolute programming (for G code system B and C) G91 Incremental programming (for G code system B and C) G94 Feed per ...

  • Page 389

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 359 - G69.1 Coordinate system rotation/3-dimensional coordinate system conversion/Tilted working plane indexing cancel G90 Absolute programming (for G code system B and C) G91 Incremental programming (for G code system B and C) G94 Feed per minu...

  • Page 390

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 360 - Workpiece coordinate system Y Workpiece setting coordinate systemCenter of mirror Programmed pathActual path X X'Y' If an attempt is made to use workpiece setting error compensation and external mirror image (using the mirror image signa...

  • Page 391

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 361 - - Reset Workpiece setting error compensation mode is canceled by a reset. Performing 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion or tilted working plane indexing in the workpiece setting error compensation mode causes the 3-dimensional co...

  • Page 392

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 362 - Explanation - Tool offset (G43.7) M By specifying a G43.7 command with an H code, it is possible to perform tool offset. This function performs tool offset by using the offset amounts for the X-, Y-, and Z-axes as part of the offset da...

  • Page 393

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 363 - Bit 6 (LVK) of parameter No. 5003 Bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006 Bit 6 (3OC) of parameter No. 5007 Bit 7 (3OF) of parameter No. 5007 Bit 2 (TOP) of parameter No. 11400 Parameters that are not effective in G43.7 mode Bits 0 (TLC) and 1 ...

  • Page 394

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 364 - • G10 data format • Example O0010; G10L200P1X_Z_R_Q_Y_; Overwrite tool wear compensation, such as tool offset. G10L1200P1X_Z_R_Q_Y_; Add tool wear compensation, such as tool offset. G10L201P1X_Z_R_Y...

  • Page 395

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 365 - G10G90L110P1R5.001 G10G90L111P1R6.001 The offset data that supports the L format is: L10 : Z axis tool offset (geometry) L11 : Z axis tool offset (wear) L12 : Tool offset (geometry) L13 : Tool offset (wear) L110 : Corner R offset (g...

  • Page 396

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 366 - When bit 3 (V15) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1 System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2001 to #2200 Z axis tool offset (geometry) (Old name: Tool compensation value (H code, geometry)) Note) Subscript n repre...

  • Page 397

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 367 - Note NOTE This function is an optional function. 15.7 TOOL OFFSET CONVERSION FUNCTION (G44.1) Overview In the complicated machine composition that has rotation axes, the tool offset of each axis and the direction of imaginary tool nose ...

  • Page 398

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 368 - T G44.1 Dα Pn; Tool offset mode ON : : G49; or D0; Tool offset cancel Dα: Offset number is commanded with D-code. If D-code is not commanded in G44.1 block, alarm PS0536, “ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G44.1” occurs. Pn: The direction of im...

  • Page 399

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 369 - N70 X20.0 Y20.0 Z20.0; ← Because G44.1 is not commanded, PS0536 “ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G44.1” occurs. N80 G49; N90 M30; Sample program 2 (Machining center system) N10 G90 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0; N20 G44.1...

  • Page 400

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 370 - SRD(No.19641#1)=1 Direction of rotation ofB-axis is clockwise. SRD(No.19641#1)=0 Direction of rotation ofB-axis is counter-clockwise. Fig.15.7 (d) Direction of rotation of swivel head axis (B-axis) It is set by bit 2 (INW) of the param...

  • Page 401

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 371 - A-type B-type Fig.15.7 (f) Tool types The swivel head axis (β) is approximated to 4 sections (90×n [degree] (n=1,2,3,4)). The approximation of angle of the swivel head axis (β) is shown at Fig.15.7 (g). ④② ③① β Fig.15.7...

  • Page 402

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 372 - β α Imaginary tool nose direction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 315.0≤(1)<360.0 180 2 1 4 3 7 6 5 8 When bit 1 (SRD) of the parameter No. 19641 is set to 1, if β=45.0 is specified, β angle is assumed to be 315.0 on calculation. Therefore, wh...

  • Page 403

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 373 - α=0,β=0 α=180,β=0 α=180,β= - 60 Imaginary tool nose number 8 8 7 Tool nose compensation value of X Rx=+R Rxnew=+R Rxnew=0 Tool nose compensation value of Z Rz=0 Rznew=0 Rznew=+R β=0 α=180 β= - 60α=180 β=0 α=0 Rx Rxnew Rznew ...

  • Page 404

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 374 - offset_z (After conversion) β= - 60α=180offset_x (After conversion)offset_x offset_z β=0 α=0 Pset_z Pset_x Rx Rz +X +Z RxnewRznew Fig.15.7 (j) Change of tool offset value by rotation of α and β Setting of the rotation axis by par...

  • Page 405

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 375 - The axis direction of the tool nose rotation axis must be set to X-axis or Z-axis and the axis direction of the swivel head axis must be set to Y-axis. If the axis direction of the tool nose rotation axis is not set, the reference tool ax...

  • Page 406

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 376 - (4) The following functions cannot be used with this function. - Tilted Working Plane Indexing About measuring of the tool offset The tool offset must be measured when the angle of the tool nose rotation axis and the swivel head axis are ...

  • Page 407

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 377 - Non-effective parameter Bit 6 (EVO) of the parameter No.5001 The setting is fixed to “0: If a tool compensation value is modified in the offset mode (G43 or G44) The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is sp...

  • Page 408

    15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 378 - Diagnosis 1801 Reference angle of the swivel head axis [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] degree (machine unit) [Valid data range] 0.0 to 360.0 The reference angle of the swivel head axis for the tool offset conversion is displayed. T...

  • Page 409

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION - 379 - Diagnosis 1807 Offset value of Y-axis before conversion [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit) The offset value of Y-axis before the tool offset conversion is displayed. This value is the same as the sum of geometry...

  • Page 410

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 380 - 16 CUSTOM MACRO Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general programs such as poc...

  • Page 411

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 381 - - Range of variable values Local and common variables can have a value in the following ranges. If the result of calculation exceeds the range, an alarm PS0111, “OVERFLOW :FLOATING” is issued. When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No.6008 = 0 Maximum...

  • Page 412

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 382 - [Example] Assume that system common parameter No. 6036 is set to 20. If the setting of parameter No. 6036 is not to be reflected in the fourth path only, make the settings below (Table 16.1 (a)). Table 16.1 (a) Path number No.6036 NC1 Area of the c...

  • Page 413

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 383 - (a) Quotation When an undefined variable is quoted, the address itself is also ignored. Original command G90 X100 Y#1 Equivalent command when #1 = <null> G90 X100 Equivalent command when #1 = 0 G90 X100 Y0 (b) Definition/replacement, additi...

  • Page 414

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 384 - #102=[#_ABSKP[#500*2]] ; : #506x (skip position of [#500*2]th axis) is read off and assigned to #102. If a value other than an integer is specified for subscript n, a variable value is referenced, assuming that the fractional portion is rounded o...

  • Page 415

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 385 - The names specified by the command can be used in a program. For example, when 10 is assigned to #510, the expression [#TOOL_NO]=10; can be used instead #510=10;. If the custom macro variable name expansion function is enabled, the SETVN 510[TOOL_N...

  • Page 416

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 386 - - Tool compensation value M Tool compensation memory A System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2001-#2200 #10001-#10999 [#_OFS[n]] R/W Tool compensation value Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 200)...

  • Page 417

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 387 - Tool compensation memory C when bit 3 (V15) of parameter No.6000 = 1 System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2001-#2200 Tool compensation value (H code, geometry) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 20...

  • Page 418

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 388 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2401-#2449 #14001-#14999 [#_OFSY[n]] R/W Y-axis compensation value (*1) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 49). When the number of sets is larger than 49, the ...

  • Page 419

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 389 - (*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes, Y-axis: Y-axis of basic three axes - Tool compensation value when the complex machining tool offset function is enabled M When bit 3 (V15) of parameter No.6000 = 0 Syste...

  • Page 420

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 390 - System variables not dependent on bit 3 (V15) of parameter No. 6000 System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #21001-#21999 [#_CORR_G[n]] R/W Corner R offset (geometry) Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to...

  • Page 421

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 391 - - Time System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #3011 [#_DATE] R Year/Month/Date #3012 [#_TIME] R Hour/Minute/Second - Path number of the parameter to be read or written System variable number System variable name Attrib...

  • Page 422

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 392 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (sequence number) #4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last mi...

  • Page 423

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 393 - T System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #4001-#4030 [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (G code) Note) Subscript n represents a G code group number. #4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal inf...

  • Page 424

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 394 - - Position information System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5001-#5020 End point position of the previous block (workpiece coordinate system) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20) #100001-#100050 [#_ABS...

  • Page 425

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 395 - - Servo position deviation System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5101-#5120 Servo positional deviation Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #100251-#100300 [#_SVERR[n]] R The numbers to the left can al...

  • Page 426

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 396 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #100601-#100650 [#_WZG59[n]] R/W G59 workpiece origin offset value Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 50). Extended workpiece origin offset value #7001-#7020 [#_WZP1[n]...

  • Page 427

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 397 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #100451-#100500 [#_WZG56[n]] R/W G56 workpiece origin offset value Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 50). #100501-#100550 [#_WZG57[n]] R/W G57 workpiece origin offset ...

  • Page 428

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 398 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5561-#5580 Standard fixture offset value (third set) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20). #117151-#117200 [#_FOFS3[n]] R/W The numbers to the left can also be used....

  • Page 429

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 399 - - Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #100851- #100900 [#_ROVLP [n]] R/W Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap Note) Subscript n represents an axis numbe...

  • Page 430

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 400 - Explanation R, W, and R/W are attributes of a variable and represents read-only, write-only, and read/write enabled, respectively. - Interface signal #1000-#1031, #1032, #1033-#1035 (Attribute: R) #1100-#1115, #1132, #1133-#1135 (Attribute: R/...

  • Page 431

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 401 - The input signals at 32 points can be read at a time by reading from system variables #1032 to #1035. 3130021031#2]1000[#1032#×−×+=∑=iii {}∑=×−×=+300313122]1032[#iiiVVn When UIni = 0, Vi = 0. When UIni = 1, Vi = 1. n = 0-3 [Outp...

  • Page 432

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 402 - Variable value Input signal 0.0 Contact opened The output signals at 32 points can be written at a time by writing to system variables #1132 to #1135. The signals can also be read. 3130021131#2]1000[#1132#×−×+=∑=iii {}∑=×−×=+3003131...

  • Page 433

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 403 - Example Structure of DI 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Used for other purposes Sign102 101 100 Structure of DO 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Not used Used for other purp...

  • Page 434

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 404 - - Interface signal R address #1036 to #1067, #1068, #1069 to #1071 (Attribute: R) #1136 to #1167, #1168, #1169 to #1171 (Attribute: R/W) By setting bit 2 (IFR) of parameter No. 6020 to 1, this function is enabled. Set the start address of each R ...

  • Page 435

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 405 - - Tool compensation value #2001-#2800, #10001-#13999, #21001-#22999 (Attribute: R/W) M The compensation values can be obtained by reading system variables #2001 to #2800, #10001 to #13999, or #21001 to #22999 for tool compensation. The compensati...

  • Page 436

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 406 - Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name 1 #11001 [#_OFSG[1]] #10001 [#_OFSW[1]] 2 #11002 [#_OFSG[2]] #10002 [#_OFSW[2]] 3 #11003 [#_OFSG[3]] #10003 [#_OFSW[3]] : : : : : 998 #11998 [#_OFSG[...

  • Page 437

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 407 - H code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name : : : : : 199 #2199 [#_OFSHG[199]] or [#_OFSZG[199]] #2399 [#_OFSHW[199]] or [#_OFSZW[199]] 200 #2200 [#_OFSHG[200]] or [#_OFSZG[200]]...

  • Page 438

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 408 - H code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name 998 #11998 [#_OFSHG[998]] or [#_OFSZG[998]] #10998 [#_OFSHW[998]] or [#_OFSZW[998]] 999 #11999 [#_OFSHG[999]] or [#_OFSZG[999]] #10999 [#_...

  • Page 439

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 409 - D code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name 1 #12001 [#_OFSDG[1]] or [#_OFSRG[1]] #13001 [#_OFSDW[1]] or [#_OFSRW[1]] 2 #12002 [#_OFSDG[2]] or [#_OFSRG[2]] #13002 [#_OFSDW[2]] or [#_OF...

  • Page 440

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 410 - Compensation numberVariable numberVariable name Description 1 #2201 [#_OFSR[1]] 2 #2202 [#_OFSR[2]] 3 #2203 [#_OFSR[3]] : : : 63 #2263 [#_OFSR[63]] 64 #2264 [#_OFSR[64]] Tool nose radius compensation value 1 #2301 [#_OFST[1]] 2 #2302 [#_OFST[2]]...

  • Page 441

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 411 - (*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes, Y-axis: Y-axis of basic three axes <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory • When the number of compensations is 64 or less Compensation numberVariable n...

  • Page 442

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 412 - Compensation numberVariable numberVariable name Description 1 #2901 [#_OFSRG[1]] 2 #2902 [#_OFSRG[2]] 3 #2903 [#_OFSRG[3]] : : : 63 #2963 [#_OFSRG[63]] 64 #2964 [#_OFSRG[64]] Tool nose radius compensation value (geometry) 1 #19001 [#_OFSYG[1]] 2...

  • Page 443

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 413 - Compensation numberVariable numberVariable name Description 1 #2901 [#_OFSRG[1]] 2 #2902 [#_OFSRG[2]] 3 #2903 [#_OFSRG[3]] : : : 63 #2963 [#_OFSRG[63]] 64 #2964 [#_OFSRG[64]] X-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1) 1 #19001 [#_OFSYG[1]] 2 #190...

  • Page 444

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 414 - When parameter NCM(No.6020#3) is set to 1 The end is assumed to be alarm message, and it assumes to be comment section from it ahead. (Example) #3000 =1 (COMMENT 1) (COMMENT 2) (ALARM MESSAGE); - Clock #3001, #3002 (Attribute: R/W) The clock tim...

  • Page 445

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 415 - O9081 ; #3003 = 1 ; G00 Z#18 ; G01 Z#26 ; G00 Z-[ ROUND[#18] + ROUND[#26] ] ; #3003 = 0 ; M99 ; NOTE #3003 is cleared by a reset. - Enabling of feed hold, feedrate override, and exact stop check #3004 (Attribute: R/W) Assigning the foll...

  • Page 446

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 416 - NOTE 4 If exact stop is disabled by #3004, the original exact stop position between cutting feed and positioning block is not affected. #3004 can temporarily disable exact stop in G61 mode or by the G09 command between cutting feed and cutting feed...

  • Page 447

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 417 - For the 32 bits, 0 indicates that a mirror image is disabled and 1 indicates that a mirror image is enabled. [Example] When #3007 is 3, a mirror image is enabled for the 1st and 2nd axes. NOTE 1 The status of a programmable mirror image is not ref...

  • Page 448

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 418 - - Total number of parts and the number of required parts #3901 and #3902 (Attribute: R/W) The number of required parts and the number of machined parts can be displayed on the screen by using the operation time and part number displaying function....

  • Page 449

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 419 - Category Variable number Variable name Description <1> <2> <3> #4002 #4202 #4402 [#_BUFG[2]] [#_ACTG[2]] [#_INTG[2]] Modal information (G code: group 2) : : : : <1> <2> <3> #4030 #4230 #4430 [#_BU...

  • Page 450

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 420 - Category Variable number Variable name Description <1> <2> <3> #4108 #4308 #4508 [#_BUFE] [#_ACTE] [#_INTE] Modal information (E code) <1> <2> <3> #4109 #4309 #4509 [#_BUFF] [#_ACTF] [#_INTF] Mo...

  • Page 451

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 421 - - Position information #5001-#5080, #100001-#100200 (Attribute: R) The end position of the previous block, the specified current position (for the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system), and the skip signal position can be obta...

  • Page 452

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 422 - - Tool length compensation value #5081-#5100, #100201-#100250 (Attribute: R) M Tool length compensation in the block currently being executed can be obtained for each axis by reading system variables #5081 to #5100 or #100201 to #100250. Variable ...

  • Page 453

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 423 - <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory Variable number Variable name Position information Read operation during movement #5081 #5082 #5083 #5084 : #5100 [#_TOFSWX] [#_TOFSWZ] [#_TOFSWY] [#_TOFS[4]] : [#_TOFS[20]] X-axis tool off...

  • Page 454

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 424 - - Servo position deviation #5101-#5120, #100251-#100300 (Attribute: R) The servo position deviation for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5101 to #5120 or #100251 to #100300. Variable number Variable name Position information ...

  • Page 455

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 425 - - Distance to go #5181-#5200, #100801-#100850 (Attribute: R) The distance to go value for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5181 to #5200 or #100801 to #100850. Variable number Variable name Position information Read operation...

  • Page 456

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 426 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Workpiece coordinate system#5221 #5222 : #5240 [#_WZG54[1]] [#_WZG54[2]] : [#_WZG54[20]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value : 20th axis workpiece origin offset...

  • Page 457

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 427 - M The following variables can also be used when bit 5 (D15) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 0: Axis Function Variable number 1st axis External workpiece origin offset value #2500 G54 workpiece origin offset value #2501 G55 workpiece origin of...

  • Page 458

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 428 - Axis Function Variable number External workpiece origin offset value #2750 G54 workpiece origin offset value #2751 G55 workpiece origin offset value #2752 G56 workpiece origin offset value #2753 G57 workpiece origin offset value #2754 G58 work...

  • Page 459

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 429 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Additional workpiece system number #7041 #7042 : #7060 [#_WZP3[1]] [#_WZP3[2]] : [#_WZP3[20]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value : 20th axis workpiece or...

  • Page 460

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 430 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Additional workpiece system number : : : : #115951 #115952 : #116000 [#_WZP300[1]] [#_WZP300[2]] : [#_WZP300[50]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value : 50...

  • Page 461

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 431 - NOTE 1 When variables exceeding the number of control axes are specified, the alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE” occurs. 2 The skip position (detection unit) for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5421 to #5440. 3 To specify these va...

  • Page 462

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 432 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Fixture offset number #5661 #5662 : #5680 [#_FOFS8[1]] [#_FOFS8[2]] : [#_FOFS8[20]] 1st axis reference fixture offset value being selected 2nd axis reference fixture offset value being selected : ...

  • Page 463

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 433 - Compensation number Variable number Variable name AttributeDescription 1 #28001 [#_OFSZ2G[1]] R/W : : : : 999 #28999 [#_OFSZ2G[999]]R/W Second geometry tool offset Z-axis compensation value 1 #29001 [#_OFSY2G[1]] R/W : : : : 999 #29999 [#_OFSY2G[99...

  • Page 464

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 434 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Dynamic tool offset number #118201 #118202 : #118250 [#_DOFS4[1]] [#_DOFS4[2]] : [#_DOFS4[50]] 1st axis dynamic reference tool compensation value 2nd axis dynamic reference tool compensation value...

  • Page 465

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 435 - NOTE 1 Variable #8570 can be used only when the macro executor function is enabled. 2 System variables (#10000 or later) always correspond to system variables specified by their variable names even when #8570 is 1. 3 When an attempt is made to acce...

  • Page 466

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 436 - 16.3 READING AND WRITING VARIABLES FOR ANOTHER PATH By adding a path number to the high-order 8th and 9th digits of a variable, it is possible to read and write a common variable or a system variable for another path. For a list of variables that c...

  • Page 467

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 437 - Caution CAUTION System variables include those that affect automatic operation (for example, variables #3000 to #3999), and they affect the operation on another path. Use great caution when writing them. List of variables that can be read and wr...

  • Page 468

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 438 - - Tool compensation memory M System variable numberAttribute Description #3980 R Tool compensation memory information - Main program number System variable numberAttribute Description #4000 R Main program number - Modal information System ...

  • Page 469

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 439 - - Distance to go System variable numberAttribute Description #5181 to #5200 #100801 to #100850 R Distance to go - Workpiece origin offset value, extended workpiece origin offset value M System variable numberAttribute Description #5201 to #53...

  • Page 470

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 440 - 16.4 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION Various operations can be performed on variables. Program an arithmetic and logic operation in the same way as for a general arithmetic expression. #i=<expression> <Expression> The expression to the...

  • Page 471

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 441 - Explanation - Angle units The units of angles used with the SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN, and ATAN functions are degrees. For example, 90 degrees and 30 minutes is represented as 90.5 degrees. - ARCSIN #i = ASIN[#j]; • The solution ranges are as...

  • Page 472

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 442 - - ROUND function • When the ROUND function is included in an arithmetic or logic operation command, IF statement, or WHILE statement, the ROUND function rounds off at the first decimal place. Example: When #1=ROUND[#2]; is executed where #2 h...

  • Page 473

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 443 - Format Remarks #i = PRM[#j]; Format for a system common, path, or machine group parameter. #i = PRM[#j, #k]; Format for specifying the number of a bit of a system common, path, or machine group parameter. #i = PRM[#j] /[#l]; Format for an axis or s...

  • Page 474

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 444 - - Priority of operations <1> Functions <2> Operations such as multiplication and division (*, /, AND) <3> Operations such as addition and subtraction (+, -, OR, XOR) Example) #1=#2+#3*SIN[#4];<1>, <2> and <3>...

  • Page 475

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 445 - Evaluate the difference between #1 and #2 with: IF [ABS [#1-#2]LT 0.1] Then, assume that the values are equal when the difference does not exceed the allowable error range. • Trigonometric functions The absolute error is guaranteed for trigo...

  • Page 476

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 446 - • The precision of variable values is about 8 decimal digits. When very large numbers are handled in an addition or subtraction, the expected results may not be obtained. Example: When an attempt is made to assign the following values to varia...

  • Page 477

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 447 - 16.5 INDIRECT AXIS ADDRESS SPECIFICATION Overview When the custom macro function is enabled, you can use AX[(axis-number)] in an axis address specification to indirectly specify an axis with its axis number and not to directly specify it with its ...

  • Page 478

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 448 - When the number of controlled axes is 3, the name of the first axis is X, that of the second axis is Y, and that of the third axis is Z 1. #500=AXNUM[X]; A value of 1 is stored in #500. 2. #501=AXNUM[Y]; A value of 2 is stored in #501. 3. #502=A...

  • Page 479

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 449 - Example 1. Reading the value of the third axis of bit 0 (MIR) of bit axis type parameter No. 0012 If parameter No. 0012 (third axis) = 10010001 #2=12 ; Parameter number setting #3=0 ; Bit number setting #4=3 ; Axis number setting If reading data w...

  • Page 480

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 450 - 16.8 BRANCH AND REPETITION In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetition operations are used: Branch and repetition GOTO (unconditional branch) IF (conditiona...

  • Page 481

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 451 - A branch to N10 before the GOTO statement occurs. A branch to N10 after the GOTO statement occurs. WARNING Do not specify multiple blocks with the same sequence number in a single program. It is very dangerous to specify the sequence number of th...

  • Page 482

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 452 - IF[<conditional expression>]THEN If the specified <conditional expression> is satisfied (true), a macro statement specified after THEN is executed. Only a single macro statement is executed. If the values of #1 and #2 are the same, 0...

  • Page 483

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 453 - If theconditionis notsatisfiedWHILE [conditional expression] DO m ; (m=1,2,3)END m ; :ProcessingIf theconditionis satisfied Explanation While the specified condition is satisfied, the program from DO to END after WHILE is executed. If the speci...

  • Page 484

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 454 - - Processing time When a branch to the sequence number specified in a GOTO statement occurs, the sequence number is searched for. For this reason, processing in the reverse direction takes a longer time than processing in the forward direction. Th...

  • Page 485

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 455 - Example Macro program O1000 ; #100=1.2344567 ; #101=1.2345678 ; N10 IF[#100 EQ #101] GOTO 20 ; ... N20 ; N30 IF[#100 NE #101] GOTO 40 ; ... N40 ; ... When a comparison is executed, the target two values are compared after rounded off to the specif...

  • Page 486

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 456 - 16.9 MACRO CALL A macro program can be called using the following methods. The calling methods can roughly be divided into two types: macro calls and subprogram calls. A macro program can also be called during MDI operation in the same way. Macro c...

  • Page 487

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 457 - 16.9.1 Simple Call (G65) When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Data (argument) can be passed to the custom macro program. P : Number of the program to calll : Repetition count (1 by default)Argument : Data pas...

  • Page 488

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 458 - • Argument specification II Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, and K up to ten times. Argument specification II is used to pass values such as 3-dimensional coordinates as arguments. AddressVariablenumberABCI1J1...

  • Page 489

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 459 - - Extended axis name The axis address of an extended axis name cannot be specified as an argument. If an attempt is made to specify it, alarm PS0129, “'G' AS ARGUMENT” is issued. M When a value is specified with no decimal point, the number ...

  • Page 490

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 460 - NOTE 5 When bit 1 (FR3) of parameter No. 1405 is 1, the values in the table need to be incremented by 1. 6 When calculator-type decimal notation is used (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0. T When a ...

  • Page 491

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 461 - NOTE 4 When bit 2 (FM3) of parameter No. 1404 is 1, the values in the table need to be incremented by 3. 5 When calculator-type decimal notation is used (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0. 6 If bit 2...

  • Page 492

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 462 - H=H=H=H=ABBCenter Radius - Calling format G65 P9100 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ff Ii Aa Bb Hh ; X : X coordinate of the center of the circle (absolute or incremental programming) .......................... (#24) Y : Y coordinate of the center of the...

  • Page 493

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 463 - Meaning of variables: #3: Stores the G code of group 3. #5: X coordinate of the next hole to drill #6: Y coordinate of the next hole to drill Sample program (Drill cycle) T Move the tool beforehand along the X- and Z-axes to the position where a ...

  • Page 494

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 464 - G01 W- [#1-#2] F#9 ;........................... Drills the hole. G00 W#1 ;............................................ Moves the tool to the drilling start point. IF [#1 GE #23] GOTO 9 ; .................... Checks whether drilling is completed....

  • Page 495

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 465 - X-25.0 ; (1-3) Execution order of the above program (blocks not containing the move command omitted) (1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (2-1) (3-1) (3-2) (2-1) (2-1) * No modal call is performed after (1-3) because the mode is not the macro call mode. Lim...

  • Page 496

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 466 - G28 G91 X0 Y0 Z0; G92 X0 Y0 Z50.0; G00 G90 X100.0 Y50.0; G66 P9110 Z-20.0 R5.0 F500; G90 X20.0 Y20.0; X50.0; Y50.0; X70.0 Y80.0; G67; M30; - Macro program (program called) O9110; #1=#4001; .......................... Stores G00/G01. #3=#4...

  • Page 497

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 467 - G66 P9110 U5.0 F0.5 ; G00 X60.0 Z80.0 ; Z50.0 ; Z30.0 ; G67 ; G00 X00.0 Z200.0 M05 ; M30; - Macro program (program called) O9110 ; G01 U - #21 F#9 ; ...... Cuts the workpiece. G00 U#21 ;................. Retracts the tool. M99 ; 16.9.3 Modal Ca...

  • Page 498

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 468 - - Call nesting Macro calls can be nested to a depth of up to five levels including simple calls (G65) and modal calls (G66/G66.1). Subprogram calls can be nested to a depth of up to 15 levels including macro calls. - Modal call nesting For a sin...

  • Page 499

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 469 - NOTE 1 In a block in which only an O number, file name, sequence number, EOB, macro statement, or M99 command is specified, a macro is not called for each block. 2 In each block, when an address other than O, file name, or N is specified, it is as...

  • Page 500

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 470 - - Repetition As with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address L. - Argument specification As with a simple call, two types of argument specification are available: Argument specification I and argume...

  • Page 501

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 471 - 16.9.6 Macro Call Using a G Code with a Decimal Point (Specification of Multiple Definitions) When bit 0 (DPG) of parameter No. 6007, by setting the starting G code number with a decimal point used to call a macro program, the number of the starti...

  • Page 502

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 472 - Explanation By setting an M code number from 3 to 99999999 used to call custom macro program O9020 to O9029 in the corresponding parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089, the macro program can be called in the same way as with G65. - Correspondence between p...

  • Page 503

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 473 - Address Variable number Address Variable number AddressVariable number A #1 J #5 S #19 B #2 K #6 T #20 C #3 L *2 U #21 D #7 M #13 *3 V #22 E #8 M(Call code)*4 W #23 F #9 N #14 *5 X #24 G #28 to #32 *1 P #16 Y #25 H #11 Q #17 Z #26 I #4...

  • Page 504

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 474 - NOTE 2 If the M code set in parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089 to call the corresponding macro program is within the M code range for calling programs using multiple M codes, the macro program corresponding to the M code set in parameters Nos. 6080 to 6...

  • Page 505

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 475 - Address Variable number Address Variable number AddressVariable number A #1 J #5 S #19 B #2 K #6 T #20 C #3 L *2 U #21 D #7 M #13 *3 V #22 E #8 M(Call code)*4 W #23 F #9 N #14 *5 X #24 G *1 P #16 Y #25 H #11 Q #17 Z #26 I #4 R #18 *...

  • Page 506

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 476 - 16.9.10 Subprogram Call Using an M Code By setting an M code number used to call a subprogram (macro program) in a parameter, the macro program can be called in the same way as with a subprogram call (M98). O0001 ; : M03 ; : O9001 ; : ...

  • Page 507

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 477 - 16.9.11 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions) By setting the starting M code number used to call a subprogram, the number of the starting subprogram to be called, and the number of definitions, subprogram calls us...

  • Page 508

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 478 - - Argument specification Argument specification is not allowed. Limitation • To call another program in a program called using a T code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be used normally. • When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1, ...

  • Page 509

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 479 - Explanation - Call By setting bit 2 (BCS) of parameter No. 6007 to 1, subprogram O9028 can be called each time a secondary auxiliary function code is specified in a machining program. A secondary auxiliary function specified in a machining progra...

  • Page 510

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 480 - NOTE When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set. T Address Parameter setting Address Parameter setting A 65 L 76 B 66 M 77 F 70 P 80 H 72 Q 81 I 73 R 82 J 74 S 83 K 75 T 84 NOTE When address L is set, the number of repetitio...

  • Page 511

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 481 - • Usage time starts being counted when the M03 command is specified and stops when M05 is specified. System variable #3002 is used to measure the time during which the cycle start lamp is on. The time during which the machine is stopped by feed ...

  • Page 512

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 482 - 16.10 MACRO CALL ARGUMENT FOR AXIS NAME EXPANSION Macro argument can be specified to the address of axis name expansion. By setting the parameter (No.11647), the address of axis name expansion is allocated to local variable number(#1 - #33). This f...

  • Page 513

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 483 - Using the same axis name When using the same axis name, the parameter (No.11647) setting of the smallest axis number becomes effective. The setting of the other axis becomes invalid. Example When using the same axis name and using the axis name e...

  • Page 514

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 484 - Explanation - When the next block is buffered Example 1: Prereading the next block when the system is not in AI contour control mode or cutter compensation mode (G41, G42) N1 N2N3N4 N4N1 X100.0 ; Block being executed NC statement executionMacro ...

  • Page 515

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 485 - Example 3: In cutter compensation mode (G41, G42) N1 G01 G41 X100.0 F100 Dd ;Block being executed NC statement Macro statement Buffer N1N2 N3 N2 #1=100 ; N3 Y100.0 ; N4 #2=200 ; N5 Y150.0 ; N6 #3=300 ; N7 X200.0 ; : N4N3 N5N6N7 Time Block read...

  • Page 516

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 486 - 16.12 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can be registered and edited in the same way as subprograms. The storage capacity is determined by the total length of tape used to store both custom ma...

  • Page 517

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 487 - • POPEN • PCLOS These commands are provided to output variable values and characters through the input/output interface. In the external output commands, RS232-C, Memory card, USB memory, Data Server, and Embedded Ethernet can be specified for ...

  • Page 518

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 488 - (ii) All variables are stored with a decimal point. Specify a variable followed by the number of significant decimal places enclosed in brackets. A variable value is treated as 2-word (32-bit) data, including the decimal digits. It is output as bin...

  • Page 519

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 489 - Example DPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ] Variable value #2=128.47398 #5=-91.2 #30=123.456 are output as follows: (1) Bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6001 = 0 X sp sp sp 128.474 Y- sp sp sp 91.200 T sp 023...

  • Page 520

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 490 - NOTE 2 This operation depends on the specification of FTP server software on the Host computer. Generally, the file is overwritten. Please refer to the specification of the FTP server software for details. - Notice NOTE 1 When an external input/ou...

  • Page 521

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 491 - Note that when a single block stop occurs at a macro statement in cutter compensation mode, the statement is assumed to be a block that does not involve movement, and proper compensation cannot be performed in some cases. (Strictly speaking, the bl...

  • Page 522

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 492 - In word editing, it might become difficult to do the program edit since comment section is inserted. Such a case uses character editing. Comment section cannot be inserted in the character string such as variable number, numeric values, name of var...

  • Page 523

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 493 - When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. When the interrupt signal (UINT, marked with an asterisk (*) in Fig 16.16 (a)) i...

  • Page 524

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 494 - 16.16.2 Details of Functions Explanation - Subprogram-type interrupt and macro-type interrupt There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram-type interrupts and macro-type interrupts. The interrupt type used is selected by bit 5 (MSB) ...

  • Page 525

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 495 - CAUTION For interrupt type I, operation after control is returned differs depending on whether the interrupt program contains an NC statement. When the program number block contains EOB (;), it is assumed to contain an NC statement. (Program conta...

  • Page 526

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 496 - Custom macro interrupt Execution in progress Execution in progress Normal program NC statement in the interrupt program Interrupt signal (UINT) input Fig. 16.16 (c) Custom macro interrupt and NC command (type II) M NOTE During execution of a pro...

  • Page 527

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 497 - While an interrupt program is being executed, the interrupt signal becomes invalid. The signal become valid when the execution of the block that immediately follows the interrupted block in the main program is started after control returns from the...

  • Page 528

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 498 - NOTE When an M99 block consists only of address O, N, P, L, or M, this block is regarded as belonging to the previous block in the program. Therefore, a single-block stop does not occur for this block. In terms of programming, the following <1&...

  • Page 529

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO - 499 - Modal information when control is returned by M99 Pxxxxxxxx The new modal information modified by the interrupt program remains valid even after control is returned. Modal information which was valid in the interrupted block The old modal informa...

  • Page 530

    16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 500 - BBA’AInterrupt generated Programmed tool pathOffset vector Tool center path - Custom macro interrupt and custom macro modal call When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input and an interrupt program is called, the custom macro modal call is c...

  • Page 531

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 501 - 17 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO Chapter 17, "REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO", consists of the following sections: 17.1 TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS ..........................................................................503 17.2 VARIA...

  • Page 532

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 502 - → Real time macro command 3 The operation above is programmed using real time macro commands. Program O0001 ; G92 X0 ; //1 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 30. ] #IOG[99,5] = 1 ; //2 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 50.] ZDO ; G91 G00 Y100 ; ZEND ; //3 ZEDGE [#100...

  • Page 533

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 503 - Example // ZDO ; G91 G00 X100 ; ZEND ; (ZDO and ZEND are reserved words required for the axis control command of an RTM statement, and are detailed later.) The macro command of an RTM statement is a macro statement used with an RTM st...

  • Page 534

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 504 - - Start of a real time macro command An RTM command starts when the execution of the first following NC command starts. Example: When NC command (1) starts execution in the program below, macro commands (2) and (4) are executed in suc...

  • Page 535

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 505 - NOTE 2 If an RTM command is specified using, as a trigger, a block such as a block specifying NURBS interpolation or a multiple repetitive canned cycle that does not necessarily pass the start point or end point of the command, operation ...

  • Page 536

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 506 - #RV[0]=2 #RV[0]=3 So, the value of #RV[0] is 3. Example 2) Priority of modal RTM commands and a one-shot RTM command O0001 ; //3 #RV[0]=3 ; //1 #RV[0]=1 ; // #RV[0]=10 ; //5 #RV[0]=5 ; M02 ; When the program above is executed...

  • Page 537

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 507 - //1 ZEDGE [ #IOG[234.0] EQ 1 ] #RV[0]=1 ; //2 ZDO ; #RV[1]=1 ; #RV[2]=1 ; ZEND ; G04 P10 ; M30 ; - Number of real time macro commands A program can have multiple RTM commands coded. Up to six one-shot RTM commands can be specifie...

  • Page 538

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 508 - NOTE 5 When a function for reading multiple blocks in advance is used, up to three blocks among the blocks read in advance can trigger an RTM command. For example, if the blocks up to the block of (2) are read in advance during execution ...

  • Page 539

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 509 - The variables (system variables and RTM variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are the variables specific to the real time custom macro function. Those variables cannot be used with the custom macro function. NOTE Real time cus...

  • Page 540

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 510 - For the valid signal address range, see the specifications of the PMC as well. When writing to a signal, make the variable unprotected on the PMC signal protection screen (described later) beforehand. Specify an address by using m and ...

  • Page 541

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 511 - - Input/output A value set for PMC signal protection can be input/output. - Input/output format After outputting PMC signal protection, one file (DIDOENBL.TXT) is created. Please execute input/output operation in EDIT mode. The output ...

  • Page 542

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 512 - Format #RV [ m ] Volatile RTM variable m: Volatile RTM variable number (0 to 99) #RVS [ n ] Nonvolatile RTM variable n: Nonvolatile RTM variable number (0 to 31) NOTE 1 RTM variables can be used with an RTM statement only. RTM variabl...

  • Page 543

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 513 - 17.2.2.1 System variables With real time custom macros, position-related information among the system variables of the custom macros can be handled. - Position information #100001 to #100182 (Attribute: Read only) Block end position #1...

  • Page 544

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 514 - NOTE The value of a variable with a number greater than the number of controlled axes is undefined. - Remaining travel distance #100801 to #100832 (Attribute: Read only) By reading the values of system variables #100801 to #100832, the...

  • Page 545

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 515 - Type of operation Operation Description (4) Function #i=SIN[#j] #i=COS[#j] #i=TAN[#j] #i=ASIN[#j] #i=ACOS[#j] #i=ATAN[#j] #i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] #i=ATAN[#j,#k] #i=SQRT[#j] #i=ABS[#j] #i=BIN[#j] #i=BCD[#j] #i=ROUND[#j] #i=FIX[#j] #i=FUP[#j] #i=L...

  • Page 546

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 516 - Reserved word name Syntax Meaning ZDO...ZEND // ZDO B1 B2 B3 ZEND (Multiple statements) B1, B2, and B3 are sequentially executed. The timing chart of an RTM command using these reserved words is indicated below. (Multi-statement control ...

  • Page 547

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 517 - In <real-time-macro-statement>, multiple RTM statements can be coded. In this case, code the following by using ZDO...ZEND of multi-statement structure: // ZONCE [<conditional-expression>] ZDO ; <real-time-macro-statement-1...

  • Page 548

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 518 - In the example above, even if the [#IOG[4,3] EQ 1] is true from the beginning, #RV[0]=#100103 of the RTM statement is not executed. #RV[0]=#100103 is executed when the result of evaluation of [#IOG[4,3] EQ 1] changes from false to true. ...

  • Page 549

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 519 - Explanation While <conditional-expression> is true, the command or commands between ZDO and ZEND after ZWHILE are executed. If <conditional-expression> is not satisfied, the command after ZEND is processed. The same <condi...

  • Page 550

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 520 - Processing 1. ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, and ZDO...ZEND may be used any number times. // ZWHILE […] ZDO ; ZEND ; : Processing // ZONCE[…] ZDO ; ZEND ; : 2. One ZDO...ZEND range must not overlap another ZDO...ZEND range.Processing // ZONC...

  • Page 551

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 521 - O0001 ; G90 G00 X100 Z100; //1 ZWHILE[1] ZDO ; ZEDGE [#IOX[5,2] EQ 1 ] ZDO ; G91 G00 A20. ; ZEND ; ZEND ; //2 ZWHILE[1] ZDO ; ZEDGE [ #100101 LE 50.0 ] #IOY[2,3] = 1 ; ZEND ; #100=100 ; WHILE [ #100 GT 0 ]) DO1 G91 G01 Z-#100 F200. ;...

  • Page 552

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 522 - NOTE 3 The G65 block for calling a real time macro does not make a single block stop. 4 On the other hand, a real time macro program called by real time macro calling makes a single block stop. - Call destination real time program In a ...

  • Page 553

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 523 - // ZDO ; G91 G00 X30 ; (1) Axis control command of the RTM statement #RV[0] = 1 ; (2) Macro command of the RTM statement ZEND ; If an RTM command is executed in a custom macro WHILE DO to END loop, and the same RTM is looked ahead while...

  • Page 554

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 524 - NOTE An axis for which bit 0 (XRT) of parameter No. 8011 is set to 1 is dedicated to real time custom macros, so that such an axis cannot be used with PMC axis control. - Relationship with PMC axis control Axis control based on an RTM ...

  • Page 555

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 525 - CAUTION With the G codes (inch input/metric input) of group 06, the same information as the modal information of an NC statement is used in an RTM statement. Do not change the modal information of group 06 with an NC statement in a bloc...

  • Page 556

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 526 - If an RTM command consists of multiple statements and an axis control command is coded in multiple blocks, only the block of the RTM statement that is currently executing an axis command can be brought to a single block stop by setting th...

  • Page 557

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 527 - Bit 0 (MLE) of parameter No. 8001 Bit 1 (MLS) of parameter No. 8006 - Dry run With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the dry run signal (DRN) for an NC statement or the dry run signal (EDRN) for a PMC axis can be chose...

  • Page 558

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 528 - NOTE 3 An alarm is issued if, during execution of an RTM statement, an attempt is made to execute another RTM statement with the same ID. In the program below, for example, the RTM statement of (1) operates using the NC statement of (2) a...

  • Page 559

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 529 - NOTE Even if bit 4 (RF0) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1, rapid traverse does not stop with a cutting feed override of 0%. - Feed with a specified feedrate (feed per minute) A movement is made at a feedrate specified in F on an axis ...

  • Page 560

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 530 - • Feedrate override With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the feedrate override signal (*FV) for an NC statement or the feedrate override signal (*EFOV) dedicated to PMC axis control can be chosen. NOTE 1 The second f...

  • Page 561

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 531 - NOTE 1 Only one axis can be specified in one block. 2 The absolute command (G90) cannot be specified. 3 The block overlap function cannot be used. 4 Be sure to set the parameters below to 0. If a value other than 0 is set, the feedrate sp...

  • Page 562

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 532 - • Acceleration/deceleration time constant For an acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used for feed with a specified feedrate in an RTM statement when exponential acceleration/deceleration is used, whether to use the time cons...

  • Page 563

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 533 - Format // ZDO ; G90 G53 IP _ ; ZEND ; G90 : G code for absolute command IP _ : Position in machine coordinate system NOTE 1 Only one axis can be specified in one block. 2 The incremental command (G91) cannot be specified. 3 When usin...

  • Page 564

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 534 - NOTE 1 Address P cannot be specified. Only the axis address where bit 0 (XRT) of parameter No.8011 was set to 1 can be specified. 2 When specified without the decimal point, the specification unit depends on inch/metric. 3 When the increm...

  • Page 565

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 535 - • Scaling • Coordinate system rotation • Polar coordinate interpolation • Balance cutting • Feed stop • Constant surface speed control • Positioning function based on optimal acceleration, etc. CAUTION In an RTM statement...

  • Page 566

    17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 536 - - Optional block skip Optional block skip is unusable. A slash (/) that appears in the middle of <expression> (enclosed in [ ] on the right-hand side of an arithmetic/logical expression) is regarded as a division operator; it is no...

  • Page 567

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO - 537 - Event NC command RTM command consisting of a macro command RTM command including an axis control command End of the NC command - If the RTM command being executed is a one-shot RTM command, the command ends. If the RTM command being execu...

  • Page 568

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 538 - 18. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) 18 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) Overview The values of parameters and pitch error compensation data can be entered in a program. This function is used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are chan...

  • Page 569

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 539 - 18.PROGRAMMABLEPARAMETER INPUT (G10)Nppxxxxxxx : Add a path number to the high-order 8th and 9th digits of a parameter number. For pp, set a path number, and for xxxxxxx, set a parameter number. If a path number is omitted or if 0 is set, writing to a parameter f...

  • Page 570

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 540 - 18. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) CAUTION Compatibility with the Series 16i/18i/21i: This model has parameters that are not compatible with the Series 16i/18i/21i. So, before using this function, make a check according to the Parameter Manual (B-64490EN)...

  • Page 571

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 541 - 18.PROGRAMMABLEPARAMETER INPUT (G10)Example 1. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 (when the bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is set to 0) G10L52 ; Parameter entry mode N3404 R 00000100 ; SBP setting G11 ; Cancel parameter entry mode 2. Set bit 2 (SB...

  • Page 572

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 542 - 19 PATTERN DATA INPUT Chapter 19, "PATTERN DATA INPUT", consists of the following sections: 19.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................

  • Page 573

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 543 - (1) Pattern menu screen Fig. 19.2 (a) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 19.2 (b) Pattern data menu screen (15-inch display unit)

  • Page 574

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 544 - (2) Custom macro screen The name of variable and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen. The menu title and pattern name on the pattern menu screen and the variable name on the custom macro screen can be defined The posi...

  • Page 575

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 545 - Fig. 19.2 (e) Custom macro screen (15-inch display unit)

  • Page 576

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 546 - 19.3 EXPLANATION OF OPERATION The following explains how to display the pattern menu screen. For 8.4-/10.4-inch display unit 1 Press function key . 2 Press continuous menu key . 3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU]. For a 15-/19-inch display uni...

  • Page 577

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 547 - Fig. 19.3 (b) Pattern menu screen (15-inch display unit) Select the pattern on this screen The following two methods are effective. • Selection by cursor Move the cursor to the pattern name with the cursor move keys , and press the soft...

  • Page 578

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 548 - Custom macro variable screen The custom macro screen as Fig. 19.3 (c) or Fig. 19.3 (d) is displayed. Fig. 19.3 (c) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 19.3 (d) Custom macro screen when the patte...

  • Page 579

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 549 - NOTE 3 When bit 0 (POC) of parameter No.11318 is set to “1”, The variable number is three digit display. And the value of 12 digits or more is input, 11 digits from head of value are displayed. Example) Input: -123456789.123 → Displ...

  • Page 580

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 550 - 19.4 DEFINITION OF THE SCREEN The definition of the screen is performed by NC program. Program configuration This function is consist of one program for the definition of pattern menu screen and maximum ten programs for the definition of cus...

  • Page 581

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 551 - 19.4.1 Definition of the Pattern Menu Screen Menu title and pattern name are defined as follows. Menu title Pattern name Fig. 19.4.1 (a) Pattern menu screen Definition of menu title The character string displayed in the menu title o...

  • Page 582

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 552 - - Format G65 H91 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ; H91 : Specifies the pattern name P_ : Specifies the menu number of the pattern name The menu number = 1 to 10 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of pattern name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th charact...

  • Page 583

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 553 - 19.4.2 Definition of the Custom Macro Screen The title, variable name and comment are defined as follows. Macro variable nameTitle Comment Fig. 19.4.2 (a) Custom macro screen Definition of title The character string displayed in the t...

  • Page 584

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 554 - - Format G65 H93 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ; H93 : Specifies the variable name P_ : Specifies the variable number Specifies 100 to 199 or 500 to 999 Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the variable name R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characte...

  • Page 585

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 555 - Example The following is example of the custom macro screen. Fig. 19.4.2 (c) Custom macro screen (bit 0 (POC) of parameter No. 11318=0) Fig. 19.4.2 (d) Custom macro screen (bit 0 (POC) of parameter No. 11318=1) O9501; N1 G65 H92 P066079 Q...

  • Page 586

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 556 - 19.4.3 Setting the Character-codes The character cannot be used to specify the NC program. Therefore, the code corresponding to the character is specified. One character is consist of three figures in a half size letter and six figures in a ...

  • Page 587

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 557 - Character Code Comment Character Code Comment Z 090 [ 091 Left square bracket 0 048 ¥ 092 Yen sign 1 049 ] 093 Right square bracket 2 050 ^ 094 3 051 _ 095 Underscore 4 052 5 053 The characters and the codes of the katakana is...

  • Page 588

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 558 - さ ざ し じ す ず せ ぜ そ ぞ 002 040 002 042 002 044 002 046002 048002 050002 052002 054 002 056 002 058た だ ち ぢ っ つ づ て で と 002 060 002 062 002 064 002 066002 068002 070002 072002 074 002 076 002 078ど な に ...

  • Page 589

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 19.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 559 - 格 子 周 心 本 群 停 止 巾 微 004 040 004 042 004 044 004 046004 048004 050004 052004 054 004 056 004 058状 路 範 囲 倍 率 注 側 特 殊 004 060 004 062 004 064 004 066004 068004 070004 072004 074 004 076 004 078距 離 連 ...

  • Page 590

    19.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 560 - 添 頭 同 導 道 熱 年 濃 箱 発 006 040 006 042 006 044 006 046006 048006 050006 052006 054 006 056 006 058抜 伴 必 百 複 物 文 聞 併 忘 006 060 006 062 006 064 006 066006 068006 070006 072006 074 006 076 006 078末 密 有 ...

  • Page 591

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 561 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Chapter 20, "HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 20.1 AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION I AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION II (G05.1) ..................................

  • Page 592

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 562 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 Always specify G05.1, G08, and G05 in an independent block. (Do not specify other G codes at the same time.) 2 G05 can be specified only for AI contour control II. 3 The AI contour control mode can also be turned off at...

  • Page 593

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 563 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20ms20ms20ms20ms1000mm/sec2gradientTangent feedrate1200mm/sec2gradient1414mm/sec2gradient - Acceleration Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the block. Acceleration ...

  • Page 594

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 564 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Deceleration based on a distance If the total distance of the blocks read ahead becomes shorter than or equal to the deceleration distance obtained from the current feedrate, deceleration starts. If the total distance of the bl...

  • Page 595

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 565 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSIf no F command is specified in a G05.1Q1 block, the feedrate specified in parameter No. 7066 is assumed to be the acceleration/deceleration reference speed. If 0 is set in parameter No. 7066, the F command specified in the cutting s...

  • Page 596

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 566 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner By using the speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, if a feedrate change occurs on an axis on each axis at a corner, the ...

  • Page 597

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 567 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSDeceleration to500 mm/minDeceleration to354 mm/min(Example)If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and thepermissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes) If "1" is set, the feedrate is determined not only with...

  • Page 598

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 568 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS In actual machining, permissible error Δr is given, so the maximum permissible acceleration a (mm/sec2) in equation 1 is determined. When a specified feedrate causes the radial error from an arc having a programmed radius to exce...

  • Page 599

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 569 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSX-axisfeedrateN1N2YXN3N4N6N7N8Y-axisfeedrateTangentfeedrateN1N5N9N1N5N9N9N5 The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on the setting of bit 6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500. If "0" is set,...

  • Page 600

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 570 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS (Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with smallline blocksParameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1,radius = 10 mm, permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)The tangentfeedrate isconstant.Tangen...

  • Page 601

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 571 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSTangential feedrateDeceleration with accelerationin ordinary mannerSmooth speed controlTimeCommand with large acceleration Smooth speed control obtains the acceleration by using the figure recognized from the preceding and following...

  • Page 602

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 572 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS θ During descent on the Z-axis The descent angle θ during descent on the Z-axis (angle formed by the XY plane and the tool center path) is as shown in the figure. The descent angle is divided into four areas, and the override v...

  • Page 603

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 573 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS CAUTION 4 Speed control with the cutting load is enabled for all interpolations in the AI contour control mode. This function, however, can be made valid only for linear interpolations by setting bit 4 (ZOL) of parameter No. 19503 t...

  • Page 604

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 574 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Example O0010 … G5.1 Q1; G01 … X1.Y2.Z3.; M220; … M221; X2.Y2.Z4.; … X4.Y1.Z2.; G5.1 Q0; … M30; (Note The way to specify synchronous, composite, and superimposedcontrols differ from one machine tool builder to another. ...

  • Page 605

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 575 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSNotes - About processing macro statements In AI contour control mode, the NC statements of multiple blocks are looked ahead. Macro statements such as arithmetic expressions and conditional branches are processed as soon as they are ...

  • Page 606

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 576 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Format - Changing the smoothing level by a program The smoothing level can be switched on the machining level selection screen or machining quality level adjustment screen; it can also be changed by a program with the following f...

  • Page 607

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 577 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20.4 HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING This function converts the shape to be machined into a data group that can be subject to high-speed pulse distribution, using the macro executor, calls the data group with a CNC command (G05 command), ...

  • Page 608

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 578 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 20.5 HIGH-SPEED BINARY PROGRAM OPERATION High-speed binary program operation creates a profile to be machined as a data group that can be processed with high-speed pulse distribution in an external program and executes the externa...

  • Page 609

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 579 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSExample) When the travel distance is 700 μm per unit time (millimeter machine with increment system IS-B) Since 700 in decimal equals 02BC in hexadecimal, the travel distance is specified as follows: 1514 13 12 11109876543210 0 0 0 ...

  • Page 610

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 580 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Spindle speed TimeAcceleration Symmetrical inthe low-speedand high-speedparts Real acceleration pattern Maximum acceleration line Low-speed High-speed The best ofmotor performance is not drawn. Spindle speed Fig. 20.6 (a) Conv...

  • Page 611

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 581 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS20.7 PATH TABLE OPERATION Overview The Path Table Operation controls each axis independently, based on the Path Table of each axis memorized in the part program memory in synchronization with the time or the spindle/axis position. T...

  • Page 612

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 582 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS % <TIME_TABLE_66_X1>; Program Name R98; Table Header L1000 X10.0; Table Data : L7000 X200.0; Table Data R99; Table Footer % Any comments can be inserted in the Path Table by sandwiching them with parentheses “(“ and ...

  • Page 613

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 583 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS- Spindle Position Reference In case that the Path Table is defined based on the spindle position, the program name should be as follows. The spindle position reference is available for the threading. <SPDL_TABLE_"Table Nu...

  • Page 614

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 584 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS (1) Reference Axis Name In case that the Path Table is based on the axis position, the reference axis name is defined in IP code. Example) In case that axis X1 is the reference axis. <AXIS_TABLE_0123_Y1> ; X1=0 R98 ; (2...

  • Page 615

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 585 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS <TIME_TABLE_11_X>;Q15 R98; : R99; <TIME_TABLE_15_X>;Q13 R98; : : : : : : : R99; <TIME_TABLE_11_Z>;Q25 R98; : : : : R99; <TIME_TABLE_25_Z>;Q23 R98; : R99; ...

  • Page 616

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 586 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS <TIME_TABLE_12_X>;Q14 P13 K1 R98; : : (Motion in case of Skip OFF) : : : R99; <TIME_TABLE_14_X>;R98; : : : R99; <TIME_TABLE_13_X>;Q14 R98; : (Motion in case of Skip ON) : : R...

  • Page 617

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 587 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS L0 L1 L2L3L4 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 Reference valueX axis Position Fig. 20.7 (d) Reference values and axis positions of Axis Motion Table - Format L_ X_ ; L_ : Reference Value X_ : Axis Position (mm / inch / degree), Radius Value (1) Ref...

  • Page 618

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 588 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Least Input Increment Valid Data Range IS-C -99999.9999 mm to 99999.9999 mm -9999.99999 inch to 9999.99999 inch -99999.9999 deg to 99999.9999 deg The axis positions between two specified axis positions are interpolated linearly....

  • Page 619

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 589 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSData of Spindle Command Table - Format Spindle Speed Control L_ S_ (R11) ; L : Reference Value S : Spindle speed (min-1) R11 : Definition of Spindle Speed Control. R11 can be omitted. Start of Spindle Synchronization L_ S_=0 (I_) ...

  • Page 620

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 590 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS NOTE Make the spindle Cs contour control mode to execute the spindle command table in the Path Table Operation. For details, Refer to “Cs CONTOUR CONTROL” in this manual. (1) Reference Value The reference of the time is spe...

  • Page 621

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 591 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS(4) Spindle synchronization Spindle synchronization command is specified in the Path Table of the slaved spindle. In order to activate the spindle synchronization, bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 should be set to 1. It makes the i...

  • Page 622

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 592 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 Spindle Synchronization is not executed in contouring control mode (R31). Specify the same commands as that for master spindle. 2 The setting of grid shift amount in Cs contour control (parameter No. 4135 (Refer to “Param...

  • Page 623

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 593 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS R98 ; L1000 S200 X2=50.0 R41 ; The standard axis is X in path 2 The standard coordinate 50.0 (100.0 as diameter value) The surface speed 200 m/min L4000 R40 ; L5000 S-200 X=50.0 R41 ; The standard axis is X in path1 The...

  • Page 624

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 594 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Table 20.7 (d) Required time interval for switching each mode Current spindle control mode Effective command for spindle Required time interval to complete the command / Movement when the command is specified R11 Spindle speed con...

  • Page 625

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 595 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSNOTE Required time interval until the commands are completed might be different depending on the series of CNC system software. Example 1) The following example is when R42 command is specified during spindle speed control (R11) m...

  • Page 626

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 596 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Valid data range Time Reference:L0 to L99999999.999999 (a unit is msec, it is specified in the multiple of 1. A decimal point can be specified, but it is rounded off.) Axis position Reference:L-999999999 to L999999999 (U...

  • Page 627

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 597 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSNOTE If conversion from Path Table to executive form data ends abnormally, conversion alarm number can be gotten by the C Language Executor or FOCAS2 window library function cnc_rdptcnvalm(). For details, refer to “CNC/PMC window ...

  • Page 628

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 598 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Execution of Path Table The M code, which is specified in parameter No.11100, starts the Path Table Operation. During the Path Table Operation, Path Table Mode signal PTMOD is turned "1". - Format M_ (P_) Q_ ; M_ : M co...

  • Page 629

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 599 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS- Path Table Operation to ISO Program The constant surface speed control mode is cancelled. The spindle speed is preserved. To preserve the spindle rotation direction, adjust the rotation direction with SV reverse signal SVRVS1 to...

  • Page 630

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 600 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS NC program 11 Path Table 12 Path table 14 NC program 21 Path table 24 path 1path 2 Reference value (time reference) NC program 13 Path table 22 0200030000All Path table Operation is finished. The reference time is 0 ...

  • Page 631

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 601 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSBehavior when the following program O0001 is executed on this system is as follows: NC program Axis motion table for the X axis Axis motion table for the Z axis Spindle command table for the spindle S Auxiliary function table ...

  • Page 632

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 602 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Reference value (time reference) Behavior of the X axisBehavior of the Z axisBehavior of the spindle S M code 2000 Current pos.: 100.0mm Connect to Path Table No. 2. Branch on a value of PTSK1 (Gn522.0). - If PTSK = “0”: Path ...

  • Page 633

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 603 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS(10) Languages The following 15 languages are supported. English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, Korean, Portuguese, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Hungarians, the Czech and Polish (11) Servo off On the following co...

  • Page 634

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 604 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS <TIME_TABLE_1111_Z> R98 ; L0 X2.0 ; L1000 X3.0 ; L2000 X4.0 ; R99 ; *ABSM=”0” Manual absolute ON 2.04.06.00.0XZ *ABSM=”1” Manual absolute OFF 2.04.03.05.0 Fig. 20.7 (j) Manual intervention performed en route ...

  • Page 635

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 605 - 20.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS *ABSM=”0” Manual absolute ON 2.04.06.00.0XZ *ABSM=”1” Manual absolute OFF 2.04.03.05.0 Fig. 20.7 (l) When a manual intervention performed en route to Path Table Operation (14) Machine lock If bit 0 (PCA) of parameter No. 11...

  • Page 636

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 606 - 20. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS (23) Coordinate system rotation (M:G68, T:G68.1), 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion (M:G68, T:G68.1) The Path Table Operation can't be started during the coordinate system rotation (M:G68,T:G68.1) or 3-dimensional coordi...

  • Page 637

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 607 - 21 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Chapter 21, "AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 21.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.............................................................................................607 2...

  • Page 638

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 608 - In normal operation, the master axis and the slave axis are moved independently as in the case of normal CNC control. The programmed command Xxxxx makes a movement along the X-axis. The programmed command Aaaaa makes a movement along the...

  • Page 639

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 609 - 21.2 POLYGON TURNING (G50.2, G51.2) Polygon turning means machining a workpiece to a polygonal figure by rotating the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio. WorkpieceWorkpieceTool Fig. 21.2 (a) Polygon turning By changing conditions whic...

  • Page 640

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 610 - NOTE 1 Before polygon turning, reference position return operation on the Y-axis needs to be specified to determine the rotation start position of the tool. This reference position return operation is performed by detecting a deceleration...

  • Page 641

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 611 - Format G50.2 Polygon turning cancel G51.2 P_ Q_ ; P,Q: Rotation ratio of spindle and Y-axis Specify range: P: Integer from 1 to 999 Q: Integer from -999 to -1 or from 1 to 999 When Q is a positive value, Y-axis makes positive rotation...

  • Page 642

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 612 - (0, 0)αtβtAPStart pointBPt (Xt, Yt) Fig. 21.2 (c) Tool nose position In this case, the tool nose position Pt (Xt, Yt) after time t is expressed by equations 1 and 2: Xt=Acosαt-Bcos(β-α)t (Equation 1) Yt=Asinαt+Bsin(β-α)t (Equ...

  • Page 643

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 613 - If three tools are set at every 120°, the machining figure will be a hexagon as shown below. WARNING For the maximum rotation speed of the tool, see the instruction manual supplied with the machine. Do not specify a spindle speed hig...

  • Page 644

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 614 - 21.3 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM COMMAND (G50.4, G51.4, G50.5, G51.5, G50.6, AND G51.6) Synchronous control, composite control, and superimposed control can be started or canceled using a program command ins...

  • Page 645

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 615 - Parameter setting examples for a 3-path system • Parameter No.12600 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 101 201 301 Z 102 202 302 • Parameter No.8180 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 0 0 0 Z 0 102 102 • Program example (M100 to M103 are synchronization ...

  • Page 646

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 616 - Parameter setting examples for a 3-path system • Parameter No.12600 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 101 201 301 Z 102 202 302 • Parameter No.8183 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 X 0 101 0 Z 0 102 0 • Program example (M100 to M103 are synchronization ...

  • Page 647

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 617 - • Program example (M100 to M103 are synchronization M codes.) Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Operation N10 M100 P13 ; M100 P13 ; Synchronization between paths 1 and 3 N20 G51.6 P102 Q302 ; Start of Z1-Z3 superimposed control N30 M101 P13 ; M101 ...

  • Page 648

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 618 - Example Assume that axis A is the rotary axis and that the amount of movement per rotation is 360.000 (parameter No. 1260 = 360000). When the following program is executed using the roll-over function of the rotary axis, the axis moves as...

  • Page 649

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 619 - NOTE 4 This function is not supported when the machine coordinate system of the PMC axis control function is selected. 21.5 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER Overview To replace the tool damaged during machining or to check the status of machinin...

  • Page 650

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 620 - : Position at which tool retract switch is turned on : Programmed position : Position at which tool is retracted by manual operation: Retract path : Manual operation (retract path) : Return path : Re-positioning XY ZZX Format Specify a ...

  • Page 651

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 621 - Explanation - Retraction When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator's panel is turned on during automatic operation or in the automatic operation stop or hold state, the tool is retracted the length of the programmed retractio...

  • Page 652

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 622 - - Machine lock, mirror image, and scaling When withdrawing the tool manually in the tool withdrawal mode, never use the machine lock, mirror-image, or scaling function. - Reset Upon reset, the retraction data specified in G10.6 is clea...

  • Page 653

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 623 - Fig. 21.5.1 (a) 1.Retract Operation2. Manual retract OperationRetract Point OFS1 OFS2 Manual retract Point3.Recovery Operation In case of TNR=0OFS1→OFS24.Re-positioning Operation

  • Page 654

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 624 - Example-2 (When the bit 6 (TNR) of parameter No.7002 is set to 1): Assuming that the compensation value is updated from OFS1 to OFS2 in the manual retract position. When the recovery operation is started, the updated compensation value O...

  • Page 655

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 625 - NOTE 3 When the tool length compensation B is used, the vertical axis against the plane from which the tool retract and recover is executed is compensated. This plane is not a same plane when G43/G44 is instructed (In case machining syste...

  • Page 656

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 626 - 21.6 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX 21.6.1 Electronic Gear Box Overview This function enables fabrication of high-precision gears, screws, and other components by rotating the workpiece in synchronization with a rotating tool or by moving the tool i...

  • Page 657

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 627 - Format Parameter EFX(No.7731#0)=1 Parameter EFX(No.7731#0)=0 Parameter HBR(No.7731#5)=1 Parameter HBR(No.7731#5)=0 Start of synchronization G81 T_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 R_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 T_ ( L_ ) ( Q_...

  • Page 658

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 628 - - Synchronous control (1) Start of synchronization If G81 is issued so that the machine enters synchronization mode, the synchronization switch of the EGB function is closed, and the synchronization of the tool and workpiece axes is star...

  • Page 659

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 629 - CAUTION 2 Even if an OT alarm is issued for a slave axis in EGB synchronization, synchronization will not be canceled. 3 During synchronization, it is possible to execute a move command for a slave axis and other axes, using a program. T...

  • Page 660

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 630 - T : Number of teeth Q : Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch-1) Use P, T, and Q specified in the G81 block. In helical gear compensation, the machine coordinates on the workpiece axis and the absolute coordinates are updated with helica...

  • Page 661

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 631 - Kn / Kd is a value resulting from reducing the right side of the above formula, but the result of reduction is subject to the following restrictions: -2147483648≤Kn≤2147483647 1≤Kd≤2147483647 When this restriction is not satisfied...

  • Page 662

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 632 - NOTE 1 During a retract operation, an interlock is effective to the retract axis. 2 During a retract operation, a machine lock is effective to the retract axis. 3 The retraction direction depends on the movement direction of the machine, ...

  • Page 663

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 633 - -+ Velocity control (PI)Velocity control (PI)Position controlPosition gain KpPosition controlPosition gain KpCs command Cs command CNC 2nd spindle (slave)1st spindle (master) - + - + -+ +Position feedbackVelocity feedba...

  • Page 664

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 634 - Format Parameter EFX(No. 7731#0)=1 Parameter EFX (No. 7731#0)=0 Parameter HBR (No. 7731#5)=1 Parameter HBR (No. 7731#5)=0 Start of synchronization G81 T_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 R_ ( L_ ) ( Q_ P_ ) ; G81.4 T_ ( L_ )...

  • Page 665

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 635 - When the rotation of the tool axis is stopped, the workpiece axis stopped with keeping synchronization. Then the EGB synchronization is canceled by specifying G80. When the EGB synchronization is canceled, the EGB synchronization switch i...

  • Page 666

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 636 - NOTE 13 If bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 is 0, no canned cycle for drilling can be used. To use a canned cycle for drilling, set bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 to 1 and use G81.4 instead of G81 and G80.4 instead of G80. 14 If TDP, ...

  • Page 667

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 637 - Compensation angle = Tsin(P)QZ×××π × 360 (for inch input) where Compensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg) Z : Amount of travel on the Z-axis after the specification of G81 P : Signed gear helix angle (deg) π : Circular const...

  • Page 668

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 638 - where L : Number of hob threads T : Number of teeth α : Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the master axis (parameter No. 7772) β : Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the slave axis (p...

  • Page 669

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 639 - 21.6.3 Electronic Gear Box Automatic Phase Synchronization Overview In the electronic gear box (EGB), when synchronization start or cancellation is specified, the synchronizing state is changed to another state gradually by applying accel...

  • Page 670

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 640 - ・ Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type G81.4 R _ L _ ; Synchronization start G80.4 ; Synchronization cancellation R : Number of teeth (range of valid settings: 1-5000) L : Number of hob threads (range...

  • Page 671

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 641 - - Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type Automatic phase synchronizationSynchronization cancellation command Synchronization start commandWorkpiece-axis speed Synchronization state AccelerationDeceleration Sp...

  • Page 672

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 642 - NOTE 4 By setting bit 6 (EPA) of parameter No. 7731 to 1, in automatic phase synchronization, when a synchronization command is issued again in the synchronization state, movement about the workpiece axis is made such that the position co...

  • Page 673

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 643 - Machining in the synchronous state G00 X_ ; Retract the workpiece from the tool. G80 R1 ; Cancel synchronization - Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type M03 ; Clockwise spindle rotation command G00...

  • Page 674

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 644 - Explanation G31.8 is a one-shot G code. After the execution of G31.8, values of machine coordinate which is gotten at each time of skip signal input are set in custom macro variables. The numbers of variables are used from the top number ...

  • Page 675

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 645 - 21.6.5 Electronic Gear Box 2 Pair Overview This function enables machining of high-precision gears, screws, and other components by rotating the workpiece in synchronization with a rotating tool or by moving the tool in synchronization wi...

  • Page 676

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 646 - When j = 0, the specified command is regarded as being a command for the slave-axis speed, described below. In this case, if L is not specified, an alarm is output. 2 Slave-axis speed β0 L±l β : Slave-axis address l : Slave axis sp...

  • Page 677

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 647 - NOTE 7 If bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 is 0, no canned cycle for drilling can be used. To use a canned cycle for drilling, set bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 to 1. 8 If, during synchronization, G81.5 is issued again, alarm PS1595 ...

  • Page 678

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 648 - 21.6.5.2 Description of commands compatible with those for a hobbing machine (G80, G81) A command compatible with that for a hobbing machine can be used as a synchronization command. Usually, a hobbing machine performs machining by synchr...

  • Page 679

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 649 - During synchronization, the rotation about the tool and workpiece axes is controlled so that the relationship between T (number of teeth) and L (number of hob threads) is maintained. If, during synchronization, G81 is issued again without...

  • Page 680

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 650 - NOTE 11 Actual cutting feedrate display does not take synchronization pulses into consideration. 12 For an EGB slave axis, synchronous and composite control cannot be executed. 13 In EGB synchronization mode, AI contour control mode is te...

  • Page 681

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 651 - - Direction of helical gear compensation The direction depends on bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700. When HDR is set to 1. +C C:+, Z:+, P:+ Compensation direction : + (a) -Z +Z +CC:+, Z:+, P:- Compensation direction : -(b) +CC:+, Z:-, P...

  • Page 682

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 652 - Spindle amp.Motor Spindle (master axis) 1st axis X (omitted) 2nd axis Y (omitted) Tool axis 3rd axis C slave axis 4th axis dummy axis EGB - + + - K1: Sync coefficientK1 Error counter Sync switch Motor Detector Velocity/current controlSer...

  • Page 683

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 653 - (2) For a millimeter machine and inch input G81.5 T1 V1.0 ; Synchronization between the master axis and V-axis is started at the ratio of a 1.0 inch movement (25.4 mm) along the V-axis per rotation about the master axis. - When two g...

  • Page 684

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 654 - - Example of use of dressing Gear grinder in the following machine configuration Limit switch 1Limit switch 2 V-axis motor U-axis V-axisRotary whetstone O9500 ; N01 G01 G91 U_ F100 ; Dressing axis approach N02 M03 S100 ; The M03...

  • Page 685

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 655 - - Command specification for hobbing machines Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Fig. 21.6.5.3 (a), the sample program below sets the C-axis (in parameter 7710) for starting synchronization with the spindle according ...

  • Page 686

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 656 - V-axis least command increment : 0.001mm V-axis CMR : 5 Then, the C-axis detection unit is 0.0002 degree. The V-axis detection unit is 0.0002 mm. In this case, the synchronization ratio (Kn, Kd) is related with a command as indicated bel...

  • Page 687

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 657 - KnKd = 3263×572000×10 = 3263144000 In this case, an alarm is issued because Kd exceeds the specifiable range. (e) Command : G81.5 P10000 C-0.214 ; Operation : Synchronization between the spindle and C-axis is started at the ratio ...

  • Page 688

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 658 - - Example 2) Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Fig. 21.6.5.3 (a), suppose that the spindle and V-axis are as follows: Spindle pulse coder : 72000pulse/rev (4 pulses for one A/B phase cycle) C-axis least command incr...

  • Page 689

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 659 - U-axisSpindle Fig. 21.6.6 (a) Example of a machine having the U-axis U-axis Spindle motorU-axis motor Spindle Fig. 21.6.6 (b) Example of the structure of a machine having the U-axis In the example of the above structure, the tool ...

  • Page 690

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 660 - 21.6.7 U-axis Control 2 Pairs Overview The U-axis control 2 pairs function enables the U-axis to remain at a fixed position or to move at a programmed speed without using a mechanism such as a planetary gear box. The U-axis movement, whic...

  • Page 691

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 661 - 21.7 TANDEM CONTROL When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis. Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is used only to ...

  • Page 692

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 662 - Control method B h l s B axis 0 deg kθ Servo motor Pivot axis Nut Fig. 21.8 (b) From Fig. 21.8 (b), the following expression holds: θcos222shshl−+=....................................(1) The rate of change of l in relation to θ i...

  • Page 693

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 663 - θ-G diagram (relationship between the angle of the rotation axis (θ) and the gain multiplier (G)) Set the angle of the rotation axis in parameters Nos. 14270 to 14279. Set the gain multiplier in parameters Nos. 14280 to 14289. Example ...

  • Page 694

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 664 - Parameter No. 14274 = 40.0 deg Parameter No. 14275 = 50.0 deg Parameter No. 14276 = 60.0 deg Parameter No. 14277 = 70.0 deg Parameter No. 14278 = 80.0 deg Parameter No. 14279 = 90.0 deg Gain multiplier Parameter No. 14280 = 614 (2.2) Par...

  • Page 695

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 665 - Format G81.1 Z_ Q_ R_ F_ ; Z :Upper dead point (For an axis other than the Z-axis, specify the axis address.) Q :Distance between the upper dead point and lower dead point (Specify the distance as an incremental value, relative to the up...

  • Page 696

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 666 - The override function can use either the normal rapid traverse override or chopping feedrate override, one of which can be selected by setting ROV (bit 0 of parameter No. 8360). When the chopping feedrate override is selected, settings be...

  • Page 697

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 667 - (2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the upper dead point to the lower dead point Previous upper dead pointNew lower dead point Previous lower dead point The tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, th...

  • Page 698

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 668 - To compensate for this displacement, an amount of travel equal to the distance between the upper and lower dead points, plus an appropriate compensation amount, is specified. When a chopping command is specified, the feedrate is determine...

  • Page 699

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 669 - - Acceleration For the acceleration/declaration along the chopping axis, acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is effective. - Mode switching during chopping If the mode is changed during chopping, chopping does no...

  • Page 700

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 670 - - Program restart When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) and stopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in an alarm PS5050, “ILL-COMMAND IN G81.1 MODE” being output. When a program that...

  • Page 701

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 671 - Point R Upper dead pointLower dead point Time (Z75. )(Z100. )(Z110. ) To cancel chopping, specify the following command: G80 ; • The tool stops at point R. 21.10 SKIP FUNCTION FOR FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL Outline This functio...

  • Page 702

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 672 - Format Mxx ; Flexible synchronous control mode on G31.8 G91 α 0 P_ Q_ R_ ; Skip command for flexible synchronous control α : Specify the slave axis. The instruction value must be 0. P_ : The top number of the consecutive custom macro va...

  • Page 703

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 673 - 21.11 CHOPPING FUNCTION BY FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL Overview This function enables the chopping of simultaneous 2-axis control by using a flexible synchronous control with the chopping. It is possible to synchronize an axis with a cho...

  • Page 704

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 674 - 2 Flexible synchronous control is started and canceled by the flexible synchronous control mode select signal. To start or cancel flexible synchronization during automatic operation, control the select signal using the M code set in the r...

  • Page 705

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 675 - If the addresses of Z, Q, R, or F are omitted, the oscillation motion is performed by the value of parameters. On the other hand, the value of parameters is replaced by the value commanded for each address. Parameter (No.8370) : Oscillat...

  • Page 706

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 676 - The override function can be used for either the normal rapid traverse rate or oscillation feedrate, one of which can be selected by setting ROV (bit 0 of parameter No.8360). When the oscillation feedrate is overridden, settings between 1...

  • Page 707

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 677 - (1) Point R > Center point between upper and lower dead points Upper dead pointLower dead pointPoint RCancel Center point(i)(ii) After cancel command, oscillation motion is continued until oscillation axis passes center point between ...

  • Page 708

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 678 - State before G81.1 command The first dead pointIn the state that command of cancel was specified on the way to upper dead point at last oscillation motion. Upper dead point - Acceleration/deceleration Linear acceleration/deceleration by ...

  • Page 709

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 679 - New upper dead pointPrevious upper dead pointLower dead point The tool first moves to the previous upper dead point, then to the lower dead point, and finally to the new upper dead point. (4) When the lower dead point is changed during ...

  • Page 710

    21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 680 - - Mirror image Never attempt to apply the mirror image function about the oscillation axis. - Move command during oscillation motion If a move command is specified for the oscillation axis while oscillation motion is being performed, an ...

  • Page 711

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 21.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 681 - - Then, perform repeated movement along the Z-axis between the upper dead point and the lower dead point with sine curve feedrate F by Exp. 1. Oscillation override k is enabled. Lower dead point (Z75.0)Upper dead point (Z100.0)Point R (Z...

  • Page 712

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 682 - 22 5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION Chapter 22, "5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 22.1 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL ..........................................................................................

  • Page 713

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 683 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'Tool center point pathY'X'Z' Fig. 22.1 (b) Path of the tool center point When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system, programming can be performed without worrying about the r...

  • Page 714

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 684 - By setting the relevant parameter, the workpiece coordinate system can also be employed as the programming coordinate system. In this case, as the table turns, the position and direction of the workpiece fixed on the table change with ...

  • Page 715

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 685 - <2> Table rotation type machine <3> Composite type machine<1> Tool rotation type machineXCBZYBCXZYBYXZC Fig. 22.1 (d) Three types of 5-axis machine Even if the rotary axis that controls the tool does not intersect...

  • Page 716

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 686 - (2) Type 2 The direction of the tool axis (I, J, K) at the block end point, as seen from the coordinate system fixed on the table, is specified, instead of the position of the rotary axes. The CNC calculates an end point of the rotar...

  • Page 717

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 687 - Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Maximum command digit number of integer 10 9 8 7 6 While performing interpolation for the rotary axes, the CNC controls the control points so that the tool center point moves along a straigh...

  • Page 718

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 688 - - Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP_ H_ ; Starts tool center point control (type 1). G02 I J KG17 IP α β F ; G03 R G02 I J K G18 IP α β F ; G03 R G02 I ...

  • Page 719

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 689 - - Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP_ H_ Q_ ; Starts tool center point control (type 2). G02 G17 IP I J K R F ; G03 G02 G18 IP I J K R F ; G03 G02 G19 IP I J K R ...

  • Page 720

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 690 - CAUTION 1 Only arc radius R can be specified. (The distance from the start point to the center of the arc cannot be specified using I, J, and K.) 2 A round circle (the start point and end point are the same) cannot be specified. Any ...

  • Page 721

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 691 - Because the specified speed is usually the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, the speed of the linear axis, when seen from the table coordinate system, is: arc theofLength axislinear theofLength ×F. Depending on bit 5 (HTG...

  • Page 722

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 692 - - Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP_ H_ Q_; Starts tool center point control (type 2). G02 G17 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 G02 G18 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 G02 G19 IP I J ...

  • Page 723

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 693 - In the case of a tool rotation type machine, I, J, K can be specified in the G43.5 block. But in the case of a table rotation type or composite type machine, I,J,K cannot be specified in the G43.5 block. Specifying I,J,K in the G43.5 b...

  • Page 724

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 694 - The cancellation block for tool center point control is the one that controls buffering. BControl point: Control target on the machine coordinate systemTool center point Tool offset value Fig. 22.1 (e) Control point and tool center po...

  • Page 725

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 695 - Example) To incline the tool by two degrees toward the proceeding direction at the time of machining, enter the following command: G43.5 I_ J_ K_ H_ Q2.0 Explanation - When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the prog...

  • Page 726

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 696 - Example of operation performed if bit 5 (INZ) of parameter No. 19754 is 0: Assume that the table rotation axis rotating about the Z-axis is the C-axis. If bit 5 (INZ) of parameter No. 19754 is 0, and th...

  • Page 727

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 697 - If bit 5 (INZ) of parameter No. 19754 is 1, the workpiece coordinate system is fixed on the table in the state in which the position of the table rotation axis is 0, regardless of the position of the table rotation axis at the start of...

  • Page 728

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 698 - - When the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system If bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No. 19696 is 1, the workpiece coordinate system is the programming coordinate system. In this case, the programming coord...

  • Page 729

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 699 - • I, J, K commands the vector of the block start point to the center of the arc from the start point in the rotary axis position. • Note the following: <1> Only a table rotation axis normal to a selected plane can be rotated ...

  • Page 730

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 700 - : After the G43.4 command, the Z-X plane is selected using the G18 command and the C-axis is rotated during circular interpolation . → Alarm (violation of <2>) The same is also true when the G19 command is used. Example) : G...

  • Page 731

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 701 - Example) : G01 A90.; G43.4 H1 ; G01 C10. ; G17 G02 IP IR ; : : G01 A90.; G43.4 H1 ; G17 G02 IP IR C10.; : After the G43.4 command, the A-axis is moved and circular interpolation is performed using the G17 command (X-Y plane). → ...

  • Page 732

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 702 - Example) : G43.4 H1 ; G01 A10. (C10.) G18 G02 IP IR; : - Tool center point control command During tool center point control, the command specifies the location of each block end point as seen from the programming coordinate system....

  • Page 733

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 703 - - Rotary axis command If a command is specified during tool center point control that prohibits the tool center point from moving with respect to the workpiece, the maximum cutting speed (parameter No.1432) is assumed as the feedrate ...

  • Page 734

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 704 - X axisZ axis Workpiece coordinate system(Before G92 command) Tool center point (X100.0Y100.0Z100.0 on workpiece coordinate system before G92 command) Workpiece coordinate system (After G92 command) X’ axisZ’ axisControl ...

  • Page 735

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 705 - X axisZ axis Workpiece coordinate system after G92.1command (X200.0Y200.0Z200.0 on machine coordinate system) Tool center point (X0.0Y0.0Z0.0 on workpiece coordinate system before G92.1 command) Workpiece coordinate syste...

  • Page 736

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 706 - • When TDG = 0: The distance to go in the table coordinate system is displayed. Even if TDG = 0, the distance to go in the machine coordinate system is displayed in the following modes: - 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion ...

  • Page 737

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 707 - When a judgment is made to lower the speed, the speed of the entire block is lowered. As a result of speed reduction, the path error may be smaller than a parameter-set value due to a calculation error. - Canned cycle for drilling du...

  • Page 738

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 708 - G10.6 alone G10.6 X_ Y_ Z_ Bit 2 (RPS) of parameter No.7040 = 1 = 0 Parameter No.11261 ≠ 0.0 = 0.0 Tool axis direction retract Conventional retract (Parameter No. 7041) Retract operation is not performed. Conventional retract - Fun...

  • Page 739

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 709 - By setting bit 7 (TRC) of parameter No. 11260 to 1 during rapid traverse in tool center point control, it is possible to disable tool center point control to only the tool path, without changing the end position of the tool. Tool rota...

  • Page 740

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 710 - Tool length vectorTool center pointControl pointZX Machine coordinate system TRC=1 TRC=0 Table Workpiece Fig. 22.1 (k) Comparison of operations depending on the setting of bit 7 (TRC) of parameter No. 11260 (table rotati...

  • Page 741

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 711 - Start point End point Manual intervention NOTE If manual intervention is performed on a rotation axis, the center position shifts by the amount of intervention. - For a table rotation type or composite type machine Manual absolu...

  • Page 742

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 712 - X Y G90 X100. Y-100. Z0 C0 X Y G91 X0. Y200. Z0 C90. Operation restart Positive direction along the C-axisTable coordinate system Manual intervention after single block stop NOTE If manual intervention is performed in an incremental...

  • Page 743

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 713 - Composite type machine <1> The "output angles" are represented by the computed rotary axis angle pair whose table (second rotary axis) moving angle is smaller. ↓ ↓ When the table movi...

  • Page 744

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 714 - -360 × (N + 1) degrees θ1 - 360 × N-360 × N degreesθ2 - 360 × Nθ2 - 360 × (N + 1) θ1 - 360 × (N - 1)(*1) 0 degree360 degrees θ1θ2θ2 - 360 θ1 + 360(*2)360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 + 360 × N360 × N degreesθ2 + 360 × N θ2 ...

  • Page 745

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 715 - X YZC-axis: 1st rotation axis (master) B-axis: 2nd rotation axis (l) Fig. 22.1 (l) BC type tool axis Z The following two pairs of "computed basic angles" exist that direct the tool axis toward the + X axis direction. (B 9...

  • Page 746

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 716 - XYZC Fig. 22.1 (m) BC type tool axis Z When the current rotary axis angles are (B 45 degrees; C 90 degrees), the "output angles" are (B 0 degree; C 90 degrees). - Angle of the rotary axis for type 2 (when the movement ran...

  • Page 747

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 717 - Composite type machine <1> Of the angle pairs whose master and slave axis angles are both within the specified movement range, the rotary axis angle pair whose table (second rotary axis) moving angle is smaller represents the &qu...

  • Page 748

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 718 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees360 × N degrees • Computed angle A Current position AMovement range A θ1 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × (N - 1) θ1 + 360 × (N + 1) Fig. 22.1 (n) "Computed angle of rotary axis A and its curr...

  • Page 749

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 719 - That is, the rotary axes positions are converted so that machining can be performed in the tool direction for the workpiece considered in the program coordinate system (feature coordinate system). In the start block of tool center po...

  • Page 750

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 720 - Program restart Do not perform a program restart to the program in which tool center point control is used together with tilted working plane indexing. Reset In case that tilted working plane indexing and tool center point control are...

  • Page 751

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 721 - Using this dt, the feedrate of tool center point becomes dtdZdYdX222++ . Operation examples - In the case of a tool rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration in which a tool rotation axis th...

  • Page 752

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 722 - X'Y'Z'CControl point path (of the machinecoordinate system)Tool center point path (of the programming coordinate system)BX'Y'Z'X'Y'Z' Fig. 22.1 (p) Example for a tool rotation type machine

  • Page 753

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 723 - - In the case of a table rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration (trunnion) in which a rotation table that turns around the Y-axis is located above another table rotation axis that turns aro...

  • Page 754

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 724 - X'Y'Z'BA X'Y'Z'Y'X'Z'Tool center point path seen from the table-fixed coordinate system XZ'YXZ'YXZ'YTool center point path taken when the programming coordinate system does not YXZYXZYXZControl point path (of the machine coordinate sy...

  • Page 755

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 725 - - In the case of a composite type machine Explanations are given below assuming a composite type machine configuration that has one table rotation axis (which turns around the X-axis) and one tool rotation axis (which turns around the...

  • Page 756

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 726 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z' X'Y'Z' X' Z'Y' X' Z' Y' X' Z' Y' Control point path (of the machine coordinate system) Tool center point path seen from the table-fixed coordinate system Tool center point path taken when the programming coordinate syst...

  • Page 757

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 727 - - When linear interpolation is performed during tool center point control Examples are given below in which each 100-mm-long side of an equilateral triangle is cut at B-axis angles of 0, 30 to 60, and 60 degrees, respectively. Exampl...

  • Page 758

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 728 - O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N20 G90 X50.0 Y-70.0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Moves to the initial position. N30 G01 G43.5 H01 Z20.0 F500. ; Starts tool center point control. Moves to the approachi...

  • Page 759

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 729 - The following figure illustrates the position of the workpiece, as well as the position of the tool head (relative to the workpiece), as seen from the table-fixed programming coordinate system in the +Z direction. • Behavior as see...

  • Page 760

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 730 - • Detailed diagram of each block Y"X"(C 0)(B 30.0)(B 0)Behavior of thetool center point Behavior of the control point (machine coordinate value) (B 30.0)C-axis rotates, with C being 120 degrees. (B 45.0)(C 0)(C 120.0)(B 3...

  • Page 761

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 731 - C-axis rotates, with C being 240 degrees. (C 120.0)(B 60.0) (B 60.0) (C 240.0)(C 360.0)(B 0)(C-axis rotates, with C being 360 degrees.) N80 block N90 block N100 block (C 240.0)(B 60.0)(B 60.0)Y"X"Y"X"X'Y'Y'X'X' X&qu...

  • Page 762

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 732 - - When circular interpolation is performed during tool center point control In this example, one of the three sides of an equilateral triangle, each being 100 mm long side, is specified as a straight line and the other two are specifi...

  • Page 763

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 733 - (X 50.0, Y -70.0, Z 300.0, B -90.0) (X 28.868, Y -50.0) (B -60.0)(B -60.0) (B -45.0) (X 28.868, Y 50.0) (X -57.735, Y 0.0) (C 0.0) (C 90.0) (C 150.0)(B -30.0)(B -30.0)(B -30.0) Y X (C 210.0)(C 270.0) • Behavior as seen from the tabl...

  • Page 764

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 734 - XY [Up to N031] Y X Behavior of the tool center point B -60 Behavior of the control point (machine coordinate system) B -90 X Y [N032] B -45 C 90B -60 [N034] B -30 B -30 Y X[N033] B -45 B -30 C 150 Head path relative to the workpi...

  • Page 765

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 735 - - Inverse time feed Manual intervention cannot be performed while inverse time feed is specified during tool center point control. Do not perform manual intervention. - Setting for workpiece coordinate system (G92) and workpiece coo...

  • Page 766

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 736 - - Look-ahead pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration When the tool center point control mode is set, look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is automatically enabled. Set the parameter for look-ahead acceleration...

  • Page 767

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 737 - - Stored limit check before move During tool center point control, stored limit check before move is disabled. - Type 2 When a type 2 command (G43.5 command) is specified on a machine of table rotation type or composite type (parame...

  • Page 768

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 738 - - Workpiece coordinate system preset (G50.3 (G92.1)) (Only tool rotation type) - Tilted working plane indexing cancel (G69.1) - Feed per minute (G98 (G94)) - Feed per revolution (G99 (G95)) - Modal G codes that allow specification o...

  • Page 769

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 739 - 22.2 HIGH-SPEED SMOOTH TCP 22.2.1 High-speed Smooth TCP General Tool center point control (referred to as TCP in the remainder of this manual) is a 5-axis machining function whereby the tool center point moves along a specified path ev...

  • Page 770

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 740 - NOTE 4 Each rotation axis is compensated from the original value within the compensation tolerance. The tolerance can be specified by the parameters (No. 10486, 10487) or the G code (G10.8L1). - Smooth control (G43.4 P3, G43.5P3) Unde...

  • Page 771

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 741 - NOTE The option of "High-speed Smooth TCP" is necessary to use Smooth control (G43.4 P3, G43.5P3). It can be used in Series 30i -B/31i -B5. Explanation There are two types, as described below, one of which is used depending...

  • Page 772

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 742 - - High-speed Smooth TCP (type 2) G43.4 L_ P_ IP_ H_ ; (M series) TCP mode is turned ON. G43.4 L_ P_ IP_ D_ ; (T series) TCP mode is turned ON. IP_ I_ J_ K_ ; G49 ; TCP mode is turned OFF. L: 0 : Rotation axes compensation is no...

  • Page 773

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 743 - NOTE 1 In the case that the address L is not commanded, the behavior of G43.4/G43.5 is as follows with the setting parameter STC(No.10485#0). Parameter STC (No.10485#0) Behavior of G43.4/G43.5 when address L is not commanded 0 Normal T...

  • Page 774

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 744 - 22.2.1.1 Rotation axes compensation (G43.4L1, G43.5L1) - Compensation of rotation axes High-speed Smooth TCP is designed to smooth tool posture variations, thereby smoothing the movement of rotation axes. If there is unevenness in tool...

  • Page 775

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 745 - Tool posture before compensation Tool posture after compensation Workpiece being machined Compensation area for a rotation axis Interference avoided The compensation of a rotation axis is limited to the specified area. Fig.22.2.1.1...

  • Page 776

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 746 - NOTE If the tool posture varies due to compensation with High-speed Smooth TCP while a corner is being machined at the tool center, as in filleting, the finishing allowance may remain uncut at the corner. At such a location, set a sma...

  • Page 777

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 747 - Example) On a 5-axis machine with three linear axes (X, Y, Z) and two rotation axes (B, C) G90 G01 G43.4 L1 H1 Z0 F500 ; Rotation axes compensation start G00 X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_ ; (Block immediately after Rotation axes compensation start...

  • Page 778

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 748 - Other notes - Display of programs under execution In Rotation axes compensation mode, the compensated program is displayed. - Original program Rotation axes compensation is not a function to directly edit the original program. Thus,...

  • Page 779

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 749 - N040 G43.4 L1 H1 Z0; Rotation axes compensation mode ON Normal TCP starts if L0 is specified. N040 G43.4 L0 H1 Z0; Normal TCP mode ON If address "L" is omitted, whether to turn on or off Rotation axes compensation is decide...

  • Page 780

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 750 - Tool center pointsTool posture N1N2N3N4N5ZYX Fig.22.2.1.2 (a) Commanded Tool center points and Tool postures In case of machining with tool posture control (G43.4P1), the processing surface is shown in Fig.22.2.1.2 (b) (polyhedron)...

  • Page 781

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 751 - N1N2N3N4N5ZYXTolerance (Parameter No.11776, or Command G10.8 L2 Q_) Paths generated by this feature Paths generated by the traditional Tool posture control Fig.22.2.1.2 (d) Path of Tool center points (Tool postures) The generated t...

  • Page 782

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 752 - Conditions for Smooth control to be effective 1) Modes are as follows. - Cutting mode - Linear interpolation (G01) - Feed per minute (G94, however G98 in G code system A of T series ) - Polar coordinate interpolation cancel (G13.1) - P...

  • Page 783

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 753 - According to the mechanical unit type, they are as Table 22.2.1.2 (a): Table 22.2.1.2 (a) Work-piece side rotary axis and Tool side rotary axis Mechanical unit type (No.19680) Tool side rotary axis Work-piece side rotary axis Tool ro...

  • Page 784

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 754 - Movement to cross over a singular position When the commanded positions of the tool side rotary axis are opposite in relation to the singular position at the starting point and at the ending point of a block, in other words, when a mov...

  • Page 785

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 755 - 22.2.2 Tolerance change in High-speed Smooth TCP mode 22.2.2.1 Tolerance change in rotation axes compensation (G43.4L1, G43.5L1) This function is designed to change the compensation tolerance for each rotation axis in Rotation axes com...

  • Page 786

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 756 - NOTE 10 Each of the parameters for rotation axis compensation tolerances is clamped with the setting of parameters Nos. 10490 and 10491 as the upper limit. 11 Even if a tolerance is specified directly, it is also clamped with the setti...

  • Page 787

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 757 - G90 G01 G43.4 L1 H1 Z0 F500 ; (Rotation axes compensation starts) X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_; (Block immediately after the start of Rotation axes compensation) X_ Y_ Z_ X_ Y_ B_ B_ C_; (Block immediately before cancellation) G10.8 L1 B0.0;...

  • Page 788

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 758 - 22.2.2.2 Tolerance change in smooth control (G43.4P3, G43.5P3) In Smooth control mode, the tolerance for paths of Tool center points (parameter No.11776 equal), and The tolerance for angles changing of Tool posture (parameter No.11777 ...

  • Page 789

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 759 - Example) Sample S-TCP display String displayed in <1> G90 G01 G43.4 L1 H1 Z0 F500 ; Smooth TCP mode on S-TCP G00 X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_ ; S-TCP G01 X_ Y_ Z_ ; S-TCP X_ Z_ C_ ; S-TCP G10.8L1B0.0C0.0 Smooth TCP temporarily in...

  • Page 790

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 760 - (Tolerance setting: For the A-axis (parameter No. 10486): 1.0 degree, for the C-axis (parameter No. 10487): 1.0 degree) NC statement (before compensation) NC statement (after compensation) Compen- sation(A-axis)Compen-sation(C-axis)...

  • Page 791

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 761 - Diagnose 6501 First rotation axis compensation tolerance in the block under execution [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] degree (increment system of the first rotation axis) [Meaning] The compensation tolerance for the first rot...

  • Page 792

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 762 - 6506 Maximum compensation actually applied by High-speed Smooth TCP (G43.4L1, G43.5L1) to the second rotation axis [Unit of data] degree [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the second rotary axis [Valid data range]...

  • Page 793

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 763 - - Other restrictions Other restrictions are the same as those for tool center point control.

  • Page 794

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 764 - 22.3 EXPANSION OF AXIS MOVE COMMAND IN TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL Overview This function makes it possible to specify commands for axes other than the five axes subject to tool center point control during tool center point control. Det...

  • Page 795

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 765 - Using this dt, the feedrate of tool center point becomes dtdZdYdX222++ . In case parameter ADF(No.11269#2)=1, all the non 5-axis machining control axes are included in commanded feedrate regardless of the setting of parameter ADXx. ...

  • Page 796

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 766 - 22.4 TOOL POSTURE CONTROL Overview Under tool center point control, the tool tip moves along a specified path even when the tool direction relative to the workpiece changes. Usually, however, the two rotary axes are controlled independ...

  • Page 797

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 767 - Format Format G43.4 IP_ α_ β_ H_ P_ ; Tool center point control (type 1) G43.5 IP_ H_ Q_ P_ ; Tool center point control (type 2) Description of symbols IP : For an absolute command, the coordinates of travel end point of the tool cen...

  • Page 798

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 768 - Explanation In tool posture control (positioning or linear interpolation), the two rotation axes are controlled so that the momentary tool posture (tool length compensation vector) satisfies the following conditions (Fig. 22.4 (e)). Th...

  • Page 799

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 769 - Program specification path Control point V Tool center point Block start point Block end point VsV Ve θ Θ L l Vs Ve Plane configured by tool length compensation vectors Vs and Ve Momentary tool length compensation vector V is contr...

  • Page 800

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 770 - • tβ : Angle formed by the momentary tool direction and the traveling direction If, during tool posture control, circular or helical interpolation is specified, the momentary tool direction is controlled to the direction determined ...

  • Page 801

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 771 - Tool rotation type Table rotation typeComposite typeTool-side rotary axisWorkpiece-side rotary axis Fig. 22.4 (g) "Tool-side rotary axis" and "workpiece-side rotary axis" - Singular point, singular point posture...

  • Page 802

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 772 - - When the tool posture is close to a singular point posture When tool posture control is exercised on a machine that has a singular point, and the tool posture becomes close to a singular point posture during execution of a block, th...

  • Page 803

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 773 - Tool-side rotary axis: Turned reversely relative to the singular point angular displacement Example: When the end point angular displacement before a change is 60°, and the singular point angular displacement is 20°, the end point...

  • Page 804

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 774 - If either of the rotary axes exceeds the set operation range during program execution when tool posture control is enabled, alarm DS0029 is issued. If tool posture control is disabled, rotary axis operation range specification based on...

  • Page 805

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 775 - - When the tool posture directions at the start point and end point of a block match each other If, in positioning or linear interpolation, the tool posture directions at the start point and end point of a block match each other (eith...

  • Page 806

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 776 - 22.5 CUTTING POINT COMMAND Overview While the operation of the tool tip center is specified with tool center point control, the operation of the cutting point can be specified with the cutting point command. With this function, a corne...

  • Page 807

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 777 - (2) Type 2 The direction of the tool axis (I, J, K) at the block end point, as seen from the coordinate system fixed on the table, is specified, instead of the position of the rotation axis. The CNC calculates the end position of the...

  • Page 808

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 778 - In case of tool compensation memory A and B, each compensation value is set to a different offset number becuse there is no compensation memory in each tool length / radius / corner R. Table22.5 (a) Specification format of tool offse...

  • Page 809

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 779 - Tool length compensation value Tool offset number 10 Tool radius compensation value Tool offset number 20 Corner-R compensation value Tool offset number 30 Example) G43.8 H10D20; Alarm PS5464 T G43.8 IP_ α_ β_ D_ ,L2 I_ J_ K...

  • Page 810

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 780 - Table22.5 (b) Specification format of tool offset number (lathe system) Cutting point command (type 1) G43.8 D_; Specification format of tool offset number Cutting point command (type 2) G43.9 D_; Tool length D code Tool radius D code...

  • Page 811

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 781 - Example) N10 G90 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 A0.0 C0.0 ; N20 G43.8H1 D1 ,L2 I-1.0 J0.0 K10.0 ; N30 G01 X20.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 A0.0 C0.0 F1800.0,L2 I-1.0 J-1.0 K10.0 ; N40 G01 X20.0 Y20.0 Z0.0 A10.0 C5.0 ; N50 G01 X0.0 Y20.0 Z0.0 A20.0 C7.0 ,L2 I0.0...

  • Page 812

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 782 - : Cutting point vectorRegarded as a near-singular posture Control point Cutting point Workpiece Tool center point (Program point) Workpiece Control point Program point Tool center point Cutting point Fig. 22.5 (d) If the posture is ...

  • Page 813

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 783 - - Acceleration/deceleration before look ahead interpolation When the system is placed in cutting point command mode, acceleration/deceleration before look ahead interpolation is automatically enabled. Set the parameters for accelerati...

  • Page 814

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 784 - - Functions that cannot be used together While the cutting point command is in progress, the following functions cannot be used. While the cutting point command is in progress, do not use these functions. • Parallel axis control ...

  • Page 815

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 785 - In this case, only the value set in "Z/LENGTH", "NOSE R/RAD", and "CORNER R" on the tool compensation memory screen is used as a tool length, radius, and corner-R compensation value. Set values such as &qu...

  • Page 816

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 786 - 22.6 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING 22.6.1 Tilted Working Plane Indexing Overview Programming for creating holes, pockets, and other figures in a datum plane tilted with respect to the workpiece would be easy if commands can be specifie...

  • Page 817

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 787 - This function regards the direction normal to the machining plane as the +Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate system. After the G53.1 command, the tool is controlled so that it remains perpendicular to the machining plane. Coord...

  • Page 818

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 788 - This function is applicable to the following machine configurations. (See Fig. 22.6.1 (d).) <1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes <2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table r...

  • Page 819

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 789 - 22.6.1.1 Tilted working plane indexing based on Eulerian angle Format - Tilted working plane indexing (G68.2) M G68.2 X x0 Y y0 Z z0 Iα Jβ Kγ ; Tilted working plane indexing G69 ; Cancels the tilted working plane indexing. X,Y,Z :...

  • Page 820

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 790 - γ zc yc xcx' y''γ Conversion from workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z to coordinate system 1 X'-Y'-Z x z yx' y'α β X'z y''z'' y'β Conversion from coordinate system 1 X'-Y'-Z to coordinate system 2 X'-Y"-Z" Conversion fro...

  • Page 821

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 791 - Program coordinate systemMachine coordinate system G54 G55Program coordinate system Fig. 22.6.1 (f) ・Minimum command unit of rotation angles The minimum command unit of the rotation angles (I, J, K, and R) of the tilted working pla...

  • Page 822

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 792 - Example (When bit 4 (MSV) of parameter No.6019 is set to 1.) Machine coordinate system#151101- Workpiece coordinate system#100151-(LV3=0) #151001-(LV3=1) Feature coordinate system #151001-(LV3=0) #100151-(LV3=1) Example (When bit 4 ...

  • Page 823

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 793 - 22.6.1.3 Tilted working plane indexing based on roll-pitch-yaw Overview With the tilted working plane indexing, coordinate system conversion by rotation about the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system in this orde...

  • Page 824

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 794 - Explanation Suppose that the coordinate system is rotated about (1) the X-axis, (2) the Y-axis, and (3) the Z-axis in this order. A "workpiece coordinate system" rotated by angle α about the X-axis is "coordinate syste...

  • Page 825

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 795 - Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. XYZ 30°XcZcYc Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-ZFeature coordinate systemXc-Yc-Zc200.050.0 Fig. 22.6.1.3 (c) • Feature co...

  • Page 826

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 796 - Format Format G68.2 P2 Q0 X x0 Y y0 Z z0 Rα ; G68.2 P2 Q1 X x1 Y y1 Z z1 ; G68.2 P2 Q2 X x2 Y y2 Z z2 ; G68.2 P2 Q3 X x3 Y y3 Z z3 ; Tilted working plane indexing G69 ; Cancel tilted working plane indexing (M series). G69.1; C...

  • Page 827

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 797 - Explanation - Determination of a feature coordinate system Three entered points are named P1, P2, and P3 in the order of entry. The P1-to-P2 direction is defined as the X-axis of a feature coordinate system. Among the directions that ...

  • Page 828

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 798 - Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. XYZ 30° XcZcYc Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-ZFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc 200.050.0 First pointSecond point Third ...

  • Page 829

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 799 - 22.6.1.5 Tilted working plane indexing based on two vectors Overview With the tilted working plane indexing, a tilted working plane can be specified by specifying an X-axis direction vector and a Z-axis direction vector in the feature ...

  • Page 830

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 800 - XcZcYc (Yc1)V1V2Yc2There are two vectors normal to the Xc-axis and Zc-axis. However, Yc1 is defined as the Yc-axis of the feature coordinate system according to the right-handed system. Fig. 22.6.1.5 (b) - When the first and secon...

  • Page 831

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 801 - Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. XYZ 30°XcZcYc Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-ZFeature coordinate systemXc-Yc-Zc 200.050.0 First vector Second vector Fig....

  • Page 832

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 802 - 22.6.1.6 Tilted working plane indexing based on projection angles Overview With the tilted working plane indexing, a tilted working plane can be specified based on projection angles. A plane determined by vector A and vector B produced...

  • Page 833

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 803 - X Y Z-αβABZc Plane P Fig. 22.6.1.6 (b) By the third command angle α and second command angle β, the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system are determined. X Y ZABYc γPlane P Zc Xc Fig. 22.6.1.6 (c) By the third command angle ...

  • Page 834

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 804 - Example The example of a program when feature coordinate system like the figure below is used is shown below. XYZ 30°XcZcYc Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-ZFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc 200.050.0 AB Fig. 22.6.1.6 (d) • Origin...

  • Page 835

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 805 - 22.6.1.7 Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction Overview By specifying G68.3, a coordinate system (feature coordinate system) where the tool axis direction is the +Z-axis direction can be automatically specified. When a f...

  • Page 836

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 806 - Coordinate system origin shift (xo,yo,zo)Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc αXYZ ZcYcXc Fig. 22.6.2 (b) G68.3 command Explanation - Feature coordinate system By specifying G68.3, a feature coordin...

  • Page 837

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 807 - X-axis of feature coordinate system Y-axis of feature coordinate system Vertical axis direction: P Z-axis of feature coordinate system (Tool axis direction: T) XcYc Zc Fig. 22.6.2 (c) Determination of a feature coordinate system...

  • Page 838

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 808 - The reference coordinate system of feature coordinate system (the feature coordinate system that is defined when absolute coordinate system of tool rotation axes is zero) is as follows by the parameter (No.19697) for reference tool axi...

  • Page 839

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 809 - Fig. 22.6.2 (e) Example that reference tool axis direction is Z direction - Machine of table rotation type On a machine of table rotation type, the tool direction remains unchanged. So, a feature coordinate system ba...

  • Page 840

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 810 - - Example of operation An example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type is given below. The machine configuration is "BC type reference tool axis Z-axis". B: 2nd rotation axis (slave) C: 1st rotation axis (maste...

  • Page 841

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 811 - XcYc Zc XYZXYZXYZMachine operation by sample program 1N3 command N6 command N5 command N4 command Workpiece coorditate system X-Y-Z Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Fig. 22.6.2 (h) N3 bl...

  • Page 842

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 812 - N2 block: Tilts the tool. (B45 deg) N3 block: Tilts the tool. (C60 deg) N4 block: The direction of the reference coordinate system of feature coordinate system is the direction of workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 843

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 813 - A: 2nd rotation axis (slave) C: 1st rotation axis (master)Control point Tool holder offset value = Parameter No. 19666 Tool length offset = H01 AC type tool axis Z-axis (Axes are intersecting.) Tool center point Fig. 22.6.2 (i) S...

  • Page 844

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 814 - N3 command N4 commandN6 commandN5 commandX Y Z Machine operation by sample program 2 XcYc ZcXc Yc Zc Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc X Y Z XcYc Zc X Y Z XcYcZcX Y Z Fig. 22.6.2 (j) N3 block: Sets a feature coordinate sy...

  • Page 845

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 815 - 22.6.2 Multiple command of tilted working plane indexing 22.6.2.1 Absolute multiple command By additionally specifying G68.2 in the tilted working plane indexing mode, a feature coordinate system produced by additionally applying coord...

  • Page 846

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 816 - N6 command XYZN4 command Machine operation by sample program 1 N7 command N5 command XYZXYZXcYcZcXYZFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Xc YcZcXc YcZcXcYcZcG55 Machine origin Fig. 22.6.2.1 ...

  • Page 847

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 817 - 22.6.2.2 Incremental multiple command By specifying G68.4, coordinate system conversion can be applied to the currently set feature coordinate system. This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (MTW) of parameter No. 11221. Format The ...

  • Page 848

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 818 - N7 G53.1; : N8 G69 ; : N6 command XYZN4 command Machine operation by sample program 2 N7 command N5 command Xc1 Yc1Zc1XYZXYZXc2Yc2Zc2XYZFeature coordinate system Xc1-Yc1-Zc1 Feature coordinate system Xc2-Yc2-Zc2 Xc1 Yc1Zc...

  • Page 849

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 819 - 22.6.3 Tool Axis Direction Control 22.6.3.1 Tool axis direction control G53.1 automatically specifies the +Z direction of the feature coordinate system as the tool axis direction. Example of operation The following gives an operation ...

  • Page 850

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 820 - Example) O100 (Sample Program1) ; N1 G55 ; N2 G90 G01 X0 Y0 Z30.0 F1000 ; N3 G68.2 X100.0 Y100.0 Z50.0 I30.0 J15.0 K20.0 ; N4 G01 X0 Y0 Z30.0 F1000 ; N5 G53.1 ; N6 G43 H01 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N7 . . . In this example, the "BC type tool ax...

  • Page 851

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 821 - Fig. 22.6.3 (d) shows the behavior of the machine when it runs sample program 1. N3 commandFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-ZcXc Yc Zc• Sample program 1 (with axes crossing one another) Xc Yc ZcXc Yc ZcXc Yc ZcN4 command N5 command ...

  • Page 852

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 822 - Operation description 2: When G43 (tool length compensation) is specified for a machine with no axis crossing Here is the case where no axis of the machine crosses any other axis. It is assumed that sample program 1 is used. In this ...

  • Page 853

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 823 - N3 command• Sample program 1 (no axis crossing)N4 commandN5 commandN6 commandWorkpiececoordinate systemX-Y-ZXYZControlpointXcYcZcZcFeature coordinatesystemXc-Yc-ZcXcYcXcYcZcXcYcZcAn intersection offset vectorbetween the tool axis an...

  • Page 854

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 824 - Operation description 3: When no G43 (tool length compensation) command is specified or if no G53.1 (tool axis direction control) command is specified Sample program 2 of O200 is equivalent to sample program 1 except that sample prog...

  • Page 855

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 825 - Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc N4 commandXc Yc Zc• Sample program 2 (with axes crossing one another)Yc N5 commandWorkpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z XYZ Control point Xc ZcN4 commandFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Xc Yc Zc• ...

  • Page 856

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 826 - N4 commandFeature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc• Sample program 3 (with axes crossing one another) N5 commandWorkpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z XYZ Control point XcYc ZcN4 commandZ Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc XcYc Zc• ...

  • Page 857

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 827 - - Composite type machine Basic operation This function is also available for a composite type machine in which the tool head rotates on the tool rotation axis and the table rotates on the table rotation axis. The feature coordinate s...

  • Page 858

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 828 - XYZXc'Yc'Zc'• G53.1 commandXYZXc'Yc'Zc'G01 Y10.0 F1000command after G53.1Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc'Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc' Fig. 22.6.3 (j) Resetting of the feature coordinate system - Rotation di...

  • Page 859

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 829 - XYZAXcYcZcYcXc ZcCCW CWRotation to A-45.0CCWRotation to A45.0CCWYcXc ZcPositive rotation direction when parameter No.19684 = 0 Positive rotation direction when parameter No.19684 = 1 G53.1 command G53.1 command Fig. 22.6.3 (k) Rotati...

  • Page 860

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 830 - - Table rotation type machine Basic operation This function is also usable for a table rotation type machine with two table rotation axes. The feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc is set in the workpiece coordinate system based on the ...

  • Page 861

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 831 - • G53.1 commandG01 X10.0 F1000command after G53.1Yc'Xc'XYZZc'Yc'Xc'XYZZc'Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc'Second feature coordinatesystemXc'-Yc'-Zc' Fig. 22.6.3 (m) Resetting of the feature coordinate system - Angle of th...

  • Page 862

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 832 - "Output judgment conditions" Tool rotation type or table rotation type machine <1> The "output angles" are represented by the computed rotary axis angle pair whose master axis (first rotary axis) moving angle ...

  • Page 863

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 833 - • Computed angle A -360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 - 360 × N-360 × N degreesθ2 - 360 × N θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) θ1 - 360 × (N - 1) (*1) 0 degree 360 degreesθ2 - 360 θ1 θ2 θ1 + 360(*2) 360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 + 360 × N 360 ×...

  • Page 864

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 834 - CAUTION 3 If the setting of the lower limit (parameters No. 19742 and No. 19744) is greater than that of the upper limit (parameters No. 19741 and No. 19743), alarm PS5459 is issued. 4 If there is no calculated angle that falls within...

  • Page 865

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 835 - When the slave axis angle is 0 degree, the direction of the tool axis becomes fixed regardless of the master axis angle. In that case, the master axis does not move from the current angle. An explanation is shown below using a machine...

  • Page 866

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 836 - When this function is enabled (bit 4 (CFW) of parameter No. 11221 = 1), the second rotation axis is controlled so that the direction of the second feature coordinate system matches that of the workpiece coordinate system. (Fig. 22.6.3 ...

  • Page 867

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 837 - To use tool center point retention type tool axis direction control on a T series machine, enable the extended tool selection function (set bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1). Use D as the tool length offset number. Other restricti...

  • Page 868

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 838 - G53.6 H1 (G53.6 D1 for the T series) Control point Tool length vector Tool center pointZ X Workpiece coordinate system Fig. 22.6.3 (a) Operation of tool center point retention type tool axis direction control (tool rotati...

  • Page 869

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 839 - G53.6 H1 R200.0 (G53.6 D1 R200.0 for the T series) rr Control point Tool length vectorTool center point Rotation centerZ X Z’Y’Workpiece coordinate system Feature coordinate system r: Distance from the tool center po...

  • Page 870

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 840 - 22.6.4 Tilted Working Plane Indexing in Tool Length Compensation Overview In tool length compensation (G43), G68.2/G68.4 (tilted working plane indexing) and G53.1 (tool axis direction control)/G53.6 (tool center point retention type to...

  • Page 871

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 841 - X ZG54ZF XFN20N50N30Feature coordinate system N40 Fig. 22.6.4 (b) Example of operation 2 (tool rotation type) G54 N20 X Z ZF XFN30G54 N20 X Z ZF XFN50 Specify the tilted working plane in the B0 state in N40. The feature coordinate ...

  • Page 872

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 842 - ZF1XF1N80 N50 N60ZF1XF1 Feature coordinate system N40 Feature coordinate system N70 Fig. 22.6.4 (d) Example of operation 3 (tool rotation type) N60N80 ZF1 XF1N50 Specify the tilted working plane in the B20 state in N70. The feature...

  • Page 873

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 843 - N40 X100.0 Y0 Z0 ; X ZG54 ZF XFN10N4N30Feature coordinate system N20 Fig. 22.6.4 (f) Example of operation 4 (tool rotation type) G54 N10 X Z ZF XFN30G54 X Z ZFXFN40Feature coordinate system N20 Second feature coordinate system N30...

  • Page 874

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 844 - CAUTION Any tilted working plane indexing in tool length compensation cannot be used in workpiece setting error compensation. Restrictions - Basic restrictions The restrictions imposed on 3-dimensional coordinate conversion also ap...

  • Page 875

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 845 - - Relationships with other modal commands G41, G42, and G40 (cutter compensation), G43, G49 (tool length compensation), G51.1 and G50.1 (programmable mirror image), and canned cycle commands must have nesting relationships with G68.2...

  • Page 876

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 846 - M (1) Programmable mirror image (G50.1/G51.1) (2) Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode off (G69) (3) Feed per minute (G94) (4) Feed per revolution (G94) T (1) Coordinate system rotation...

  • Page 877

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 847 - 22.7 INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL Overview The conventional tilted working plane indexing / tool center point control function / 3-dimensional cutter compensation / 3-dimensional manual feed can be used only for those machines whose to...

  • Page 878

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 848 - B C YZXCB Fig. 22.7 (b) Tool rotation type machine An example of a table rotation type machine is explained below. (See Fig. 22.7 (c).) The machine shown in Fig. 22.7 (c) has rotary axis B (master) whose Y-axis is inclined at an angl...

  • Page 879

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 849 - BZYXABA Fig. 22.7 (d) Composite type machine Format and operation The operation of the tilted working plane indexing / tool center point control function / 3-dimensional cutter compensation / 3-dimensional manual feed during the incli...

  • Page 880

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 850 - 22.8 3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION Overview For machines having multiple rotary axes for freely controlling the orientation of a tool axis, this function calculates a tool vector from the positions of these rotary axes. The functio...

  • Page 881

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 851 - The coordinate system in which to execute a program for 3-dimensional cutter compensation is called a programming coordinate system. If, in a 5-axis machine having a table rotation axis, 3-dimensional cutter compensation (tool side off...

  • Page 882

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 852 - 22.8.1 Cutter Compensation in Tool Rotation Type Machine Overview In a 5-axis machine having two tool rotation axes as shown in Fig. 22.8.1 (a), this function can perform cutter compensation. Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has to...

  • Page 883

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 853 - 22.8.1.1 Tool side offset Overview This type of cutter compensation performs 3-dimensional compensation in a plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to the tool vector. CompensationplaneYZXTool vectorCutter compensationamountTool cent...

  • Page 884

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 854 - The following are the notes on type 2. NOTE 1 If one or two of I, J, and K are omitted, the omitted ones of I, J, and K are assumed to be 0. 2 In a block in which all of I, J, and K are omitted, the values of I, J, and K in the previou...

  • Page 885

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 855 - - Operation at startup and cancellation <1> Type A The tool is moved in the same way as for cutter compensation as shown below. Tool G41.2 G40 : Tool center path: Programmed path Operation in linear interpolation : Tool...

  • Page 886

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 856 - <3> Type C When G41.2, G42.2, or G40 is specified as shown below, a linear block specifying movement by the amount of cutter compensation in the direction orthogonal to the movement direction of the block following startup or th...

  • Page 887

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 857 - : Tool center path : Programmed path Example <1>-1 Going outside of corner at acute angle Example <1>-2 Going inside of corner Linear block inserted Tool Tool Workpiece Workpiece : Tool compensation amount Nothing i...

  • Page 888

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 858 - <3> When a command that makes the tool retrace the path of the previous block is specified, the tool path can match the locus of the previous block by changing the G code to change the offset direction. If the G code is left unch...

  • Page 889

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 859 - Y Z VaVb46° 45° Va: Tool vector when A=-46 Vb: Tool vector when A=45 A: End point of N3 B: End point of N4 C: End point of N6 A B C Fig. 22.8.1.1 (k) Tool vector e3 e2 A’ C’ B’ V1V2A’: Point A projected onto the compe...

  • Page 890

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 860 - Ua: Vector AB Ub: Vector BC Va: Tool vector between A and B Vb: Tool vector between B and C Wa: Va × Ua Wb: Vb × Ub (Here, × represents an outer product operator.) Y Z VaVbA B C X WaWbUaUb Fig. 22.8.1.1 (m) Conceptual diagram A’:...

  • Page 891

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 861 - Example: N4 Y-200 Z-200 Q1 At B', a vector (V) perpendicular to A'B' is generated. e3 e2 A’ C’ B’ V Fig. 22.8.1.1 (o) Q1 command A perpendicular vector can also be generated by specifying G41.2 or G42.1 in the next block as ...

  • Page 892

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 862 - ZX Y Tool Tool axis Start pointEnd pointToolTool center path created in the compensation plane(Compensation plane = XY plane) Compensation vector created in the compensation plane Actual compensation vectorMove commandProjected Fig. ...

  • Page 893

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 863 - Composite type machine <1> The "output angles" are represented by the computed rotary axis angle pair whose table (second rotary axis) moving angle is smaller. ↓ ↓ When the table movi...

  • Page 894

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 864 - • Computed angle A-360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 - 360 × N-360 × N degreesθ2 - 360 × Nθ2 - 360 × (N + 1)θ1 - 360 × (N - 1)(*1)0 degree360 degreesθ2 - 360θ1θ2θ1 + 360(*2)360 × (N + 1) degreesθ1 + 360 × N360 × N degreesθ2...

  • Page 895

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 865 - • BC type tool axis Z X YZC-axis: First rotation axis (master) B-axis: Second rotation axis (slave) Fig. 22.8.1.1 (u) BC type tool axis Z The following two pairs of "computed basic angles" exist that direct the tool axis...

  • Page 896

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 866 - • BC type tool axis Z XYZC Fig. 22.8.1.1 (v) BC type tool axis Z When the current rotary axis angles are (B 45 degrees; C 90 degrees), the "output angles" are (B 0 degree; C 90 degrees). - Angle of the rotary axis for t...

  • Page 897

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 867 - Composite type machine <1> Of the angle pairs whose master and slave axis angles are both within the specified movement range, the rotary axis angle pair whose table (second rotary axis) moving angle is smaller represents the &qu...

  • Page 898

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 868 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees360 × N degrees • Computed angle A Current position AMovement range A θ1 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × (N - 1) θ1 + 360 × (N + 1) Fig. 22.8.1.1 (x) Computed angle of rotary axis A and its curren...

  • Page 899

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 869 - 22.8.1.2 Leading edge offset Overview Leading edge offset is a type of cutter compensation used when a workpiece is machined with the edge of a tool. The tool is automatically shifted by the amount of cutter compensation on the line wh...

  • Page 900

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 870 - <1> When the tool vector is inclined in the tool movement direction Tool Tool compensation vector (VT)VM G41.3(VC) G40 : Tool center path : Programmed path Fig. 22.8.1.2 (b) When the tool vector is inclined in the tool movem...

  • Page 901

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 871 - Tool center path (path after compensation)Programmed path VM1 VM2VT1VC1VC2 = VC3VT2VM4 There is one block that specifies no movement Fig. 22.8.1.2 (e) When there is one block that specifies no movement If block 3 specifies no moveme...

  • Page 902

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 872 - (2) If (180 - Δθ) ≤ θ ≤ 180, θ is regarded as 180°. θΔθ VTnV Mn+1 Fig. 22.8.1.2 (h) Determination of θ = 180° (3) If (90 − Δθ) ≤ θ ≤ (90 + Δθ), θ is regarded as 90°. θ Δθ V Tn V Mn+1 θΔθVTnVMn+1 Fig...

  • Page 903

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 873 - Tool center path (path after compensation) Programmed path VMVMVT1 VCVCVT2VMVT3VMVCVCVMVM6VT4VCVT5 Fig. 22.8.1.2 (l) When θ = 90° is determined 1 If the previous compensation vector (VCn-1) points in the same direction (-(VMn × V...

  • Page 904

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 874 - Programmed point (pivot point) WorkpieceTool center Tool sideDistance from programmed point(pivot point) to cutting point(parameter setting) Vector from programmed point (pivotpoint) to cutting point Cutting point Vector of three-dimen...

  • Page 905

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 875 - Cutter compensation vector (VD') is calculated on a compensation plane perpendicular tothe tool axis direction.The cutter compensation vector (VD') on the compensation plane is converted to theoriginal Cartesian coordinate system, and ...

  • Page 906

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 876 - 22.8.2 Cutter Compensation in Table Rotation Type Machine Overview Cutter compensation can be performed for a 5-axis machine having a rotary table as shown in Fig. 22.8.2 (a). Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has table rotation axi...

  • Page 907

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 877 - NOTE 1 In a table rotation type machine (parameter No. 19680 = 12), if an attempt is made to issue G41.4 or G42.4 with bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No. 19607 equal to 0, alarm PS0010 is generated. 2 In a table rotation type machine, if an ...

  • Page 908

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 878 - - Canceling the cutter compensation G40 IP_ ; G40: Cutter compensation cancellation (group 07) IP_: Value specified for axis movement - Selecting an offset plane When bit 1 (PTD) of parameter No. 19746 is 1, compensation is perform...

  • Page 909

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 879 - - Cutter compensation The function for 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a table rotation type machine basically performs operations in conformance with 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a tool rotation type machine. The operat...

  • Page 910

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 880 - Note, however, the distance to go is always that in the programming coordinate system. NOTE 1 If the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode is entered when the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, look...

  • Page 911

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 881 - 22.8.3 Cutter Compensation in Composite Type Machine Overview This function can perform 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a 5-axis machine having a rotary table and a tool axis as shown in Fig. 22.8.3 (a). Shown below is a 5-axis ma...

  • Page 912

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 882 - When bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No. 19607 is 1 G41.5 (or G42.5) IP_ D_ ; G41.5 : Cutter compensation left (group 07) G42.5 : Cutter compensation right (group 07) IP_ : Value specified for axis moving as viewed from the programming coord...

  • Page 913

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 883 - NOTE 5 They can be used only with the settings that select the table coordinate system as a programming coordinate system (bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.19696 = 0 and bit 4 (TBP) of parameter No.19746 = 1). If an attempt is made to issue...

  • Page 914

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 884 - - Startup When 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a composite type machine (G41.2 or G42.2, G41.5 or G42.5, or a D code other than D0) is specified in the offset cancel mode, the CNC enters the offset mode. Startup is specified wit...

  • Page 915

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 885 - NOTE 1 If the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode is entered when the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is automatically enabled. Be sure ...

  • Page 916

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 886 - 22.8.4 Interference Check and Interference Avoidance Overview By setting bit 1 (NI5) of parameter No. 19608 to 1, this function performs an interference check on the plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to the tool axis direction r...

  • Page 917

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 887 - Z Y X Z’Y’X’Z’’ Y’’X’’ Fig. 22.8.4 (c) Composite type - Interference avoidance V10 N10 N20 N30 N40N50V20 V30V40VaY X Compensation plane Machining program N10 X8.010 Y77.91 Z93.345 B21.02 C22.001 N20 X10.221 YY60.932...

  • Page 918

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 888 - NOTE Strictly speaking, if the tool axis direction at the N20 end point differs from the tool axis direction at the N50 start point, correct intersection point calculation is not possible. For this reason, the maximum permissible ang...

  • Page 919

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 889 - N10 to N40 interfere, so that no interference avoidance vector can be generated. V10 causes an interference alarm. 22.8.5 Restrictions 22.8.5.1 Restrictions common to machine configurations - Interference check In the 3-dimensional t...

  • Page 920

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 890 - Command G code Tool center point control Bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No.19607 Machine configuration Internal G code0 - G41.2 / G42.2 Tool rotation type G41.2 / G42.2 Table rotation type G41.4 / G42.4 Type 1 1 Composite type G41.5 / G42.5 ...

  • Page 921

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 891 - • Feed per revolution G95 • Constant surface speed control G96, G97 - Unavailable functions If the following function is specified in the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode, a warning message is issued: • MDI interruption ...

  • Page 922

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 892 - When 3-dimensional cutter compensation is specified before tool center point control, the block for canceling tool center point control suppresses buffering. Note that, as a result, the block before the G49 block generates a compensat...

  • Page 923

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 893 - Example 1 (Correct specification) G43.4 H1 : G41.2 D1 : G40 : G49 Example 2 (Specification resulting in alarm) G41.2 D1 : G43.4 H1 : Example 3 (Specification resulting in alarm) G43.4 H1 : G41.2 D1 : G49 Fig. 22.8.5....

  • Page 924

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 894 - Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation If the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode is entered, look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is automatically enabled. Set the look-ahead acceleration...

  • Page 925

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 895 - M • Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode on (G69) • Feed per minute (G94) • Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel (G113) T • Mirror image for double turret off/balanced cutting mode...

  • Page 926

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 896 - O100(Sample Program2); N10 G55 ; Preparations for the programming coordinate system N20 G90 X0 Y0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Movement to the initial position N30 G01 G43.4 H01 Z40.0 F500.0 ; Start of tool center point control H01 is a tool l...

  • Page 927

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 897 - Composite type (tool rotation axis: B-axis - table rotation axis:C-axis - tool axis: Z directionCG55 Workpiece coordinate systemRotation center of B-axis XZYBRotation center of C-axis Fig. 22.8.6 (a) Machine confi...

  • Page 928

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 898 - Exploded view of each block Operation at control point (machine coordinate values) Block N70 (C 45.0)(C 135.0)(C 135.0)X'Y'Block N60 Y"X"Y"X"(C 225.0)X'Y'X'Y' : Table coo...

  • Page 929

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 899 - Block N90 X'Y'Block N80 Y"X"Y"X"X'Y'(C 225.0)(C 315.0)(C 315.0)(C 405.0) Fig. 22.8.6 (d) Exploded View of Each Block (2)

  • Page 930

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 900 - 22.9 EXPANSION OF THE WAY TO SET 5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PARAMETERS Overview By setting bit 7 (SPM) of parameter No. 19754 to 1, the parameters of the 5-axis machining functions can be set with reference to the machine coordinate of ...

  • Page 931

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 901 - If the workpiece offset value (C,B) is changed to (90,90), the machine configuration with the absolute coordinates of C0 B0 (machine coordinates: C90B90) (Fig. 22.9 (b)) changes as below. • Second rotation axis: About the -X-axis •...

  • Page 932

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 902 - Setting example (composite type) This function is explained below, using a composite type machine that looks like in Fig. 22.9 (e), below, when the machine coordinates are B0C0. (B-axis (first rotation axis): About the Y-axis, C-axis (...

  • Page 933

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 903 - 22.10 MACHINE CONFIGURATION SELECTING FUNCTION Overview The Machine Configuration Selecting function allows easy switching machine configuration in the multi-tasking machine system. Ten sets of parameters for machine configuration are ...

  • Page 934

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 904 - NOTE The set number and the name last selected by machine configuration selecting command are displayed in II "active machine configuration set". Therefore, when the NC parameter is rewritten or machine configuration data ar...

  • Page 935

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 905 - Three-dimensional rotary error compensation Tool axis direction tool length compensation NOTE 1 Bit 7 (MSF) of parameter No. 11269 decides Enabled (1)/ Disabled (0) of the G10.8L3 command. If G10.8L3 is specified in MSF = 0, the alarm...

  • Page 936

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 906 - Parameter No. Description Data type 19699 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB) Real path 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) Real path 19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis ...

  • Page 937

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 907 - 5 Press the soft key [<]. 6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MACHINE CONFIG] appears. Press the soft key [MACHINE CONFIG]. 7 Move the cursor to the parameter number of a machine configuration data you want to set by...

  • Page 938

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 908 - Setting by G10 Machine configuration data and name can be set by specifying G10. Format G10 L25 ; I_ P_ N_ R_ ; I_ P_ N_ Q_ R_ ; I_ P_ N_ A_ R_ ; I_ P_ <***********>; G11 ; Machine configuration data entry mode Configuration dat...

  • Page 939

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING 22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 909 - I2 P3 <MILLING_CON3>; The name of configuration the 3rd set for the 2nd path = “MILLING_CON3” I2 P4 <TURNING_CON1>; The name of configuration the 4th set for the 2nd path = “TURNING_CON1” G11 ; 22.10.4 Inputting ...

  • Page 940

    22.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 910 - 9. Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the machine configuration data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the in...

  • Page 941

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 911 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTION23 MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION Chapter 23, "MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 23.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................

  • Page 942

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 912 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION Example) For a system with four paths Program folder for path1Program folder for path2Program folder for path3Path 1programanalysisPath 2programanalysisPath 3programanalysisPath 1positioncontrolPath 2positioncontrolPath 3positionco...

  • Page 943

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 913 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTIONWhen address P is not specified, paths 1 and 2 wait for each other (waiting set for two paths). Always specify address P in a single block. - Waiting specified with binary values When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0, t...

  • Page 944

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 914 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION - Waiting specified with a combination of path numbers When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 1, the value specified at address P is assumed to be a combination of path numbers. The following table lists the path number...

  • Page 945

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 915 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTIONO0300;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0303;M102 P7; ................. <2>O0100;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0101;M03 S1000;..M101 P3; .................. <1>G01 X Z F ;..M102 P7; .................. <2>M103 P7;...

  • Page 946

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 916 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION O0300;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0303;M102 P123; ............. <2>O0100;G50 X Z ;G00 X Z T0101;M03 S1000;..M101 P12; ................ <1>G01 X Z F ;..M102 P123; .............. <2>M103 P123;...

  • Page 947

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 917 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTION23.3 COMMON MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH Overview In a multi-path system, this function enables data within the specified range to be accessed as data common to all paths. The data includes tool compensation memory and custom macro common...

  • Page 948

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 918 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION 50 macrovariables50 macrovariablesMacro variable number 119Macro variable number 100Macro variablesfor path 1No.6036=20Macro variablesfor path 2 Fig. 23.3 (b) NOTE 1 If the value of parameter No. 6036 or 6037 exceeds the maximum n...

  • Page 949

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 919 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTION Tool post 2Spindle 1 Tool post 1Spindle 2 Fig. 23.4 (b) Application to a lathe with two spindles and two tool posts The spindle belonging to each path can generally be controlled by programmed commands for the path. With path spindl...

  • Page 950

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 920 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION WorkpieceZ2 (Synchronized with movement along the Z1 axis) Z1 Turret 1 X1Machining according to a program for path 1 Fig. 23.5 (a) • Synchronizes movement along an axis of one path with that along another axis of the same path. ...

  • Page 951

    B-64484EN/03 PROGRAMMING - 921 - 23.MUITI-PATH CONTROLFUNCTION - Composite control • Exchanges the move commands for different axes of different path. Example) Exchanging the commands for the X1 and X2 axes (in the case of turning) → Upon the execution of a command programmed for path 1, mov...

  • Page 952

    PROGRAMMING B-64484EN/03 - 922 - 23. MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE The method used to specify synchronous, composite, or superimposed control varies with the machine tool builder. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

  • Page 953

    III. OPERATION

  • Page 954

  • Page 955

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 925 - 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION..................................................................................................................925 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOM...

  • Page 956

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 926 - - The tool movement by manual operation Using machine operator's panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along each axis. Tool WorkpieceMachine operator's panel Manual pulse generator Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by ma...

  • Page 957

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 927 - Explanation - Memory operation After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the program instructions. This operation is called memory operation. CNC MachineMemory Fig. 1.2 (b) Memory operation - MDI operati...

  • Page 958

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 928 - - Start and stop Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program, th...

  • Page 959

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 929 - ToolTable Fig. 1.4.1 (a) Dry run - Feedrate override Check the program by changing the feedrate specified in the program. (See Section, “FEEDRATE OVERRIDE”.) ToolFeedrate specified by program :100 mm/min.Feedrate after feed rateoverride (20%) : 20 mm...

  • Page 960

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 930 - 1.4.2 How to View the Position Display Change without Running the Machine Explanation - Machine Lock MDI XYZTool The tool remains stopped, and only thepositional displays of the axes change. Workpiece Fig. 1.4.2 (a) Machine Lock - Auxiliary function ...

  • Page 961

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 931 - Explanation - Offset value SettingDisplayScreen Keys MDI Geometry Wear compensation compensation Tool compensation number 1 12.3 25.0 Tool compensation number 2 20.0 40.0 Tool compensation number 3 CNC memory Fig. 1.6 (b) Displaying and Setting Offs...

  • Page 962

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 932 - SettingScreen Keys MDI DisplayingCNC MemoryProgram Automatic operation Movement of the machine Operational characteristics Setting data Inch/Metric switching Ì ÝSelection of I/O device Mirror image ON/OFF setting : : : Fig. 1.6 (d) Displaying and sett...

  • Page 963

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 933 - - Data protection key A key called the data protection key can be defined. It is used to prevent part programs, offset values, parameters, and setting data from being registered, modified, or deleted erroneously. (See Chapter, “SETTING AND DISPLAYING DA...

  • Page 964

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 934 - Fig. 1.7.1 (b) 1.7.2 Current Position Display The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. Moreover, the distance from the current position to a target point can be displayed as a remaining travel distance. (See Subsections,...

  • Page 965

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL - 935 - Fig. 1.7.2 (b) 1.7.3 Alarm Display When a trouble occurs during operation, error code and alarm message are displayed on the screen. (See Section, “ALARM DISPLA”.) See APPENDIX G for the list of error codes and their meanings. Fig. 1.7.3 (a)

  • Page 966

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 936 - 1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display The position display screen displays a run time, cycle time, and parts count. (See Subsection, “Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time”.) Fig. 1.7.4 (a)

  • Page 967

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 937 - 2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES As operational devices, setting and display devices attached to the CNC, and machine operator's panels are available. For machine operator's panels, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. Chapter 2, &qu...

  • Page 968

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 938 - WARNING Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed at the power on, do not touch a key on the MDI unit. Some keys are used for the maintenance or special operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused. 2....

  • Page 969

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 939 - 2.2 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.8 of Part III. 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel......................................................................................................

  • Page 970

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 940 - 2.2.2 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel (12.1"/15"/19" LCD CNC Display Panel)

  • Page 971

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 941 - 2.2.3 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) Unit with machining center system Reset keyHelp keyAddress/numeric keysEdit keysCancel (CAN) keyInput keyShift keyPage change keys(Page key)Cursor keysFunction keysAUX keyUppercase/lowercaseswitch keyCTRL keyAL...

  • Page 972

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 942 - 2.2.4 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key) Address keys Reset key Help key Uppercase/lowercase switch key Shift key AUX key CTRL key ALT key TAB key Page change keys (Page key) Cursor keys Function keys Input key Cancel (CAN) key Edit keys Numeric ke...

  • Page 973

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 943 - 2.2.5 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key) Unit with machining center system Reset key Help key Shift key Page change keys (Page key) Cursor keys Function keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key Input key Address/numeric keys Unit with lathe system Reset key He...

  • Page 974

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 944 - 2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT Table 2.3 (a) Explanation of the MDI unit No. Name Explanation 1 RESET key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc. 2 HELP key Press this key to use the help function when uncertain about the o...

  • Page 975

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 945 - No. Name Explanation 11 Page change keys (Page keys) Two kinds of page change keys are described below. : This key is used to changeover the page on the screen in the forwarddirection. : This key is used to changeover the page on the screen i...

  • Page 976

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 946 - Vertical soft keys Horizontal soft keysDisplays operations on selected chapter. Soft keys for personal computer functionsSoft keys for personal computer functions In this manual, the descriptions below assume a 10.4" LCD display panel w...

  • Page 977

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 947 - 2.4 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to the...

  • Page 978

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 948 - • Chapter selection soft keys • Operation selection soft keys • Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys Depending on the state, the button images of the soft keys change. From the button images, which state the soft keys are assu...

  • Page 979

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 949 - Press this key to display the custom screen 1 (conversational macro screen or C Language Executor screen). Press this key to display the custom screen 2 (conversational macro screen or C Language Executor screen). 2.4.3 Soft Keys By...

  • Page 980

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 950 - No. Chapter menu Description (6) MONI Selects the screen for displaying the servo axis load meter, serial spindle load meter, and speedometer. (7) 3-D MANUAL Displays a handle pulse interrupt amount in 3-dimensional manual feed. Program screen...

  • Page 981

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 951 - Offset/setting screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. OFFSET SETTINGWORK (OPRT) Page 1 + (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) MACRO OPR TOOL MANAGER(OPRT) Page 2 + (6) (7)(8)(9...

  • Page 982

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 952 - No. Chapter menu Description (6) MACRO Selects the screen for setting macro variables. (8) OPR Selects the screen for operating some operation switches on the machine operator's panel as soft switches. (9) TOOL MANAGER Selects the screen for se...

  • Page 983

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 953 - FSSB PRMTUNP.MATEMGR. (OPRT) Page 6 + (26) (27)(28)(29)(30) EMBED PORT PCMCIALAN ETHERNET PROFI MASTER(OPRT) Page 7 + (31) (32)(33)(34)(35) REMOTE DIAG M CODE 3D ERRCOMP (OPRT) Page 8 + (36) (37)(38)(39)(40) PROFI SLAVE DEVNETMASTERFL-net 1C...

  • Page 984

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 954 - No. Chapter menu Description (16) MCNG TUNING Displays the screen for setting the parameter set for emphasis on speed (LV1) or emphasis on precision (LV10). (17) ALL IO (RS232C interface) Selects the screen for data input to and output from the...

  • Page 985

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 955 - Message screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. ALARM MSG HISTRYMSGHIS Page 1 + (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) EMBED LOG PCMCIALOG ETHERLOG FL-net 1CH Page 2 + (6) (7)(8)(...

  • Page 986

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 956 - PARAM GRAPH (OPRT) Page 1 + (1) (2)(3)(4)(5) Table 2.4.3 (f) Graphic No. Chapter menu Description (1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting graphic parameters. (2) GRAPH Selects the screen for graphically displaying the tool path. When the ...

  • Page 987

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 957 - 2.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES External I/O devices such as a memory card are available. By using an external I/O device such as a memory card, the following data can be input or output: 1. Programs 2. Offset data 3. Parameters 4. Custom macro common...

  • Page 988

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 958 - I/O CHANNEL or foreground input Set channels to be used for data input/output. I/O CHANNEL (0 to 5) =0 : Channel 1 =1 : Channel 1 =2 : Channel 2 =3 : Channel 3 : : : Input/output to and from the memory card interface, etc. is also possible. ...

  • Page 989

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 959 - 3 MANUAL OPERATION MANUAL OPERATION are twelve kinds as follows : 3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN .............................................................................959 3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) ..............................................

  • Page 990

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 960 - The above is an example. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for the actual operations. XMIRRROR IMAGEYZCX2Y2Z2XYZPROGRAMSTOPM02/ M30MANUABSSPINDLEORITAPATCREADYNC?MC?ZERO POSITION Fig. 3.1 (b) Explanation - Auto...

  • Page 991

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 961 - While a switch is pressed, the toolmoves in the direction specified bythe switch. Z X Y Fig. 3.2 (a) Jog Feed (JOG) Procedure for JOG feed Procedure 1 Press the jog switch, one of the mode selection switches. 2 Press the feed axis and direction...

  • Page 992

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 962 - 3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator's panel moves the tool one step along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance the tool is mov...

  • Page 993

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 963 - 3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the machine operator's panel. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection switches. The...

  • Page 994

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 964 - - When manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified The amount of pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate can be saved by CNC as B. And amount of pulses B will be output as pulses C. t Rapid traverse rate A: Amount of p...

  • Page 995

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 965 - - Upper feedrate limit in manual handle feed The upper feedrate limit depends on the input signal (maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal HNDLF) from the PMC as follows: • When HNDLF is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to the manual rapi...

  • Page 996

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 966 - 3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the machine operator's panel. When the switch is turned on, th...

  • Page 997

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 967 - X YSwitch ONSwitch OFFManualoperation(100.0 , 100.0)(200.0 , 150.0)(120.0 , 200.0)(220.0 , 250.0) Fig. 3.5 (d) Manual operation after the end of block - Manual operation after a feed hold Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while b...

  • Page 998

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 968 - ProgramN1 G90 G01 X100. Y100. F500 ;N2 X200.0 ;N3 Y150.0 ; X YSwitch ONSwitch OFFManualoperation(100.0 , 100.0)(200.0 , 150.0)(200.0 , 100.0) N1 N2 N3 Fig. 3.5 (g) When a movement command in the next block is only one axis - When the next move b...

  • Page 999

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 969 - • Manual operation during cornering This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2', VB1', and VB2' are vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calcula...

  • Page 1000

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 970 - 3.6 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations are possible along with the conventional feed operation with simultaneous single-axis control (for X, Y, Z, or other axis). • Fe...

  • Page 1001

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 971 - Explanations Procedure 1 For manual handle feed, select the manual handle feed mode. For jog feed, select the jog feed mode. 2 For manual handle feed, use the handle feed axis selection switch to select the feed axis (simultaneous 1-axis feed in t...

  • Page 1002

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 972 - Y X Path of travel using the approach handle Path of travel using the guidance handle Specified straight line Tool Linear feed (3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2-axis control) A single manual handle operation can move the tool from the current ...

  • Page 1003

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 973 - Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. - Jog feed In jog feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, etc.), along a rotated straight line (linear feed), or along a circle (circular feed). (1) F...

  • Page 1004

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 974 - - The amount of the shift for manual handle feed When this function is effective, parameters Nos. 12350 and 12351 used to determine the magnification of manual handle feed for each axis are invalid and the values of parameters Nos. 7113 and 7114...

  • Page 1005

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 975 - Explanation - Manual rigid tapping Manual rigid tapping is enabled by bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No. 5203 to 1. - Cancellation of rigid mode To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping. When the reset key is pressed, rigid ...

  • Page 1006

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 976 - Limitation - Excessive error check In manual rigid tapping, only an excessive error during movement is checked. - Tool axis direction handle feed Tool axis direction handle feed is disabled. - Extraction override In manual rigid tapping, the ...

  • Page 1007

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 977 - (7) T codes (tool functions): ..................................................................Bit 2 (JTF) of parameter No. 7002 (8) B codes (second auxiliary functions): ..............................................Bit 3 (JBF) of parameter No. ...

  • Page 1008

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 978 - 4 Enter the required commands by using address keys and numeric keys on the MDI unit, then press soft key [INPUT] or the key to set the entered data. Fig. 3.8 (b) Example of inputting numerical value The following data can be set: 1. G00: Posit...

  • Page 1009

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 979 - Explanation - Positioning An amount of travel is given as a numeric value, preceded by an address such as X, Y, or Z. This is always regarded as being an incremental command, regardless of whether G90 or G91 is specified. Manual rapid traverse se...

  • Page 1010

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 980 - Feedrate (parameter) Rapid traverse rate (No. 1420) Automatic acceleration/deceleration (parameter) Linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis (No. 1620) Override Rapid traverse override NOTE The function for 3rd/4th ref...

  • Page 1011

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 981 - - Data input (1) When addresses and numeric values of a command are typed, then soft key [INPUT] is pressed, the entered data is set. In this case, the input unit is either the least input increment or calculator-type input format, according to t...

  • Page 1012

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 982 - - Jog feed When the tool is moved along an axis using a feed axis and direction selection switch on the manual numerical command screen, the remaining amount of travel is always shown as "0". - Disabling the M, S, T, and B functions ...

  • Page 1013

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 983 - • Address P command for multi spindle • Cs contour control function

  • Page 1014

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 984 - 3.9 3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED This function enables the use of the following functions. • 3-dimensional manual feed - Tool axis direction handle feed/tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction incremental feed - Tool axis right-angle dire...

  • Page 1015

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 985 - No.19687=2 (the slave rotation axis (B-axis) is about the Y-axis) No.19697=3 (the reference tool axis direction is the Z-axis direction) No.19698=0 (angle RA when the reference tool axis direction is tilted) No.19699=0 (angle RB when the refer...

  • Page 1016

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 986 - CB ZY X WorkpieceCBTool axis direction - Tool axis direction feed in the tilted working plane command mode If bit 0 (TWD) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feed direction of the tool axis direction feed in the tilted working plane command...

  • Page 1017

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 987 - Feedrate The feedrate is the dry run rate (parameter No.1410). The manual feedrate override feature is available. If bit 2 (JFR) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feedrate of a rotation axis is the jog feedrate of the axis to be rotated ...

  • Page 1018

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 988 - (Example) When the tool rotation axes are B-axis and C-axis and the tool axis direction is the Z-axis direction CB Z YX Tool axis right-angle direction 2 Tool axis direction B C Tool axis right-angle direction 1 Y XZBC - Latitude and longitude ...

  • Page 1019

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 989 - Tool axis right-angle direction 1 (longitude direction): R1 Tool axis right-angle direction 2 (latitude direction): R2 Normal axis direction: PTool axis direction: T - Tool axis right-angle direction feed in the tilted working plane command mod...

  • Page 1020

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 990 - <2> The tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal (RGHTH) is set to "1" and the table base signal (TB_BASE) is set to "0". <3> The feed axis direction selection signal (+Jn, -Jn (where n = 1 to the number o...

  • Page 1021

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 991 - B ZY X B B TableWorkpiece - Tool tip center rotation handle feed The tool tip center rotation handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> The tool tip center rotation ...

  • Page 1022

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 992 - Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamped so that the synthetic speed of the linear axes (in the tangential direction) does not exceed the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424) (of any moving linear axis). The feedrate is also clamped so ...

  • Page 1023

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 993 - BBZYXTable vertical direction - Table-based vertical direction feed in the tilted working plane command mode If bit 0 (TWD) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feed direction of the table-based vertical direction feed in the tilted working p...

  • Page 1024

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 994 - If bit 2 (JFR) of parameter No. 12320 is set to 1, the feedrate is the jog feedrate (parameter No. 1423) for a driven feed axis direction selection signal. The manual feedrate override feature is available. Feedrate clamp The feedrate is clamp...

  • Page 1025

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 995 - (Example) When the table rotation axis is the B-axis, and the table vertical direction is the Z-axis direction BZY X Table horizontal direction 2 Table horizontal direction 1 XYZBBTable vertical direction - Latitude and longitude directions Wh...

  • Page 1026

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 996 - Table-based vertical direction: T Table-based horizontal direction 2 (latitude direction): R2 Table-based horizontal direction 1 (longitude direction): R1 Normal axis direction: P - Table-based horizontal direction feed in the tilted working pl...

  • Page 1027

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 997 - • +J1 : Table horizontal direction 1 + • -J1 : Table horizontal direction 1 - • +J2 : Table horizontal direction 2 + • -J2 : Table horizontal direction 2 - Feedrate The feedrate is the dry run rate (parameter No.1410). The manual feedr...

  • Page 1028

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 998 - 3.10.1 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment Procedure (1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1". (2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,…) for a target ax...

  • Page 1029

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 999 - 3.10.2 Reference Position Return (1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved by turning the feed axis direction signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the reference position establishment procedure is ...

  • Page 1030

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1000 - If a parameter value for the master axis differs from the corresponding parameter value for the slave axis, alarm SV1051, “ILLEGAL SYNCHRONOUS AXIS” is issued. NOTE When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes for which...

  • Page 1031

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1001 - 3.10.5 Axis Control by PMC In PMC axis control, if the reference position return command (axis control command code 05H) is issued for an axis having a distance coded linear scale, reference position return is performed according to the reference...

  • Page 1032

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1002 - (4) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until two, three or four reference marks are detected. If this procedure is started at the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three or four reference marks and the axis does not stop unti...

  • Page 1033

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1003 - This function enables high-speed high-precision detection by using High-resolution serial output circuit. It is available that using maximum stroke 30 meters length. - Connection It is available under linear motor system and full closed system...

  • Page 1034

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1004 - The timing chart for this procedures is given below. FL rate JOG ZRN +J1 Reference mark ZRF1 Feedrate - Procedure for reference position establishment through automatic operation If an automatic reference position return (G28) is specified bef...

  • Page 1035

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 1005 - • To the parameters, which relate to this function (except No.1883, No.1884), the same value must be set for the master axis and for the slave axis. • The linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) should be applied for the mas...

  • Page 1036

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1006 - CAUTION 2 On the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial), the axis does not stop until three reference marks are detected. If this procedure is started at the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three reference mark...

  • Page 1037

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1007 - 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation. This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation: 4.1 MEMORY OPERATION .......................................................

  • Page 1038

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1008 - For the multi-path control, the programs for the multiple paths can be executed simultaneously so the multiple paths can operate independently at the same time. The following procedure is given as an example. For actual operation, refer to the...

  • Page 1039

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1009 - - Program stop (M00) Memory operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The memory operation can be restarted by p...

  • Page 1040

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1010 - For the multi-path control, select the path for which a program is to be created with the path selection switch. Create a separate program for each path. 2 Press the key to select the program screen. The following screen appears: MDI progra...

  • Page 1041

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1011 - When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops. Explanation The previous explanation of how to execute and stop memory operation also applies to MDI operation, except that in MDI operation, M30 does not return contr...

  • Page 1042

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1012 - - Absolute/incremental command When bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1, the absolute/incremental programming of MDI operation does not depend on G90/G91. In this case, the incremental programming is set when bit 5 (ABS) of paramete...

  • Page 1043

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1013 - NOTE DNC operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory. DNC operation Procedure 1 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator's panel to enter the DNC mode. 2 Select the program to be executed. • Selecting a DNC operat...

  • Page 1044

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1014 - 4 During DNC operation, executed programs are listed on the program check screen and program screen. Fig. 4.3 (a) PROGRAM screen Fig. 4.3 (b) PROGRAM CHECK screen NOTE 1 Before selecting a DNC operation file, be sure to release all schedul...

  • Page 1045

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1015 - Limitation - M198 (command for calling a program from within an external input/output unit) In DNC operation, M198 cannot be executed. If M198 is executed, alarm PS0210, “CAN NOT COMMAND M198/M99” is issued. - Custom macro In DNC operat...

  • Page 1046

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1016 - [SCHEDUL ADD] Adds the file at the cursor position as schedule data. [SCHEDUL DEL] Deletes the file at the cursor position from schedule data when the file is registered as schedule data. [SCHEDUL LIST] Lists the settings of schedule data...

  • Page 1047

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1017 - [DELETE] Deletes the file at the cursor position and moves the files below the cursor up one line. [INSERT] Moves the files below the cursor down one line. [ALL DELETE] Deletes all records. 3 Press the cycle start switch to execute the select...

  • Page 1048

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1018 - 4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) During memory operation, you can call and execute a subprogram registered in an external device (such as a Memory Card, Handy File, or Data Server) connected to the CNC. NOTE A program in a USB memory cann...

  • Page 1049

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1019 - Characters that can be used in the file name of an external subprogram and the number of characters in a file name are as described below. • The following characters can be used in a file name: Alphabetical characters (uppercase and lowerca...

  • Page 1050

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1020 - NOTE 2 If an MS-DOS format floppy disk is used with a Handy File, a file name can be specified as follows: - A file name of up to 12 characters, 8 characters + "." + 3characters, can be specified. For an external subprogram call, the...

  • Page 1051

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1021 - NOTE 1 An external subprogram call can be specified during program operation in the MEM/MDI mode. However, in case of using with MDI mode, it is necessary to set the parameter MDE (No.11630#1)=1. 2 An external subprogram call is available for ...

  • Page 1052

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1022 - 4.6 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALLS USING THE DATA SERVER AVAILABLE IN MULTI-PATH SYSTEMS Overview In a multi-path system, external subprogram call commands using the Data Server can be specified simultaneously from multiple paths. ...

  • Page 1053

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1023 - Fig. 4.6 (b) Specifying an external subprogram call in paths 1 and 2 simultaneously Note NOTE 1 This function is enabled only when the Data Server is selected as a foreground input device. Other devices such as a ...

  • Page 1054

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1024 - A handle feed magnifier is selected using the manual handle feed amount selection signal. (See "MANUAL HANDLE FEED".) Programmeddepth of cutZXTool position afterhandle interruptionTool positionduring automaticoperationDepth of cutby ...

  • Page 1055

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1025 - Example Suppose that the maximum allowable cutting feedrate for an axis is 5 m/min, and that a movement is made in the + direction at 2 m/min along the axis. In this case, manual handle interruption can be accepted even when the manual pulse ...

  • Page 1056

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1026 - (G90G54****)(G90G53****)(Machine coordinate system) (Workpiece coordinate system afterinterruption) (Workpiece coordinate system beforeinterruption) Path after interruptionProgrammed path Shift by manual handleinterruption 3 In automatic ref...

  • Page 1057

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1027 - In the following cases, the amount of interruption is canceled: • When a reset is made (when bit 1 (RTH) of parameter No. 7103 is set to 1) • When emergency stop state is canceled (when bit 1 (RTH) of parameter No. 7103 is set to 1) • Wh...

  • Page 1058

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1028 - Signals Relation Interlock Interlock is effective. When interlock is on, no movement is made due to handle interruption. Mirror image Mirror image is not effective. Interrupt functions on the plus direction by plus direction command, even if t...

  • Page 1059

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1029 - The handle interruption move amount is cleared when the manual reference position return ends every axis. - Display for five-axis systems or better Systems having five or more axes provide the same display as the overall position display. N...

  • Page 1060

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1030 - 6. When the tool axis direction, the tool axis right-angle direction, or the tool tip center rotation is not selected for the 3-dimensional manual feed The feedrate superposed along the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode does not exceed...

  • Page 1061

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1031 - 2-3 Press the [SETING] soft key for chapter selection to display the setting screen. Fig. 4.8 (b) Setting screen 2-4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1. 3 Enter an automatic operation mode (ME...

  • Page 1062

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1032 - Procedure for program restart by specifying a sequence number Procedure 1 [P TYPE] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [Q TYPE] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is ...

  • Page 1063

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1033 - Procedure 2 [COMMON TO P TYPE / Q TYPE] 1 Turn the program restart switch on the machine operator's panel ON. 2 Press key to display the desired program. 3 Find the program head. Press key. 4 Enter the sequence number of the block to be rest...

  • Page 1064

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1034 - With 10.4-/15-/19-inch LCD/MDI unit : Up to 30 M codes With 8.4-inch LCD/MDI unit : Up to 6 M codes T : Two most recently specified T codes S : Most recently specified S code B : Most recently specified B code Codes are displayed in the order...

  • Page 1065

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1035 - 5 The block number is searched for, and the program restart screen appears on the LCD display. Fig. 4.9 (b) Program restart screen DESTINATION shows the position at which machining is to restart. DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from the ...

  • Page 1066

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1036 - Outputting the M, S, T, and B codes for program restart After the block to be restarted is searched for, you can perform the following operations: 1 Before the tool is moved to the machining restart position <1> The most recently speci...

  • Page 1067

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1037 - Fig. 4.9 (c) Program restart screen (outputting M, S, T, and B codes) 2 Before the tool reaches the machining restart position, pressing soft key [OVERSTORE] selects the over store mode. In the over store mode, data can be entered in the M, ...

  • Page 1068

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1038 - 3 When values have been entered in the (OVERSTORE) section, pressing the cycle start switch outputs each code in the (OVERSTORE) section. The values in the (OVERSTORE) section are cleared. 4 To clear the values entered in the (OVERSTORE) secti...

  • Page 1069

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1039 - Press the soft key [(OPRT)], then press the continuous menu key. Soft key [SET MV.AX] appears. Fig. 4.9 (f) Program restart screen (movement axis setting) Key in the axis name of the axis to move, and press the soft key [SET MV.AX], and the...

  • Page 1070

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1040 - By pressing the soft key [CLEAR MV.AX], the axis that has been set as described above can be canceled. If the CNC mode is changed, the axis that has been set will be canceled (the axis name no longer flashes). After the completion of the move...

  • Page 1071

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1041 - - Storing / clearing the block number The block number is held in memory while no power is supplied. The number can be cleared by cycle start in the reset state. - Block number when a program is halted or stopped The program screen usually ...

  • Page 1072

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1042 - (Example) C: master axis, A: slave axis O0002 ; N10 C0 A0 ; N20 M133 ; N30 C10. ; N40 C20. ; N50 M136 ; N60 G90 A20. ; N70 G91 A10. ; : Operating a program restart 1. Before starting a program restart, make sure that the flexible synchrono...

  • Page 1073

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1043 - (Example) C: master axis, A: slave axis O0003 ; N10 A90. ; N20 C90. ; N30 C0 A0 ; N40 M133 ; N50 C10. ; N60 C20. ; N70 M136 ; N80 G90 A20. ; N90 G91 A10. ; : If N80 is specified as a restart block, alarm PS5378 is issued. If N90 is specifie...

  • Page 1074

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1044 - NOTE To use the Cs contour controlled axis coordinate establishment function, the reference position return must be performed on the Cs contour controlled axis at least once after the power is turned on. Program restart for 3-dimensional coor...

  • Page 1075

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1045 - - Feed hold If a feed hold operation is performed during the search, the restart steps must be performed again from the beginning. - Manual absolute Every manual operation must be performed with the manual absolute mode turned on regardless...

  • Page 1076

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1046 - Notes (1) If bit 4 (INT) of parameter No. 13117 is 1, the interference check for cutter/tool nose radius compensation during a restart can be disabled. (2) If bit 6 (SQB) of parameter No. 13117 is 1, a restart with a block number can be disabl...

  • Page 1077

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1047 - CAUTION Keep the following in mind when restarting a program including macro variables. - Common variable When the program is restarted, the previous values are inherited as common variables without being preset automatically. Before restart...

  • Page 1078

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1048 - 10. Check whether the distance in "DISTANCE TO GO" is correct and whether the tool does not hit the workpiece or any other object when moving to the machining restart position. If the tool hits anything, move the tool manually to a p...

  • Page 1079

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1049 - NOTE 1 If multiple M codes are specified in a single block or if multiple MSTB codes are specified, it is possible to specify whether to output them to one block at a time or in the same block in the MDI program, by using bit 3 (MCO) of parame...

  • Page 1080

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1050 - - Subprogram call M codes Subprogram call M codes specified with parameters Nos. 6044 to 6046 or Nos. 6071 to 6079 are output to the MDI program. - Macro program call M codes Macro program call M codes specified with parameters Nos. 6047 to...

  • Page 1081

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1051 - - Procedure for specifying the order of movement to the program restart position 1. On the program restart screen, the cursor is displayed at the movement order display position to the left side of axis addresses. Fig. 4.9.1 (a) Program rest...

  • Page 1082

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1052 - • You can select an arbitrary block in restart block information and press soft key [SEARCH EXEC] to restart automatic operation from that block. Fig. 4.10 (a) Program restart setting screen • You can also restart a program after changi...

  • Page 1083

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1053 - When this method is selected, program restart is performed at high speed, though the modal information and position information of the restart block are not restored. Restart operation will be completed in a short time compared with the search...

  • Page 1084

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1054 - Fig. 4.10 (b) Program restart setting screen (restart point list) NOTE The program display shown on the right side of the screen in the figure above can be displayed only for the following cases: (1) Memory operation (2) Memory card program...

  • Page 1085

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1055 - Fig. 4.10 (c) Procedure 3-2 (When a block near the block from which to restart the program is displayed) When a block near the block from which to restart the program is displayed as the restart point, specify the restart block by editing in...

  • Page 1086

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1056 - NOTE There are the following restrictions when two or more items are edited: 1 Among [SEQUENCE NO.], [CURRENT BLOCK COUNT], and [TOTAL BLOCK COUNT], only one item can be edited. Two or more items cannot be edited at a time. If one item is edi...

  • Page 1087

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1057 - Procedure 3-3 (When neither of the blocks is displayed) Use this procedure when the block from which to restart the program is not displayed or if you want to restart another program that is not the interrupted program, from a desired block. F...

  • Page 1088

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1058 - Procedure 4 1. Press soft keys [(OPRT)], [RESTRT TYPE], and [SEARCH] to select the search method as the restart type. “SEARCH” is displayed for [RESTART TYPE] on the screen. Fig. 4.10 (g) NOTE In the initial status after power-on, the se...

  • Page 1089

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1059 - Procedure for restarting a program using the direct jump method Procedure 1 1. When power is turned on or emergency stop is released, perform all necessary operations at that time, including reference position return. 2. Confirm that the prog...

  • Page 1090

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1060 - Procedure 3 1. Select the MEM or DNC mode. 2. On the program restart setting screen, press soft keys [(OPRT)], [RESTRT TYPE], and [JUMP] to select the direct jump method as the restart type. “JUMP” is displayed for [RESTART TYPE] on the sc...

  • Page 1091

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1061 - 4. When a program is restarted with a new restart point specified (“Procedure 3-3” in “Procedure for restarting a program using the search method”), the information on the blocks stored before restart operation is not cleared. After th...

  • Page 1092

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1062 - - Execution macro (macro executor) A program cannot be restarted from a block in an execution macro. - Modal display on the restart block setting screen The modal display on the restart block setting screen indicates the status before the e...

  • Page 1093

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1063 - 3. Specify the tool center point control mode using the MDI unit after the program has been restarted (blinking RSTR disappears). 4. The present absolute coordinate is matched to the absolute coordinates of the restart block. Perform tool leng...

  • Page 1094

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1064 - ・ Other notes WARNING In principle, the tool cannot return to a correct position in the following cases. Special care must be taken in the following cases since none of them cause an alarm. - Manual operation is performed when the manual a...

  • Page 1095

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1065 - *5 : Coordinate values are calculated on the assumption that the block is executed to the end point. Therefore, if the program is restarted from a block without specifying an absolute command at least once following this command, the positione...

  • Page 1096

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1066 - Function name Search methodDirect jump method Remarks 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion A *4 Tilted working plane indexing A *2 See item “Tilted working plane indexing” for details when a direct jump method is selected. See item ...

  • Page 1097

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1067 - Function name Search methodDirect jump method Remarks Dynamic switching of diameter / radius specification A *2 Plane selection A *2 Balanced cutting *4 *4 Programmable data input A A Programmable parameter input A A For the blocks between...

  • Page 1098

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1068 - Function name Search methodDirect jump method Remarks Embedded macro A A Arbitrary angular axis control A A Axis synchronous control NA *4 Can be used when axis synchronous control is always on. Parallel Axis Control A A Synchronous/Composi...

  • Page 1099

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1069 - Example) Operation example O1234; : N100 G91G28Z0.; N110 G28X0.Y0.; N120 T01M6; N130 G90G00X-50.Y0; Approach block for the X- and Y-axes N140 Z-10.; Approach block for the Z-axis N150 G41G01X-50.F1000.D1; N160 Y50.; : When N130 is ...

  • Page 1100

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1070 - 3. Soft keys [SET SUPRES] and [CLEAR SUPRES] appear. 4. To enable suppress motion, press soft key [SET SUPRES]. The number displayed on the left of each address changes to “--“, the values under [DESTINATION] change to the current coordi...

  • Page 1101

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1071 - 5. To disable suppress motion, press soft key [CLEAR SUPRES]. The original numbers and values are displayed again. - Block for which suppress motion is available To perform suppress motion, select a block which satisfies conditions (1) to (...

  • Page 1102

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1072 - Caution CAUTION When suppress motion is used, the tool moves to the end point of the restart block only along the axis specified in the restart block. For this reason, the tool does not move to the end point of the restart block along any ax...

  • Page 1103

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1073 - Fig. 4.10.2 (a) Detailed machining cycle restart information screen NOTE This function is available only for a hole machining cycle. Procedure for quick program restart for a machining cycle Procedure The procedure for quick program restar...

  • Page 1104

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1074 - Fig. 4.10.2 (c) Base screen of MANUAL GUIDE i (2) 3. The CNC restart information list screen appears. Then, press soft key [MACHIN CYCLE]. Fig. 4.10.2 (d) CNC restart information list screen NOTE Pressing soft key [MANUAL GUIDE] return...

  • Page 1105

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1075 - Fig. 4.10.2 (e) CNC detailed machining cycle restart information screen 5. Press soft key [SEARCH EXEC]. The machine takes a dry run to the restart point. At the same time, the program restart screen appears. Fig. 4.10.2 (f) CNC program r...

  • Page 1106

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1076 - Explanation - CNC detailed machining cycle restart information screen When soft key [MACHIN CYCLE] is pressed on the CNC restart information list screen, the following screen appears: Fig. 4.10.2 (g) CNC detailed machining cycle restart inf...

  • Page 1107

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1077 - NOTE 1 The value displayed for T-NO differs depending on the settings of bit 2 of parameter No. 3108 and bit 0 of parameter No. 11320 as listed in the table below. Table 4.10.2 (c) T-NO-related parameters Bit 2 (PCT) of parameter No. 3108 Bit...

  • Page 1108

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1078 - (1) [point I - 1]: The tool returns to the point R level before moving from a hole to another hole. It returns to the point I level at the end of machining. For the first hole position, machining restarts from the block immediately before po...

  • Page 1109

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1079 - (3) [point I - 3]: The tool returns to the point R level before moving from a hole to another hole, including the last operation. For the first hole position, machining restarts from the block immediately before point R (start point of opera...

  • Page 1110

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1080 - 4.11 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can be returned to restart machining efficiently. Procedure for too...

  • Page 1111

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1081 - During retraction, the screen displays PTRR and STRT. • PTRR blinks in the field for indicating states such as the program editing status. • STRT is displayed in the automatic operation status field. • MTN is displayed in the field fo...

  • Page 1112

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1082 - During return operation, the screen displays PTRR and MSTR. • PTRR blinks in the field for indicating states such as program editing status. • MSTR is displayed in the automatic operation status field. • MTN is displayed in the field f...

  • Page 1113

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1083 - N30 Point APoint E - Retraction from the automatic operation hold or stop state When the single block switch is turned on during automatic operation, or the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is turned on after the automatic operation hold or stop state...

  • Page 1114

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1084 - - Single block The single block switch is enabled during return operation. If the single block switch is turned off, continuous return operation is performed. If the single block switch is turned off, the tool stops at each memorized position...

  • Page 1115

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1085 - - Operation procedure 1 Specify a retraction axis and retraction distance in command “G10.6IP- -;”. O1234 G90G0X0Z0 ; S150 M03 ; N10 G91 G00 X-50. ; N20 G10.6 X40.0 ; N30 G33 Z-100. F2.0 ; N40 G00 X50. ; N50 Z100. ; M02; Retraction axis:...

  • Page 1116

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1086 - (2) When the remaining travel distance for threading < retraction distance d ca b ARetraction position Retraction distance When the position where 45-degree chamfering by the retraction distance ends exceeds the threading end position (c)...

  • Page 1117

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1087 - 5 As repositioning, the tool returns to the position specified in the first block that does not specify threading. d c a b Retraction position Point E Repositioning N50 In this example, the repositioning position is point d. Automatic operati...

  • Page 1118

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1088 - 4 During operation 4, 5, or 6, the tool continues the operation and stops at the initial point. When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is turned on during operation 2 to 6, the tool does not move according to the retraction specified in G10.6. After th...

  • Page 1119

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1089 - 4.12 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN Overview If you use feed hold to stop the tool from moving an axis during automatic operation and restarts the tool after manual intervention, for example, for checking a cutting surface, the tool can resume...

  • Page 1120

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1090 - WARNING Manual intervention must be performed correctly with meticulous care, following the machining direction and the shape of the workpiece, not to damage the workpiece, machine, and/or tool. N2N1Point APoint B Return (Non-linear interpola...

  • Page 1121

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1091 - If the return operation is started with the axis under PMC axis control being stopped after having completed the PMC axis control command, however, the return operation is performed by the amount of movement by PMC axis control. When PMC axis ...

  • Page 1122

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1092 - NOTE Under synchronous control, manual intervention and return can be performed for the slave axis only when bit 2 (PKUx) of parameter No. 8162 is 1 and the master axis is parking. 4.13 RETRACE M Overview The tool can retrace the path along...

  • Page 1123

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1093 - Single block stop "REVERSE" switch = ON Cycle start Cycle start (start of forward execution)Start of reverse executionForward Reverse Fig. 4.13 (c) When method 3) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts reverse executio...

  • Page 1124

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1094 - When method 2) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts forward reexecution from the position at which a single block stop takes place. Cycle start (start of forward execution) Start of forward reexecution Forward Reverse Forward ...

  • Page 1125

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1095 - If reverse execution was performed after feed hold stop, forward reexecution ends when the feed hold stop position is reached, then forward execution is performed. Also if single block operation was performed, forward reexecution ends at the s...

  • Page 1126

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1096 - - Reset A reset operation (the RESET key on the MDI unit, the external reset signal, or the reset & rewind signal) clears the blocks stored for reverse execution. - Feedrate A feedrate to be applied during reverse execution can be speci...

  • Page 1127

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1097 - • 3-dimensional circular interpolation (G02.4, G03.4) • NURBS interpolation (G06.2) • Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1,G107) • Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1,G112,G113) • Polar coordinate command (G16) • Functions rel...

  • Page 1128

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1098 - - Single block stop position A block that is internally generated by the control unit is also treated as one block during reverse execution. Path after compensation Programmed path <2>2 345 Fig. 4.13 (m) Path when cutter compensation is...

  • Page 1129

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1099 - Forward Reverse reexecution executionForward execution(Actual path) Skip signal ON (G31) or automatic tool length measurement signal ON (G37) Signal not applied (G31)(Programmed path) Fig. 4.13 (o) - Setup of a coordinate system (G...

  • Page 1130

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1100 - If the feedrate during reverse execution (parameter No. 1414) is not set (= 0), the same feedrate as applied during forward execution is used. - Maximum spindle speed clamp (G92Sxxxx) Clamping at a maximum spindle speed specified during reve...

  • Page 1131

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1101 - Warning WARNING 1 Auxiliary functions are output directly even during reverse execution and forward reexecution. Accordingly, the execution status of an auxiliary function during forward execution may be reversed during reverse execution. Exa...

  • Page 1132

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1102 - Active block cancel function Explanation Operation when operation restarts G90/G91 When the operation is restarted, the operation of the restart is decided depending on the command in the next block of the canceled block. If the next block is...

  • Page 1133

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 1103 - Position where tool halts by signal inputTool path after cutter compensation Specified program N30 Specified program N20 Specified program N40 Fig. 4.14 (b) Tool radius / tool nose radius compensation Canned cycle for drilling When a block i...

  • Page 1134

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1104 - Position where tool halts by signal N10 N50N20 N30N40 Fig. 4.14 (d) Canned cycle for drilling 2 At the restart, the operation is executed from the next N30 block when the operation is canceled while executing in N20 cycle. At this time, bec...

  • Page 1135

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1105 - 5 TEST OPERATION The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as specified by the created program. 5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK.........................................................

  • Page 1136

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1106 - WARNING The positional relationship between the workpiece coordinates and machine coordinates may differ before and after automatic operation using machine lock. In such a case, specify the workpiece coordinate system by using a coordinate settin...

  • Page 1137

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1107 - Limitation - Override range The override that can be specified ranges from 0 to 254%. For individual machines, the range depends on the specifications of the machine tool builder. - Override during thread During the threading process, the overri...

  • Page 1138

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1108 - Explanation - Dwell An override can be applied to dwell. [Example] Override and dwell time when G04 P10000; is executed Table 5.4 (a) Override Dwell time 100% 10.0 sec. 75% 13.3 sec. 50% 20.0 sec. 25% 40.0 sec. NOTE An override is disabled for...

  • Page 1139

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1109 - NOTE 4 For the auxiliary function, when the 1% rapid traverse override signal is 0%, the setting of parameter No. 3018 is used as the override value. When the setting of the parameter is 0, it is assumed to be 10%. While the 1% rapid traverse overr...

  • Page 1140

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1110 - (*2) Clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate Jvmax Maximum value of jog feedrate override 5.6 SINGLE BLOCK Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the single block mode, the tool st...

  • Page 1141

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1111 - - Subprogram call and single block Single block stop is not performed in a block containing M98P_;. M99; or G65. However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99 command, if the block contains an address other than O, N, P...

  • Page 1142

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1112 - The feedrate clamp, override and dry run are not effective. The execution speed of circular interpolation, involute interpolation, spiral/conical interpolation, and NURBS interpolation can be selected by bit 7 (PGF) of parameter No. 1490 from the m...

  • Page 1143

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1113 - 5.8 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE Overview In this function, the program can be executed both forward and backward with a manual handle (manual pulse generator) under automatic operation. Therefore, errors of a program, interference, and so on can be check...

  • Page 1144

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1114 - If the manual handle check signal MCHK is set to "1" at this time, the execution of the program is controlled by a manual handle. The program is executed synchronizing with rotation of a manual handle. When a manual handle check signal M...

  • Page 1145

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1115 - The program is executed backward as soon as a manual handle is turned to the negative direction in executing the program forward. When a manual handle keeps being turned in a negative direction, the program is executed backward and the execution s...

  • Page 1146

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1116 - Lathe system G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G22 G23 G25 G26 G28 G30 G40 G41 G42 G50 G53 G65 G70 G71 G72 G73 G75 G80 G83 G85 G87 G89 G90 G94 G96 G97 G98 G99 (G-code system A) Machining center system G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G22 G23 G25 G26 G28 G30 G40 G41 G42 G4...

  • Page 1147

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1117 - Example) Output of M-codes that are set to groups by parameters in backward movement Setting of parameters: Bit 2 (MC5) of parameter No.6400=1 and bit 3 (MC8) of parameter No.6400=0 (5 M-codes/group and 16 groups) No.6411=100 No.6412=101 No....

  • Page 1148

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1118 - Table 5.8 (b) Backward movement Forward movement Parameter STO=0 Parameter STO=1 O1000; N1G98G00X0Z0; Default T output N2G00X-10.T11; T11 output Default T output N3G00X100.; T11 output N4G00X10.Z20.T22; T22 output T11 output No T code out...

  • Page 1149

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1119 - It becomes the change prohibition state under the following condition. • While the block with the code waiting for FIN is executing • After a block has done and until the next block begins to operate • During thread cutting • Modal G code o...

  • Page 1150

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1120 - Fig. 5.8 (b) "M.H.RTR." status display Besides, when reverse movement prohibition signal MRVSP is set to "1", the "NO RVRS." is displayed. This status is displayed by blinking/reversing in the color of color number 1...

  • Page 1151

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1121 - NOTE When the improvement of direction change movement in auxiliary function output block is enabled, the state of direction change prohibition signal MNCHG is set to "1" and direction change is possible. Therefore please note that the s...

  • Page 1152

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1122 - [Forward movement](1)G53 X0 Z0(3) G0 U50 W50(2) G1 W100.M3 S100 F1.The block of (2) moves with M3 S100 F1.[Backward movement](1)G53 X0 Z0(3) G0 U50. W50.(2)G1 W100.M5 S0 F1.The block of (2) moves with M5 S0 F1. Fig. 5.8 (e) - Non linear interpola...

  • Page 1153

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1123 - - Multiple path simultaneous check in the multi-path system When using the manual handle retrace function at the same time in multiple paths, the timing of block operation may slightly differ between these paths due to the repetition of forward an...

  • Page 1154

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1124 - - Multi Spindle During the backward movement, both TYPE-A and TYPE-B multi spindle control may not be operated exactly. - Path Table Operation In path table operation, the backward movement is prohibited. Furthermore, in forward movement, regar...

  • Page 1155

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1125 - 2 To display the block just before the block being executed at the start of the program Set bit 2 (RPD) of parameter No.11370 to 1. Furthermore, in a display containing look-ahead blocks (bit 1 (APD) of parameter No.11350 to 0), set bit 3 (FPD) of...

  • Page 1156

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1126 - 5.9 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT BLOCK REVERSE MOVEMENT FOR MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE Overview This function enables reverse movement during manual handle retrace even if a move command and an auxiliary function (M/S/T/B code) are specified in the same bl...

  • Page 1157

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1127 - NOTE Even when this function is enabled, the timing of block movement of each path may differ slightly due to the repetition of forward and backward movement and the rotation speed of the manual handle. Therefore, when synchronization is necessary...

  • Page 1158

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1128 - When the above programs are operated in each path, the operation states of individual steps (in forward, backward, and re-forward movement) are shown below. Path1 Path2 Path3 Path4 N1 N2 N3N4N5 N1 N2 N3N4 N1 N2 N...

  • Page 1159

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1129 - However, when bit 4 (HMP) of parameter No. 6400 is 0 (even if a path is prohibited from changing movement direction, the other paths can still change it), if operation is performed in the condition shown in the example below, re-forward movement ma...

  • Page 1160

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1130 - Fig. 5.10 (c) STEP1’: Forward movement is performed to position A in the figure. STEP2’,STEP3’: Backward movement is performed to position D in the figure. Path 3 is prohibited from moving backward at position B. STEP4...

  • Page 1161

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1131 - (2) Backward movement in rigid tapping is the same movement as in the case where bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No. 6403 is 0. - Thread cutting • When the bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification) (1) When the threadin...

  • Page 1162

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1132 - WARNING During the manual handle retrace, if a reset is made when a command by PMC axis control is not completed, the command by the program stops, but the command by PMC axis control continues. In this case, even if bit 1 (HRB) of parameter No. ...

  • Page 1163

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 1133 - WARNING In the threading and polygon machining between two spindles, the spindle operates at a speed of override 100% instead of the speed according to handle operation. Therefore, the workpiece cannot be actually machined. (Example) Treading du...

  • Page 1164

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1134 - 6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stored stroke check are available. This chapter describes emergency stop, ove...

  • Page 1165

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1135 - Explanation - Overtravel during automatic operation When the tool touches a limit switch along an axis during automatic operation, the tool is decelerated and stopped along all axes and an overtravel alarm is displayed. - Overtravel during man...

  • Page 1166

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1136 - • Stored stroke check 3: Inside When the tool moves into the forbidden area, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and stopped. When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse di...

  • Page 1167

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1137 - When setting the area by parameters, points A and B in the Fig. 6.3 (c) must be set. X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2 A(X1, Y1, Z1) B(X2, Y2, Z2) Fig. 6.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters The values X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2,...

  • Page 1168

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1138 - • For lathe system The position of the tool after reference position return Forbitten area boundarybaBA Fig. 6.3 (e) Setting the forbidden area - Forbidden area overlapping Area can be set in piles. Setting the forbidden area overlapping Fig...

  • Page 1169

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1139 - Number Message Description OT0504 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) A movement in the positive direction exceeded stored stroke check 3.OT0505 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) A movement in the negative direction exceeded stored stroke check 3. 6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK B...

  • Page 1170

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1140 - WARNING Example 2) End pointEnd point Start point Immediately upon movement commencing from the start point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check before moving to be performed before movement. The tool is stopped at point a accord...

  • Page 1171

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1141 - - Polar coordinate interpolation mode In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made. - 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion In 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, no check is made. - PMC axis control No check is...

  • Page 1172

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1142 - Note NOTE If the parameters are rewritten so that the current position is included in a forbidden area during axis movement, the axis decelerates and stops, and an alarm is displayed. If an alarm occurs when the tool enters a forbidden area, the...

  • Page 1173

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1143 - 6.6.1.1 Input data range check This function allows an effective data range to be set and checks whether the input data is within the set range. Input data range check Explanation - Outline of the input data range check This function allows an ...

  • Page 1174

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1144 - Table 6.6.1.1 (b) List of messages displayed 2 Range check status Message Color Tool offset number overlap NG SETTING (OFFSET NUM OVERLAP) Red Workpiece coordinate system overlap NG SETTING (WORK COORD VAL OVERLAP) Red Invalid upper and lower lim...

  • Page 1175

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1145 - - Settings In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INCREMENTAL INPUT" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the function, and ot...

  • Page 1176

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1146 - 6.6.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?" when you attempt to delete all data. Confirmation of the deletion of all data Explanation - Outline of the confirmatio...

  • Page 1177

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1147 - 6.6.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed Overview The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when the program is executed. • Display of updated modal information • Start check signal • Axis status ...

  • Page 1178

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1148 - Using this function in combination with the updated modal information display function described in the preceding subsection makes it easier to check the status of the block to be executed. - Settings This function does not require any setting ...

  • Page 1179

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1149 - 6.6.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the cursor placed on a block in the middle of the program. Confirmation of the start from a m...

  • Page 1180

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1150 - NOTE If bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335 for each path is 1, a cursor position check is not performed on the path on which memory operation is in progress. For example, in the case below, if a cycle start is executed on path 1, a cursor positi...

  • Page 1181

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1151 - 6.6.2.6 Maximum incremental value check This function checks the maximum incremental value specified for each axis by the NC command. Maximum incremental value check Explanation - Outline of the maximum incremental value check When the maximum ...

  • Page 1182

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1152 - Displaying and setting the operation confirmation function setting screen Procedure 1 Press the function key. 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD] soft key is displayed. 3 Press the [GU...

  • Page 1183

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1153 - Displayed item Default Corresponding function ALL DATA DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of all data INPUT IN SETTING Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process UPDATE MODAL HIGHLIGHT DISPLAY ○ Display of updated modal...

  • Page 1184

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1154 - 7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key. If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is not performed normally and the input data is rejected. ...

  • Page 1185

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1155 - Table 6.6.3.2 (c) Displayed item What to set FROM RANGE TO Specify a tool offset number range. LOW-LIMIT LENGTH UP-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry length in connection with a specified tool offset number range. LOW-LIMI...

  • Page 1186

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1156 - In the case of this system, all the information needed to set an input data range cannot be displayed in a single screen page. Set the information while switching pages using the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen provides an indication that lets you ...

  • Page 1187

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1157 - Fig. 6.6.3.3 (a) Workpiece origin offset range setting screen 5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, or , , , and keys. 7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press...

  • Page 1188

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1158 - Table 6.6.3.3 (b) Displayed item What to set LOW-LIMIT AXIS NAME UP-LIMIT Specify a valid external workpiece origin offset value range on each axis. 6.6.3.4 Y-axis tool offset range setting screen T In the case of a lathe system, this screen dis...

  • Page 1189

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 1159 - If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is not performed normally and the input data is rejected. • There is a tool offset number overlap. • The upper and lower limit values a...

  • Page 1190

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1160 - 4 If any screen other than the workpiece shift range setting screen is displayed, press the [WORK SHIFT] soft key. The workpiece shift range setting screen is displayed. Fig. 6.6.3.5 (a) Workpiece shift range setting screen 5 Press the soft k...

  • Page 1191

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1161 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classified by error codes and number. Up to 60 previous alarms can be...

  • Page 1192

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1162 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS • All path screen Alarm information for all paths is displayed sequentially from path 1. Fig. 7.1 (b) All path screen - Displaying an alarm screen ALM is sometimes indicated in the bottom part of the screen display witho...

  • Page 1193

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1163 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS If the number of paths is 1, pressing the [ALARM] soft key displays the "DETAIL" screen, but the [ALARM] soft key indication remains unchanged. 4 You can change pages by using the page key. - Releasing alarm The cau...

  • Page 1194

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1164 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.2 (a) Alarm history screen 7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing. Diagnostic displ...

  • Page 1195

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1165 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.3 (a) Diagnostic display

  • Page 1196

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1166 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS 7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN 7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen When alarms are cleared or function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears. To enable this function, set bi...

  • Page 1197

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1167 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS(Example) PROGRAM screen Function key ALARM screen Function key If function key is pressed when the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of an alarm, the screen displayed before the alarm screen ...

  • Page 1198

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1168 - 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS At this time, if a return from the alarm screen to the previous screen is performed in one path, the screen of the path in which a return was performed appears in the other path. (Example) Path 1 Path 2 ...

  • Page 1199

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1169 - 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Information stored in external I/O devices can be read into the CNC, and information can be written into external I/O devices. External I/O devices include memory cards and USB memory that can be mounted to the memory card in...

  • Page 1200

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1170 - The above types of data can be input and output on the screens for displaying and setting those types of data. If NC data such as programs and parameters is to be written to a memory card or USB memory, and if a file with the same name already e...

  • Page 1201

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1171 - 8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD/USB MEMORY Screen display When an attempt is made to output NC data to a memory card, and if the specified file name or the default file name is the same as an existing file name on the memory card or USB m...

  • Page 1202

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1172 - 8 Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten. Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. If wishing to output the file after changing the file name, specify a file name after step 6, and perform step 7 again...

  • Page 1203

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1173 - 8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN This section explains how to input and output data of the following types to and from each operation screen: program, parameter, offset, pitch error compensation, 3-dimensional error compensation, three-dimensiona...

  • Page 1204

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1174 - 8.2.10.12 Outputting spindle waiting position name data ........................................................1214 8.2.10.13 Inputting decimal point position data of customize data ..........................................1215 8.2.10.14 Outpu...

  • Page 1205

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1175 - Table 8.2.1.1 (a) [F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is savedBLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXTProgram name se...

  • Page 1206

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1176 - 8.2.1.2 Outputting a program A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to an external device. Outputting a program (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 2 Press the function...

  • Page 1207

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1177 - 6 Type the program number to output and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. To specify an output file name, type the output file name and press the horizontal soft key [F SET]. If, in this step, no output file name or no program name is speci...

  • Page 1208

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1178 - 8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters 8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When a parameter is loaded which has the sam...

  • Page 1209

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1179 - 8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 9 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 10 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name ...

  • Page 1210

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1180 - Explanation - Suppressing output of parameters set to 0 When bit 1 (PRM) of parameter No. 0010 is set to 1, and soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the parameters in the Table 8.2.2.2 (a) are not output: Table 8.2.2.2 (a) Other than axis type Axis ty...

  • Page 1211

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1181 - 8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data All offset data is output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting offset data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for ...

  • Page 1212

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1182 - Explanation - Output format Output format is as follows: M • Tool compensation memory A % G10 G90 P01 R_ Q_ G10 G90 P02 R_ Q_ ... G10 G90 P_ R_ % Q_ : Virtual tool nose number (TIP). Not output when the virtual tool nose direction is not use...

  • Page 1213

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1183 - • If the cutting point command option is enabled % G10 G90 L10 P01 R_ Q_ G10 G90 L11 P01 R_ G10 G90 L12 P01 R_ G10 G90 L13 P01 R_ G10 G90 L110 P01 R_ G10 G90 L111 P01 R_ G10 G90 L10 P02 R_ Q_ ... G10 G90 L110 P01 R_ G10 G90 L111 P01 R_ % L10 ...

  • Page 1214

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1184 - T The tool compensation amount and tool nose radius compensation amount are output in the following format. % G10 P01 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P02 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ ... G10 P__ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P10001 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ G10 P10002 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ ... G10 P100__ X...

  • Page 1215

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1185 - 8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data 8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data Pitch error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output ...

  • Page 1216

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1186 - 7 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears. Press the vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR]. 8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 9 Press the horizontal ...

  • Page 1217

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1187 - 7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the...

  • Page 1218

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1188 - Example1 (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0) N10001Q0P100; Pitch error compensation data number 1 Pitch error compensation data value 100 Example2 (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1) N10001Q0L1P100; Pitch error comp...

  • Page 1219

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1189 - 5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100 appears. 6 Press the function key . 7 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [3D ERR COMP] appears. Press the soft key [3D ERR COMP]. 8 Press the ...

  • Page 1220

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1190 - 8.2.5.2 Outputting 3-dimensional error compensation data All 3-dimensional error compensation data are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting 3-dimensional error compensation data (for 8.4...

  • Page 1221

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1191 - Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value A2 2nd compensation axis A3 3rd compensation axis P Compensation data (-128 to 127) - Format 3-dimensional error compensation data is output in the following format: N ***** A1 P ****A2P****A3P**...

  • Page 1222

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1192 - % G10 L51 ; N_ P_ R_ ; N_ P_ R_ ; : G11 ; % G10 L51 : 3-dimensional error compensation data input mode G11 : Cancellation of 3-dimensional error compensation data input mode N : Compensation point number (1-15625) P : Compensation axis number (1...

  • Page 1223

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1193 - 12 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the three-dimensional rotary error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel ...

  • Page 1224

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1194 - 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [3D ERR ROT] appears. Press the soft key [3D ERR ROT]. 4 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode or the emergency stop state. 5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 Press the continuous...

  • Page 1225

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1195 - Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value P Compensation data (-128 to 127) - Format Three-dimensional rotary error compensation data is output in the following format: N ***** A1 P ****A2 P **** A3 P****A4P****A5P **** A6 P ****; The 6-d...

  • Page 1226

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1196 - % G10 L53 ; N_ P_ R_ ; N_ P_ R_ ; : G11 ; % G10 L53 : Three-dimensional rotary error compensation data input mode G11 : Cancellation of three-dimensional rotary error compensation data input mode N : Compensation point number (1-7812) P1 : Trans...

  • Page 1227

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1197 - Inputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears. Pres...

  • Page 1228

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1198 - 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears. Press the vertical soft key [MACRO]. 4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 5 Press the horizontal soft key [F O...

  • Page 1229

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1199 - 8.2.8 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data 8.2.8.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data Coordinate system variable data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the...

  • Page 1230

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1200 - 8.2.8.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data All coordinate system variable data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit...

  • Page 1231

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1201 - 8.2.9.1 Outputting operation history data All operation history data is output in the output format form the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting operation history data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the o...

  • Page 1232

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1202 - 4 Press the soft key [SIGNAL SELECT]. 5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 7 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 8 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If ...

  • Page 1233

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1203 - Outputting operation history signal section data (for 15/19-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT HIST...

  • Page 1234

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1204 - Example 1 N01 L01 G00043 Q00100111; As operation history signal selection data number 1, bits 0, 1, 2, and 5 of G0043 of the first PMC are set. Example 2 N02 L00 P00000 Q00000000; For operation history signal selection data number 2, no sign...

  • Page 1235

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1205 - NOTE 1 When using oversize tool support of the tool management function, keep the following in mind. - If a target tool is registered in a cartridge and interferes with other tools in registration or modification of tool geometry data of the too...

  • Page 1236

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1206 - 2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 6 Press the soft key [TOOL]. 7 Type ...

  • Page 1237

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1207 - 2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 6 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE]. 7 Typ...

  • Page 1238

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1208 - 8.2.10.4 Outputting magazine data All magazine data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting magazine data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for ...

  • Page 1239

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1209 - 5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 6 Press the soft key [STATUS]. 7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts r...

  • Page 1240

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1210 - 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 5 Press the EDIT switch on the m...

  • Page 1241

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1211 - 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the name data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the input o...

  • Page 1242

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1212 - Inputting customize data displayed as tool management data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each to...

  • Page 1243

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1213 - 2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool data screen. 3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 6 Press the ...

  • Page 1244

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1214 - 7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “POSNAME.TXT” is assumed. 8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the spindle waiting position name data, and “INPUT”...

  • Page 1245

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1215 - 3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operat...

  • Page 1246

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1216 - 9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the decimal point position data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To ...

  • Page 1247

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1217 - 8.2.10.15 Inputting tool geometry data Tool geometry data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When tool geometry data with a data number corresponding to existing tool ...

  • Page 1248

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1218 - NOTE 1 If the tool with a number of tool geometry data to be changed is registered to the magazine when an attempt is made to change the tool geometry data, an alarm PS5360 is issued. (The data is not input.) 2 After data related to the tool man...

  • Page 1249

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1219 - 8.2.11 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Setting Error Compensation Value 8.2.11.1 Inputting values on the workpiece setting error compensation screen Workpiece setting error compensation value is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an exter...

  • Page 1250

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1220 - 5 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 6 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “WSEC_VAL.TXT” is assumed. 7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading...

  • Page 1251

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1221 - 8.2.11.3 Input/output format of workpiece setting error values Workpiece setting error values are input and output in the following format. % G10L23P0 X_ Y_ Z_ (I_ J_ ) G10L23P1 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ (I_ J_ ) G10L23P2 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ (I_ J_ ) G10L...

  • Page 1252

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1222 - 8.2.12 Inputting and Outputting Tool Life Management Data 8.2.12.1 Inputting tool life management data Tool life management data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device such as a memory card. Inputting tool life management ...

  • Page 1253

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1223 - 8.2.12.2 Outputting tool life management data Tool life management data stored in the memory of the CNC is output to an external device such as a memory card. Outputting tool life management data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Mak...

  • Page 1254

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1224 - 8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN Just by using the ALL IO screen, you can input and output programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error compensation data, macro variables, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history data, and tool...

  • Page 1255

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1225 - Procedure for changing the target folder for inputting and outputting data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) The last folder displayed on the USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen is treated as the default target folder for inputting and outputting data in...

  • Page 1256

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1226 - Procedure for changing the target folder for inputting and outputting data (for 15/19-inch display unit) The last folder displayed on the USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen is treated as the default target folder for inputting and outputting data in a ...

  • Page 1257

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1227 - Configuration of this section Section 8.3, "INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN", consists of the following subsections: 8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program .................................................................................

  • Page 1258

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1228 - 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. ...

  • Page 1259

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1229 - Outputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PROGRAM] appears. Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine...

  • Page 1260

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1230 - Inputting all programs and folders (for 15/19-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PROGRAM] appears. Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 2 Press the EDIT switch ...

  • Page 1261

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1231 - 8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting parameters (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SE...

  • Page 1262

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1232 - 10 Press the function key . 11 Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 12 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 13 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 14 Tu...

  • Page 1263

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1233 - 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the input of the program, press the so...

  • Page 1264

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1234 - 8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data Pitch error compensation data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the function key ...

  • Page 1265

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1235 - 10 Press the function key . 11 Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 12 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 13 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 14 Tu...

  • Page 1266

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1236 - 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the input of the pro...

  • Page 1267

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1237 - 8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data Workpiece coordinates system data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press th...

  • Page 1268

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1238 - Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] appears. Press vertical soft key [WORK]. 2 Press the EDIT switch o...

  • Page 1269

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1239 - 6 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the output,...

  • Page 1270

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1240 - 5 Set the file name to be output. Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the tool managem...

  • Page 1271

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1241 - Outputting magazine data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]....

  • Page 1272

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1242 - 4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. This...

  • Page 1273

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1243 - Inputting name data of customize data (for 15/19-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [CUSTOM] appears. Press the vertical soft key [CUSTOM]. 2 Press the EDIT switch...

  • Page 1274

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1244 - 8.3.10 Inputting and Outputting All Tool Management Data at a Time All data used by the tool management function is classified into the following two types: “all tool data” and “all custom data” and each type of data is input and output ...

  • Page 1275

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1245 - NOTE 7 For a multi-path system, do not input data output for another path. Inputting all tool data at a time (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [ALL TOOL] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine...

  • Page 1276

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1246 - 2 Press the vertical soft key [ALL TOOL]. 3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 4 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 5 Set the file name to be output. 6 Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. ...

  • Page 1277

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1247 - When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. Outputting all custom data at a time (for 15/19-inch display unit) Procedure 1 On the ALL IO screen, press the ver...

  • Page 1278

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1248 - Outputting workpiece setting error compensation value (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) Procedure 1 Press the soft key [WORK SET ER] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3...

  • Page 1279

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1249 - • ASCII code is used for input/output, regardless of the setting parameter (ISO/EIA). • Bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 0100 can be used to specify whether the end of block code (EOB) is output as "LF" only, or as "LF, CR, CR.&qu...

  • Page 1280

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1250 - Fig. 8.4.1 (a) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen NOTE 1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. The two conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file l...

  • Page 1281

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1251 - Fig. 8.4.1 (b) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen NOTE 1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. The two conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file l...

  • Page 1282

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1252 - CURRENT FOLDER The current folder name of the connected host is displayed. If the folder-path is long compared with the display-item, characters: “…” and only the first and last ten letters of the folder name are displayed. FILE LIST Ther...

  • Page 1283

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1253 - 6 Type the program name, and press the soft key [P SET]. For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F SET] and an input program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.1 (a). 7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This...

  • Page 1284

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1254 - 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 5 Type the program name to output, and press the soft ...

  • Page 1285

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1255 - [F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F SET] All programs in the foreground folders displayed in the program folder INPUT INPUT File name set with [F SET] Program in the NC that is set with [...

  • Page 1286

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1256 - - Canceling the hard copy function If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data that has been output is created. - CNC screen display function If CNC screen display function is work...

  • Page 1287

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 1257 - • DNC operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory. • Schedule operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory. • A program in a USB memory device cannot be called using an external subprogram call (M198). ...

  • Page 1288

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1258 - 9 CREATING PROGRAMS This chapter explains how to create programs by MDI of the CNC. This chapter also explains automatic insertion of sequence numbers and how to create programs in TEACH IN mode. Creation/registration Program creation Editin...

  • Page 1289

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1259 - Explanation - Comments in a program Comments can be written in a program using the control in/out codes. Example) O0001 (TEST PROGRAM) ; M08 (COOLANT ON) ; • When the key is pressed after the control-out code "(", comments, and ...

  • Page 1290

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1260 - Fig. 9.2 (a) 10 In the example above, if N12 is not necessary in the next block, pressing the key after N12 is displayed deletes N12. If wishing to insert N100, not N12, into the next block, type N100 immediately after N12 is displayed, and ...

  • Page 1291

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS - 1261 - Fig. 9.3 (a) Program screen in the TEACH IN JOG mode Inputting the coordinates of the current position You can use the following procedure to insert the coordinate of the current position along each axis in the absolute coordinate system: 1 S...

  • Page 1292

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1262 - 4 Enter program number O1234 as follows: O1234 This operation input program number O1234 in memory. Next, press the following keys: An EOB (;) is entered after program number O1234. 5 Enter the P0 machine position for data of the first bloc...

  • Page 1293

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1263 - 10 EDITING PROGRAMS This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion, modification, and deletion of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic insertion of sequence ...

  • Page 1294

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1264 - 6 Move the cursor to the program or folder from which you want to remove the edit disable attribute. 7 Press the soft key [CHANGE ATTR]. 8 Press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE]. 9 Press the soft key [END]. CAUTION 1 After completing editing, set th...

  • Page 1295

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1265 - For each method, refer to III-10.2.1. 5 Perform an operation such as altering, inserting, or deleting a word. Explanation - Concept of word and editing unit A word is an address followed by a number. With a custom macro, the concept of word is...

  • Page 1296

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1266 - 5 The first word of the previous block is searched for when the cursor key is pressed. 6 Holding down the cursor key or moves the cursor to the head of a block continuously. 7 Pressing the page key displays the next page and searches for the...

  • Page 1297

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1267 - 10.2.2 Heading a Program The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is called heading the program pointer. This section describes the four methods for heading the program pointer. Procedure for heading a program Method 1 1...

  • Page 1298

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1268 - 3 Press the key. T15 is inserted. Fig. 10.2.3 (b) 10.2.4 Altering a Word Procedure for altering a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be altered. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the key. Example of changing T15 ...

  • Page 1299

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1269 - Example of deleting X100.0 1 Search for or scan X100.0. X100.0 is searched for/scanned. Fig. 10.2.5 (a) 2 Press the key. X100.0 is deleted. Fig. 10.2.5 (b) 10.3 REPLACING A WORD OR ADDRESS Replace the specified word or address in a prog...

  • Page 1300

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1270 - 7 Press soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓ SEARCH]. The word or address is searched for in the direction of the arrow. 8 Press soft key [REPLCE ALL]. 9 To cancel replace all operation, press soft key [NO]. To execute replace all operation, press sof...

  • Page 1301

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1271 - 10.4 DELETING BLOCKS A block or blocks can be deleted in a program. 10.4.1 Deleting a Block The portion from the current word position to the next EOB is deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB. Procedure for del...

  • Page 1302

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1272 - Example of deleting blocks from N01234 to the EOB of a block which is two blocks ahead 1 Search for or scan N01234. N01234 is searched for/scanned. Fig. 10.4.2 (a) 2 Press . 3 Press the editing key . Blocks from N01234 to the EOB of a b...

  • Page 1303

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1273 - 1 Select MEMORY mode. 2 Set the reset state. • The reset state is the state where the LED for indicating that automatic operation is in progress is off. (Refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.) 3 Set the program number se...

  • Page 1304

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1274 - Procedure for sequence number search Procedure 1 Select MEMORY mode. 2 Press function key . 3 If the program contains a sequence number to be searched for, perform the operations 4 to 7 below. If the program does not contain a sequence number ...

  • Page 1305

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1275 - 10.7 DELETING PROGRAMS Programs registered in memory can be deleted, either one program by one program or all at once. 10.7.1 Deleting One Program A single program in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted. Pro...

  • Page 1306

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1276 - #1 =123 ; N002 /2 X[12/#3] ; N003 X-SQRT[#3/3*[#4+1]] ; N004 X-#2 Z#1 ; N005 #5 =1+2-#10 ; IF[#1NE0] GOTO10 ; WHILE[#2LE5] DO1 ; #[200+#2] =#2*10 ; #2 =#2+1 ; END1 ; - Abbreviations of custom macro word When a custom macro word is al...

  • Page 1307

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1277 - - Search and replacement Operations that cause the cursor to move to the edit-disabled area are disabled. • Top line search: Results in a search of the top line of the edit-enabled block. • Specified-line search (character editing): Made th...

  • Page 1308

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1278 - 4 Disable parameter writing. 5 Press the key to release the alarm state. Unlocking 1 Set the MDI mode. 2 Enable parameter writing (III-12.3.1). At this time, alarm SW0100 is issued on the CNC. 3 In parameter No. 3211 (KEYWD), set the same valu...

  • Page 1309

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1279 - CAUTION 3 In the locked state, programs with the edit/display disable attribute are treated as follows: • The presence of the programs is hidden. This means that these programs are not displayed on screens such as the program folder screen. T...

  • Page 1310

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1280 - - Line A range delimited by an EOB is specified as a line. In character editing, edited data is saved on a line-by-line basis. When one program line contains many characters, it extends over multiple lines on the screen, but these lines are cou...

  • Page 1311

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1281 - 0AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; 10AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; 110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; N110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; - Input modes for editing Input modes for program editing include insert mode and overwrite mode. To switch between the input modes, press soft key [INPU...

  • Page 1312

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1282 - - Editing key Deletes the character immediately before the cursor position. When the cursor is at the beginning of a line, the character at the end of the previous line is deleted. - Editing key Causes a line change. - Page change keys Pa...

  • Page 1313

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1283 - When a search character string is found, the cursor moves to the character string. Pressing soft key [UP] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate. 4 Downward search operation Pressing soft key [DOWN] causes the program ...

  • Page 1314

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1284 - 10.11.6 Reversing Edit Operations (Undo Function) Edit operations performed on a program can be undone sequentially starting with the one performed last. Reversing edit operations (undo function) Procedure 1 Pressing soft key [UNDO] once undoes...

  • Page 1315

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1285 - Paste Procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position at which you want to paste a character string. 2 Press the soft key [PASTE]. 10.11.10 Saving Moving the cursor to a line preceding or succeeding the edited line causes the edit to be automatical...

  • Page 1316

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1286 - 10.12 PROGRAM COPY FUNCTION A program is copied or moved between folders. Procedure for copying a program compact Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER]. The program folder screen in the Fig. 10.12 (a) appe...

  • Page 1317

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1287 - The currently selected program is highlighted. Multiple programs can be selected in the same folder. Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the program currently indicated by the cursor is selected. A selected program can be deselected by pressing [SEL...

  • Page 1318

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1288 - File copying and moving with split display Procedure1 - Procedure for selecting a file first and then a destination folder 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press function key to display the program folder screen. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the co...

  • Page 1319

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1289 - - Copying and moving a file to the same folder It is not possible to copy and move a selected file to the folder that contains the file. If an attempt is made to do so, warning "SAMEFILE NOTCOPY" is issued. If, however, only one file ...

  • Page 1320

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1290 - It is not possible to copy and move to devices other than those above or to a MEM CARD or to move from a MEM CARD. If an attempt is made to copy or move, warning "CAN NOT COPY/MOVE" is issued. - Folder copy and move operations Folder...

  • Page 1321

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1291 - NOTE 1 For security, the values set for PASSWORD and KEY are not displayed. For the same reason, PASSWORD, MINIMUM, and MAXIMUM can be specified only when no password is set or the program memory is unlocked. Set a password, taking great care to...

  • Page 1322

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1292 - Locked/unlocked Results Password not set The program is output in a normal way. Inputting an un-encrypted program Locked/unlocked Results Locked When the program to be input is outside the security range, it is input normally. When the progr...

  • Page 1323

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1293 - - Editing and deleting programs When the program memory is locked, the programs within the security range cannot be edited or deleted. When the program memory is locked, an attempt to delete all programs results in only those programs outside t...

  • Page 1324

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1294 - Fig. 10.14 (a) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 10.14 (b) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (15-inch display unit) - Modes When the paths to be displayed simultaneously are in...

  • Page 1325

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1295 - Fig. 10.14 (c) Screen on which both MEM and EDIT modes are selected - Switching the path subject to editing The path selected with the path selection signal is subject to editing. - Maximum number of paths that can be subject to editing sim...

  • Page 1326

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1296 - 10.15 MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION 10.15.1 Overview When the program of the path to be edited is scrolled in the simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen, other path programs that are displayed on the same screen can be scrolled simulta...

  • Page 1327

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1297 - NOTE 1 The single scroll mode is selected when the power is turn on. 2 If the above conditions are not satisfied, the scroll mode is automatically switched to single scroll mode. Procedure for switching to the simultaneous scroll mode The proce...

  • Page 1328

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1298 - If the cursor movement keys are pressed to move the cursor to the previous and next blocks, the cursors for the paths not to be edited also move. Those programs for paths that are not displayed on the screen do not scroll simultaneously. Page...

  • Page 1329

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 1299 - Fig. 10.15.2 (c) Scroll waiting caused by pressing a page change key Completion of scroll waiting When the cursors move to the same waiting M-code in all programs subject to waiting, scroll waiting is completed, so that scrolling can be contin...

  • Page 1330

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1300 - Fig. 10.15.2 (e) Display of the confirmation message for the release of the scroll waiting state Waiting M-code search By doing a waiting M-code search, it is possible to simultaneously move the cursors to the blocks that contain specified wai...

  • Page 1331

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1301 - 11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Program management functions are classified into the following two types: • Functions for folders • Functions for programs Functions for folders include creation, deletion, change of names and attributes, and so on. ...

  • Page 1332

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1302 - 11.1 SELECTING A DEVICE When the fast data server function (option) is provided, a program storage device can be selected. This section explains the selection procedure. Procedure for selecting a device 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the ...

  • Page 1333

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1303 - NOTE 1 A FAT16-formatted memory card containing the program storage file FANUCPRG.BIN is recognized as a program storage memory card. 2 For a program storage memory card containing more than 63 folders and programs, the option for extending th...

  • Page 1334

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1304 - - Sub program (call using M98/G72.1/G72.2) - Macro program (call using G65/G66/G66.1/M96) The following subprogram/macro program held in the same folder as containing the main program is called: • Sub program call (M98) • Macro call (Sim...

  • Page 1335

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1305 - • ALL I/O screen Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output data to and from a memory card • PMC data I/O screen Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output to and from a memory card • Program directory scr...

  • Page 1336

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1306 - Item Usable Deletion of a folder Unusable Selecting a default folder Usable Renaming of a file Unusable Deletion of a file Unusable Changing the attribute of a file Unusable Selecting a main program Usable Input/output of program Unusable NOT...

  • Page 1337

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1307 - Item Usable Changing the attribute of a folder Unusable Deletion of a folder Unusable Selecting a default folder Unusable Renaming of a file Unusable Deletion of a file Usable Changing the attribute of a file Unusable Selecting a main program ...

  • Page 1338

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1308 - Table 11.1.3 (a) Item Usable Creation of a program Unusable Edition prohibition attribute Unusable Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Unusable Deletion of a block Unusable Program search Usable Sequence number search Unusable Deletion...

  • Page 1339

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1309 - NOTE 3 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a folder cannot sometimes be created. 11.3 RENAMING A FOLDER This section explains the procedure for renaming a folder. Procedure for renaming a folder 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Pre...

  • Page 1340

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1310 - Procedure for changing current folder in folder tree display. In folder tree display, current folder is changed by moving cursor on the tree. Changing to the upper folder 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 3 Press the s...

  • Page 1341

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1311 - Fig.11.4 (c) 11.5 CHANGING FOLDER ATTRIBUTES This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a folder (edit disable or edit/display disable). Procedure for changing folder attributes 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the funct...

  • Page 1342

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1312 - 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Select the folder that you want to delete. To select a folder, use the cursor keys and . 5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 Press the soft key [DELETE]. • To perform the deletion, p...

  • Page 1343

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1313 - 11.8 RENAMING A FILE This section explains the procedure for renaming a file. Procedure for renaming a file 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want t...

  • Page 1344

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1314 - • To cancel the deletion, press the soft key [CANCEL]. NOTE Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot sometimes be deleted. 11.10 CHANGING FILE ATTRIBUTES This section explains the procedure for changing the a...

  • Page 1345

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1315 - 11.11 SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM This section explains the procedure for selecting a main program. Procedure for selecting a main program 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 4 Move to the folder contain...

  • Page 1346

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1316 - Fig.11.12 (a) Program folder screen 3. Display the folder from which you want to copy or move the program or the folder. Move the cursor to the folder on the screen and press the key to move to the folder. Move the cursor to “RETURN TO ...

  • Page 1347

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1317 - 10. Press the soft key [PASTE]. Selection by each program or folder 1. Press the function key . 2. Press the chapter selection soft key [FOLDER]. 3. Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4. Press the continuous menu key until the soft key [COPY] app...

  • Page 1348

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1318 - 11.12.1 Copy and movement between different devices Overview It is enable to copy and move the files between different devices. The files can be copied/moved in a same way. Restrictions About file operation restrictions on each device A copy ...

  • Page 1349

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1319 - • The numeric parts are 8 digits or more : The file name is changed to eight numerical value digits except first 'O'. Example) O12345678 → 12345678 • The numeric parts are less than 8 digits : One digit is deleted '0' and program...

  • Page 1350

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1320 - Fig. 11.13 (a) Folder that can be used by each setting 2) 1)/ SYSTEM/ MTB1/ MTB2/ USER/ PATH1/ CYLINDER/ PISTON/ PATH2/ GEAR1/ GEAR2/ //CNC_MEM LIBRARY/ User created folder

  • Page 1351

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1321 - 11.13.1 Program Management under the Path Folder If parameter FPF (No.11302#6) is set to “1”, the operation on the program folder screen becomes as follows. At this time, it is necessary to set parameter CFP (No.11304#7) to “0”. Table...

  • Page 1352

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1322 - 11.13.2 Program Management only in the Path Folder If parameter CFP (No.11304#7) is set to 1, the operation on the program folder screen becomes as follows. At this time, the setting of parameter FPF (No.11302#6) is invalid. Table 11.13.2 (a)...

  • Page 1353

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1323 - Fig. 11.13.2 (b) Program folder screen (parameter CFP(No.11304#7)=1) Display of device name and current folder The current folder name is not displayed though the device name is displayed so far. (Refer to “2)” in Fig. 11.13.2 (a) and F...

  • Page 1354

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1324 - 11.13.3 Folder for Subprogram/Macro Calls In the following subprogram call/macro call, the folder /USER/LIBRARY, /MTB12, /MTB2 and /SYSTEM are searched before the folder where there is the main program are searched. There is a possibility bein...

  • Page 1355

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 1325 - “PROGRAM HAS BEEN VERIFIED” is displayed. If they are different, the alarm (PS0079) “PROGRAM NOT MATCH” is issued NOTE If 8LV data protection function is valid, this function cannot be used. Explanation When one program is register...

  • Page 1356

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1326 - 12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI unit for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation. This chapter describes how to di...

  • Page 1357

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1327 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Position display inthe workpiece coordinate system ⇒ See III-12.1.1Position display inthe...

  • Page 1358

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1328 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15/19-inch display unit) Page 1 (1) ALL ⇒Overall position display ⇒ See III-12.1.10 Actual feedrate display ⇒ See III-12.1.12 Display of run time and parts count ...

  • Page 1359

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1329 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) PROGRAM FOLDERNEXT CHECK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Editing programs⇒ See III-10 Current block display screen ⇒ See III-12.2.5Prog...

  • Page 1360

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1330 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15/19-inch display unit) Page 1 (1) PROGRM⇒Editing Programs ⇒ See III-10 (2) FOLDER Program folder screen ⇒ See III-12.2.13 (3) CHECK ⇒Program check...

  • Page 1361

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1331 - Page 2 (8) ROBOT SELECT ⇒Robot connection function ⇒ See Robot and Machine Tool Integration Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)

  • Page 1362

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1332 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) OFFSETSETTIN G WORK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Setting and displaying the tool offset value ⇒ See III-2.1.1*1Displaying and enteri...

  • Page 1363

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1333 - PR-LV EXTENDOFFSET (OPRT) Page 4 +(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) MACHINLEVEL QUALTYSELECTor or Precision level selection⇒ See III-12.3.12Setting the 4th/5th axis offset ⇒ See III-2.1.8*1 Machining level selection⇒ See ...

  • Page 1364

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1334 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15/19-inch display unit) Page 1 Page 2 (1) OFFSET ⇒ Setting and displaying the tool offset value ⇒ See III-2.1.1 *1 (8) 2ND GEOM ⇒ Setting tool compensation/second ...

  • Page 1365

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1335 - Page 3 (15) PRECI LEVEL MACHINLEVEL QUALTYSELECT⇒Precision level selection ⇒ See III-12.3.29 Machining level selection ⇒ See III-12.3.30 Machining quality level selection ⇒ See III-12.3.31 (16) TOOL LIFE ...

  • Page 1366

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1336 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) PARAMETER DIAGNO SIS SERVO GUIDE SYSTEM (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Displaying and setting parameters ⇒ See III-12.4.1Checking by sel...

  • Page 1367

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1337 - COLORPERIODMAINTEMAINTE INFO WAVE DIAG (OPRT) Page 5 +(21) (22) (23) (24) (25) Color setting screen ⇒ See III-12.4.9 FSSB PARAM TUNING P.MATE MGR. (OPRT) Page 6 +(26) (27) (28) (29) (30) FSSB data display and se...

  • Page 1368

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1338 - PROFI SLAVE DEVNETMASTERFL-net 1CH DEVNET SLAVE (OPRT) Page 9 +(41) (42) (43) (44) (45) PROFIBUS -DP Slave function ⇒ See PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL DeviceNet Master function ⇒ See DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUA...

  • Page 1369

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1339 - USB FL-net 2CH (OPRT) Page 13 +(61) (62) (63) (64) (65) USB function ⇒ See MAINTENANCE MANUAL FL-net function ⇒ See FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL NOTE For information about a dedicated screen for each path contr...

  • Page 1370

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1340 - Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15/19-inch display unit) Page 1 Page 2 (1) PARAME TER ⇒ Displaying and setting parameters⇒ See III-12.4.13 (8) PMC MAINTE (2) DIAGNO SIS ⇒ Checking b...

  • Page 1371

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1341 - Page 3 Page 4 (15) FSSB ⇒ FSSB data display and setting screen ⇒ See Maintenance Manual (22) M CODE GROUP ⇒ M code grouping function ⇒ See II-11.3 (16) MCHN TUNING ⇒ Mac...

  • Page 1372

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1342 - Page 5 Page 6 (29) P.MATE MGR. (36) (30) SYSTEM (37) DEVNET MASTER ⇒DeviceNet Master function ⇒ See DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL (31) REMOTE DIAG ⇒ Machine R...

  • Page 1373

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1343 - NOTE For information about a dedicated screen for each path control type in the lathe system/machining center system, refer to the manuals: *1: OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T series) (B-64484EN-1) *2...

  • Page 1374

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1344 - 12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.1, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: ------ Screens of a 8.4/10.4-inch display unit ------ 12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpie...

  • Page 1375

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1345 - Display procedure for the current position screen in the workpiece coordinate Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE]. 3 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed. Fig. 12.1.1...

  • Page 1376

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1346 - T Bit 1 (DAP) parameter No. 3129 and bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radius compensation. 12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate Syste...

  • Page 1377

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1347 - Fig. 12.1.2 (b) Current position (relative) screen (T series) (10.4-inch display unit) See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates. Explanation - Setting the relative coordinates The current position of the tool ...

  • Page 1378

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1348 - 5 Input the axis name of the resetting axis. The axis name blinks. 6 Press soft key [EXEC]. The relative coordinate is reset to 0. Presetting relative coordinates Procedure 1 Press function key. 2 Press chapter selection key [RELATIV...

  • Page 1379

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1349 - If parameter bit PPD is set to 0, by setting bit 5 (PWR) of parameter No. 11277 to 1, it is possible to preset the relative coordinates at power-on in the machine coordinate system. 12.1.3 Overall Position Display Displays the follo...

  • Page 1380

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1350 - Fig. 12.1.3 (b) Current position (overall) screen (T series) (10.4-inch display unit) Explanation - Coordinate display The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time: • Curren...

  • Page 1381

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1351 - 3 Press soft key [ALL] or [RELATIVE]. 4 Enter the axis name (, , ...) and zero ( ). (Fig. 12.1.4 (a)) 5 Press soft key [PRESET]. Fig. 12.1.4 (a) Overall screen Explanation - Operation mode This function can be executed when the ...

  • Page 1382

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1352 - Fig. 12.1.5 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (M series) (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 12.1.5 (b) Current position (absolute) screen (T series) (10.4-inch display unit) The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/...

  • Page 1383

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1353 - - Actual feedrate display of rotary axis In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis move...

  • Page 1384

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1354 - Fig. 12.1.6 (b) Current position (relative) screen (T series) (10.4-inch display unit) The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME) are displayed under the current position. Explanatio...

  • Page 1385

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1355 - 12.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference Position To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the floating reference position must be set beforehand. Procedure for setting the floating reference position Procedur...

  • Page 1386

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1356 - Fig. 12.1.8 (a) Operating monitor (M series) (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 12.1.8 (b) Operating monitor (T series) (10.4-inch display unit) Explanation - Display of the servo axes Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum num...

  • Page 1387

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1357 - The bar graph for the speedometer shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed (100%). - Load meter The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter No. 2086 and spindle parameter No. 4127. - ...

  • Page 1388

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1358 - Fig. 12.1.9 (a) 3-dimensional manual feed screen(10.4-inch display unit) Explanation - Tool tip position The addresses of the three basic machine configuration axes for performing 3-dimensional manual feed and the current position ...

  • Page 1389

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1359 - - Table reference (number of pulses) VR The amount of travel in the table reference vertical direction in table reference vertical direction handle feed, table reference vertical direction jog feed, or table reference vertical direc...

  • Page 1390

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1360 - 3 Press soft key [ERASE] to clear the amount of travel of the specified function. Press soft key [CAN] to cancel erase operation. Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit Press function key to display the current overall position dis...

  • Page 1391

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1361 - Fig. 12.1.10 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch display unit) Explanation - Coordinate display The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time: • Current position ...

  • Page 1392

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1362 - When a specified axis is reset to 0 1 Press function key. 2 Press horizontal soft key [ORIGIN]. 3 Input the axis name of the resetting axis. The axis name blinks. 4 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC]. The relative coordinate is reset...

  • Page 1393

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1363 - - Presetting by setting a coordinate system M Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system dur...

  • Page 1394

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1364 - Fig. 12.1.12 (a) Current position screen (M series) (15-inch display unit) Fig. 12.1.12 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch display unit) The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (dependi...

  • Page 1395

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1365 - - Actual feedrate display of feed per revolution In the case of feed per revolution and thread cutting, the actual feedrate displayed is the feed per minute rather than feed per revolution. - Actual feedrate display of rotary axis ...

  • Page 1396

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1366 - Fig. 12.1.13 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch display unit) The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME) are displayed under the current position. Explanation - PART CO...

  • Page 1397

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1367 - 12.1.14 Setting the Floating Reference Position (15/19-inch Display Unit) To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the floating reference position must be set beforehand. Procedure for setting the floating ...

  • Page 1398

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1368 - Fig. 12.1.15 (a) Operating monitor (M series) (15-inch display unit) Fig. 12.1.15 (b) Operating monitor (T series) (15-inch display unit) Explanation - Display of the servo axes Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum numbe...

  • Page 1399

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1369 - The bar graph for the speedometer shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed (100%). - Load meter The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter No. 2086 and spindle parameter No. 4127. - ...

  • Page 1400

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1370 - Fig. 12.1.16 (a) 3-dimensional manual feed screen(15-inch display unit) Explanation - Tool tip position The addresses of the three basic machine configuration axes for performing 3-dimensional manual feed and the current position o...

  • Page 1401

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1371 - - Table reference (number of pulses) VR The amount of travel in the table reference vertical direction in table reference vertical direction handle feed, table reference vertical direction jog feed, or table reference vertical dire...

  • Page 1402

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1372 - 12.2 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.2, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: ――――― Screens of a 8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.2.1 Program Contents Display........

  • Page 1403

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1373 - Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (10.4-inch display unit) 12.2.1.1 Displaying the executed block Overview When the program being executed is displayed, one executed block can be displayed. This funct...

  • Page 1404

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1374 - Fig. 12.2.1.1 (b) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MDI mode) Fig. 12.2.1.1 (c) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MEM mode) Explanation - Program look-ahead When an automatic operation cycle starts...

  • Page 1405

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1375 - 12.2.1.2 Text display Overview Setting bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350 can select whether to display the contents of the running NC program in the look-ahead or text mode. In the look-ahead mode (APD = 0): Displays look-ahead bloc...

  • Page 1406

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1376 - External subprogram call Setting bit 7 (DPD) of parameter No. 11356 can select whether to display the contents of the running external subprogram by DNC operation or M198 in the look-ahead or text mode. However, text mode is effective...

  • Page 1407

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1377 - Fig. 12.2.2 (b) Program character editing screen (10.4-inch display unit) Switching between program editing modes You can switch between word editing and character editing with soft keys. Procedure 1 Press function key to display ...

  • Page 1408

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1378 - Fig. 12.2.3 (a) MDI operation program screen (10.4-inch display unit) When bit 7 (MDL) of parameter No. 3107 is 1, modal information is displayed in 8.4-inch display unit. Fig. 12.2.3 (b) Program character editing screen (8.4-inch...

  • Page 1409

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1379 - Fig. 12.2.4 (a) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit) 12.2.4.1 Split display on the program folder screen Overview On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information views,...

  • Page 1410

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1380 - Procedure <1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server. <2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy. <3> Select the file. <4> Copy the file. Procedure for swit...

  • Page 1411

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1381 - Fig. 12.2.4.1 (b) Program folder screen (normal screen)(10.4-inch display unit) 4 Press soft key [MULTI LIST]. The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same folder information. ...

  • Page 1412

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1382 - Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split display On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described below. In the active folder view for...

  • Page 1413

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1383 - Fig. 12.2.4.1 (d) Program folder screen (normal screen)(10.4-inch display unit) You should see the device information on the normal screen. Limitation - Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split displ...

  • Page 1414

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1384 - Fig.12.2.4.2 (a) Program folder tree display Procedure for displaying folder tree 1. Press function key . 2. Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER]. 3. Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4. Press the soft key [TREE LIST]. 5. The fold...

  • Page 1415

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1385 - Fig.12.2.4.2 (d) Limitation The folder tree is not supported on 7.2/8.4-inch display units. 12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed next. Procedure for displaying...

  • Page 1416

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1386 - 12.2.6 Program Check Screen Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data. Procedure for displaying the program check screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection sof...

  • Page 1417

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1387 - Function - Background editing A program other than the currently selected program can be edited. Background editing can be performed in any mode. - EDIT mode and reference mode When background editing is started in the EDIT mode, ...

  • Page 1418

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1388 - Fig. 12.2.7 (a) Background editing screen (word editing) (10.4-inch display unit) - Character editing Fig. 12.2.7 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and left programs). Similarly...

  • Page 1419

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1389 - Editing status Displayed items Program opened program-name + (BG-EDIT) Read-only program opened program-name + (BG:READ ONLY) The contents of the program are displayed in green. Starting background editing from the editing screen Pro...

  • Page 1420

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1390 - 2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG EDIT]. 4 Enter a program name. 5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] to start background editing in t...

  • Page 1421

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1391 - NOTE When background editing is started from the program folder screen, the EDIT mode is set. For the following programs, the reference mode is set, however: - Running program - Main program - Program with the edit disable attribute...

  • Page 1422

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1392 - 12.2.8 Stamping the Machining Time The execution times of the most recently executed ten programs can be displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds. The calculated machining time can be inserted as a comment of the program to check the ...

  • Page 1423

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1393 - Fig. 12.2.8 (b) Stamping the machining time (10.4-inch display unit) Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen Procedure You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The proce...

  • Page 1424

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1394 - Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display the operation soft keys. Then, press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [INSERT TIME]. Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. The beginning of the program is displayed and the machini...

  • Page 1425

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1395 - Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.8 (d) Program screen (10.4-inch display unit) Display on the program folder screen The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing commen...

  • Page 1426

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1396 - Fig. 12.2.8 (e) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit) Explanation - Machining time The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the next reset. If a reset is not perfor...

  • Page 1427

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1397 - - Correcting the machining time If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may...

  • Page 1428

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1398 - 2 When two or more machining times are stamped The first machining time is displayed. Fig. 12.2.8 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (10.4-inch display unit) 3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not ...

  • Page 1429

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1399 - Fig. 12.2.8 (h) When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) (10.4-inch display unit) 12.2.9 Sc...

  • Page 1430

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1400 - Creation of a new block The following describes the procedure for creating a tilted working plane indexing block on guidance screens and for inserting the block to a program being edited on a program editing screen. 1 On a program ed...

  • Page 1431

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1401 - 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press soft key [GUIDANCE]. The command type selection screen is displayed. 5 Select a command type with any of the cursor keys, and then press soft ke...

  • Page 1432

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1402 - 8 Press soft key [YES]. This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the new block is inserted after the block at the cursor position. Modification to an existing block The following describes the procedure for replaci...

  • Page 1433

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1403 - 4 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press soft key [GUIDANCE TWP]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. 5 Enter command data for setting items to be modified. 6 Press soft key [ALTER]. 7 Pr...

  • Page 1434

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1404 - Guidance screen cancellation Pressing soft key [CANCEL] on a guidance screen takes you back to the program editing screen. At this time, the data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded. NOTE 1 In addition to the above ...

  • Page 1435

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1405 - The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed, which shows the data for the tilted working plane indexing in the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen. When a block of a tool axis direction control ...

  • Page 1436

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1406 - 2 When soft key [SELECT] is pressed, the command type at the cursor position is accepted, and the tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. NOTE If the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears when the command ty...

  • Page 1437

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1407 - NOTE 1 For existing block modification, if the guidance screen is displayed when the cursor is placed in the middle of multiple blocks for a command, the parameters for the block(s) before the cursor are not reflected in the setting a...

  • Page 1438

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1408 - Insertion of a block If the guidance screen is displayed when the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen does not include a tilted working plane indexing, soft key [INSERT] is displayed on the tilted working plane ...

  • Page 1439

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1409 - Limitation The following lists the warnings that may be issued at the time of block insertion or replacement. If a warning is displayed, return to the program editing screen with soft key [CANCEL] and press soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] aga...

  • Page 1440

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1410 - G68.2 / G68.4(Euler’s angle) Fig. 12.2.9.3 (a) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Euler’s angle(10.4-inch display unit) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate sy...

  • Page 1441

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1411 - G68.2 / G68.4(Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle) Fig. 12.2.9.3 (b) Tilted working plane data setting screen- Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle(10.4-inch display unit) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece co...

  • Page 1442

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1412 - • Rotation Angle about Z-axis Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). G68.2 / G68.4(3 points spe...

  • Page 1443

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1413 - • Shift of the Origin Specify, in a feature coordinate system, an amount of shift from the feature coordinate system origin specified for the 1st point (point P1). • Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate Specify an an...

  • Page 1444

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1414 - • Origin of Feature Coordinate Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the inc...

  • Page 1445

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1415 - K : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. G68.3(Tool Axis Direction) Fig. 12.2.9.3 (f) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(10.4-inch display unit) (When "No"...

  • Page 1446

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1416 - • Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-ax...

  • Page 1447

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1417 - Fig. 12.2.10 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (15-inch display unit) 12.2.10.1 Displaying the executed block For an explanation of how to display the executed block, see Subsection 12.2.1.1, "Displaying the ...

  • Page 1448

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1418 - Fig. 12.2.11 (a) Program word editing screen (15-inch display unit) - Character editing Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as with a general text editor. Text is input di...

  • Page 1449

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1419 - 4 Pressing horizontal soft key [CHANGE EDITOR] switches the editing mode between word editing and character editing. 12.2.12 Program Screen for MDI Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit) During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operati...

  • Page 1450

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1420 - Fig. 12.2.13 (a) Program folder screen (15-inch display unit) 12.2.13.1 Split display on the program folder screen Overview On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information views,...

  • Page 1451

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1421 - Example of copying a file from the CNC_MEM to the Data Server <3><4><2><1> Procedure <1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server. <2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a...

  • Page 1452

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1422 - Fig. 12.2.13.1 (b) Program folder screen normal screen)(15-inch display unit) 4 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST]. The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same folder info...

  • Page 1453

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1423 - Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split display On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described below. In the active folder view for...

  • Page 1454

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1424 - Fig. 12.2.13.1 (d) Program folder screen (normal screen)(15-inch display unit) You should see the device information on the normal screen. Limitation - Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split displa...

  • Page 1455

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1425 - 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT]. The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block currently being executed and the next block are displayed. Fig. 12.2.14 (a) Next block display screen (15-inch display unit) 12.2.15 P...

  • Page 1456

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1426 - Fig. 12.2.15 (a) Program check screen (15-inch display unit) Explanation - Program display The program currently being executed is displayed. The block being executed is displayed in reverse video. - Current position display The ...

  • Page 1457

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1427 - - Program selected in the foreground If the program selected in the foreground is specified as a program to be edited in the background, background editing is started in the read-only mode. The text at an arbitrary position of the p...

  • Page 1458

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1428 - Fig. 12.2.16 (a) Background editing screen (word editing) (15-inch display unit) - Character editing Fig. 12.2.16 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and left programs). Similarly...

  • Page 1459

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1429 - Editing status Displayed items Program opened program-name + (BG-EDIT) Read-only program opened program-name + (BG:READ ONLY) The contents of the program are displayed in green. Starting background editing from the editing screen Pro...

  • Page 1460

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1430 - 2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 3 Press soft key [BG EDIT]. 4 Enter a program name. 5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] to start background editing in the reference mode. NOT...

  • Page 1461

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1431 - NOTE When background editing is started from the program folder screen, the EDIT mode is set. For the following programs, the reference mode is set, however: - Running program - Main program - Program with the edit disable attribute...

  • Page 1462

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1432 - Procedure for stamping the machining time Procedure - Displaying the machining time 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [TIME]. The machining time display screen appears. Fig. 12.2.17 (a) Machining time display screen ...

  • Page 1463

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1433 - Fig. 12.2.17 (b) Stamping the machining time (15-inch display unit) Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen Procedure You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The proced...

  • Page 1464

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1434 - 3 For example, the machining time of O0100 is displayed on the machining time display screen. Press continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] appears. When horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] is pressed, the start of ...

  • Page 1465

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1435 - Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. Fig. 12.2.17 (d) Program screen (15-inch display unit) Display on the program folder screen The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing comment...

  • Page 1466

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1436 - Fig. 12.2.17 (e) Program folder screen (15-inch display unit) Explanation - Machining time The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the next reset. If a reset is not perform...

  • Page 1467

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1437 - - Correcting the machining time If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may...

  • Page 1468

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1438 - 2 When two or more machining times are stamped The first machining time is displayed. Fig. 12.2.17 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (15-inch display unit)

  • Page 1469

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1439 - 3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) The machining time display field is left blank. ...

  • Page 1470

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1440 - The created block is reflected as a new insertion to a program being edited or as a modification to an existing block. This function can be enabled by setting bit 1 (GGD) of parameter No. 11304 to 1. Creation of a new block The follo...

  • Page 1471

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1441 - 2 Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a position where you want to insert a block. Note that a block created on the guidance screens is inserted after the block at the cursor position. (If the block at the cursor posit...

  • Page 1472

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1442 - 7 Press horizontal soft key [YES]. This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the new block is inserted after the block at the cursor position. Modification to an existing block The following describes the procedure...

  • Page 1473

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1443 - 3 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed. 4 Enter command data for setting items to be modified. 5 Press horizontal soft...

  • Page 1474

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1444 - NOTE 1 In addition to the above operation, the following operations also cancel a guidance screen. The data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded. • When bit 7 (CPG) of parameter No. 11302 is 1 (setting for automatic...

  • Page 1475

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1445 - NOTE If the CNC is in the reset state or emergency stop state when horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed on the foreground editing screen or MDI editing screen, the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears, and the op...

  • Page 1476

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1446 - NOTE If the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears when the command type selection screen is displayed, the operation cannot be continued. (Horizontal soft keys other than [CANCEL] are not displayed.) Press horizontal soft k...

  • Page 1477

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1447 - Command data input • Item for which to enter a value Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set. Enter a value, and then press the key or horizontal soft key [INPUT]. Example) When the origin of a fea...

  • Page 1478

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1448 - ↓Example) G00 X0.; When the guidance screen is displayed and the 3-point specification is selected as a command type for block insertion, a created block is inserted after the block at the cursor position. G00 X0.; G68.2 P2 Q0... G6...

  • Page 1479

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1449 - Warning Description “WRITE PROTECT” • A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the editing or display was prohibited for a program to be edited. • A block insertion or replacement operation was performed w...

  • Page 1480

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1450 - • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set. Incremental: It is assumed that values of specified data are...

  • Page 1481

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1451 - • Order of Rotation Select an order in which the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are rotated in a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). The selectable r...

  • Page 1482

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1452 - Fig. 12.2.18.3 (c) Tilted working plane data setting screen- 3 points specification(15-inch display unit) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of whet...

  • Page 1483

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1453 - G68.2 / G68.4(2 vectors specification) Fig. 12.2.18.3 (d) Tilted working plane data setting screen-2 vectors specification(15-inch display unit) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiec...

  • Page 1484

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1454 - G68.2 / G68.4(Projection angle) Fig. 12.2.18.3 (e) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Projection angle(15-inch display unit) • Multi Type Absolute: It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate s...

  • Page 1485

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1455 - G68.3(Tool Axis Direction) Fig. 12.2.18.3 (f) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(15-inch display unit) (When "No" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate") Fig. 12.2.18.3 (...

  • Page 1486

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1456 - • Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-axi...

  • Page 1487

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1457 - 12.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.3, “SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY “, consists of the following subsections: ――――― Screens of a 8.4/10.4-inch display unit 12.3.1 Displaying and Entering Setting Data...

  • Page 1488

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1458 - Screens of a 8.4/10.4-inch display unit Press function key to display or set tool compensation values and other data. This section describes how to display or set the following data: 1. Tool compensation value 2. Settings 3. Sequence...

  • Page 1489

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1459 - Fig. 12.3.1 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 12.3.1 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (10.4-inch display unit) 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys . 5 Enter a new value and ...

  • Page 1490

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1460 - - TV CHECK Setting to perform TV check. 0 : No TV check 1 : Perform TV check - OUTPUT CODE Setting code when data is output through RS232C interface. 0 : EIA code output 1 : ISO code output - INPUT UNIT Setting a program input un...

  • Page 1491

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1461 - 12.3.2 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation enters single block mode after the block is executed. Procedure for sequence number compari...

  • Page 1492

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1462 - In the example shown above, if the predetermined sequence number is found, the execution of the program does not stop. - Stop in the canned cycle If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which has a canned cycle comm...

  • Page 1493

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1463 - 5 To set the number of parts required, move the cursor to PARTS REQUIRED and enter the number of parts to be machined. 6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date or time, then press soft key [INPUT]. Explan...

  • Page 1494

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1464 - Limitation - Run time and part count settings Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of “M” and “S” of run time is valid from 0 to 59. Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts. - Time set...

  • Page 1495

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1465 - 4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing. 5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed. 6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key [INPUT]. The entered value is specified in the...

  • Page 1496

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1466 - Fig. 12.3.5 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch display unit) 6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set. 7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example)...

  • Page 1497

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1467 - Fig. 12.3.6 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (10.4-inch display unit) 3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH]. • Move the cursor to th...

  • Page 1498

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1468 - 12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros. RTM variables are divided into temporary real time macro variables (temporary RTM variables)...

  • Page 1499

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1469 - Displaying and setting DI/DO variables Procedure For setting in byte units: 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key several times, then press chapter selection soft key [R.TIME MACRO]. The following screen appears: 3 P...

  • Page 1500

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1470 - Fig. 12.3.8 (a) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (without the manual handle feed function) (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 12.3.8 (b) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (with the manual handle feed function) (10...

  • Page 1501

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1471 - Fig. 12.3.8 (c) Page 2 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (10.4-inch display unit) 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and se...

  • Page 1502

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1472 - - Jog feed and arrow keys The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters Nos. 7210 to 7217. - General purpose switches For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machin...

  • Page 1503

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1473 - 6 To end the edit operation, press soft key [EXIT]. This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen. Explanation - Another method Magazine data can be input/output also by using external I/O devices. See I...

  • Page 1504

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1474 - Fig. 12.3.9.2 (a) Tool management data screen (10.4-inch display unit) 4 By using the page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys [←] and [→], move the cursor to the position of the tool information of the tool number for which you wa...

  • Page 1505

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1475 - 8 When soft key [CHECK] is pressed, if there are tools with the same number but with different count types (count and time), the cursor moves to the tool type number of the smallest tool management number in the tool type numbers and ...

  • Page 1506

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1476 - NOTE 1 The tool types and data access information vary depending on the specifications defined by the machine tool builder. 2 The same type of tools must have the same life count type. L-COUNT : The number of use times/use period of...

  • Page 1507

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1477 - • Tool offset information Fig. 12.3.9.2 (e) Tool management data tool offset screen (10.4-inch display unit) H : Tool length compensation number (for machining center systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. D : Cutter c...

  • Page 1508

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1478 - CUSTOM1 to 4 : Customize information. Any value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set. CUSTOM5 to 20 : Customize information. These items are displayed only when customize data extension option (5 to 20) of the tool management fun...

  • Page 1509

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1479 - Fig. 12.3.9.3 (a) Each tool data screen (10.4-inch display unit) Explanation - Header The following four data items are displayed: NO., TYPE NO., MG, and POT. When the data table of a tool extends over two or more pages, the same h...

  • Page 1510

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1480 - Moves the cursor left on the screen. When the cursor is on the left column of the data table, it moves to the right column on the row immediately above. When the cursor is on the first data item, it moves to the last data item. Move...

  • Page 1511

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1481 - 12.3.9.4 Displaying the total life of tools of the same type Total life data screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. Alternatively, press key several times until the tool managemen...

  • Page 1512

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1482 - Displayed information S-NO. : Sequential number of each tool type TYPE NO. : Tool type number T-REM-LIFE : Total of remaining life values of tools with the same tool type number T-L-COUNT : Total of used counts/times of tools with the...

  • Page 1513

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1483 - NOTE 2 When the power is turned on, data of the count counting type is displayed in ascending order of tool type numbers. When the display type is changed or data is sorted in a different order, the status is kept. 3 If soft key [DETA...

  • Page 1514

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1484 - Key operations - MDI key operations Displays the previous page. Displays the next page. Moves the cursor up on the screen. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page. Moves the cursor down on the screen. The cursor moves...

  • Page 1515

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1485 - Fig. 12.3.9.5 (a) Tool geometry data screen (10.4-inch display unit) - Displayed item NO. : Tool geometry number Up to 20 numbers can be displayed. LEFT : Sets the number of pots on the left of the reference pot that are to be oc...

  • Page 1516

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1486 - Soft key [ F OUTPUT] Outputs data related to the tool management functions. This key is available only in the standard mode. Put the NC in the EDIT mode. In the management data edit mode, the following key operations are available ...

  • Page 1517

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1487 - Fig. 12.3.9.5 (c) Magazine management table (10.4-inch display unit) If a tool to be registered for a magazine is determined to interfere with another tool, the warning message “TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR:xxxx,xxxx” is displa...

  • Page 1518

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1488 - EMPTY-SRCH : Searches for the pot nearest to the current position. - Tool management screen You can use bit 2 of tool information to switch between a oversize tool and normal tool. For a oversize tool, set a tool geometry number fit...

  • Page 1519

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1489 - Displaying and setting the display language Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key several times. 3 Press soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen. Fig. 12.3.10 (a) LANGUAGE screen (10.4-inch disp...

  • Page 1520

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1490 - 17. Russian 18. Turkish 19. Bulgarian 20. Rumanian Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a list of switchable languages. Limitation - Language parameter modification on ...

  • Page 1521

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1491 - 4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press soft key [INPUT PASSWD]. 5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press soft key [CANCEL PASSWD]. Explanation - Operation level setting To select ...

  • Page 1522

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1492 - Fig. 12.3.11.2 (a) PASSWORD CHANGE screen (10.4-inch display unit) 5 Key in an operation level whose password is to be modified, then press soft key [INPUT]. 6 Key in the current password for the operation level whose password is to...

  • Page 1523

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1493 - 12.3.11.3 Protection level setting The current operation level is displayed. The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed. The change protection level and output protection level of each data...

  • Page 1524

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1494 - • Output protection level Sets the protection level used when data is output to an external unit. As a protection level, you can set a value of 0 (low) to 7 (high). Table 12.3.11.3 (a) Protection level of each type of data Initia...

  • Page 1525

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1495 - NOTE 4 Settable types of data increase or decrease, depending on the option configuration. 5 For details on the protection level of PMC data, refer to “PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN)”. 6 Data related to tool information on the...

  • Page 1526

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1496 - Fig. 12.3.11.4 (a) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit) 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press soft key [DETAIL ON]. The screen display switches to the detail display screen. 5 Move the cursor to a desired program. 6 Press th...

  • Page 1527

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1497 - Value RMS value 1 10 Precision level (RMS value: Root-Mean-Square value) Fig. 12.3.12 (a) Image of “level” Procedure for precision level selection 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Press function key . 3 ...

  • Page 1528

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1498 - 12.3.13 Machining Level Selection 12.3.13.1 Smoothing level selection An intermediate smoothing level between the parameters for smoothing level 1 and the parameters for smoothing level 10 set on the machining parameter tuning screen ...

  • Page 1529

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1499 - 7 If there is an axis in addition to the currently displayed axes, press page key or several times to display the screen for the axis. 12.3.13.2 Precision level selection For details of precision level selection, See Subsection, ...

  • Page 1530

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1500 - Fig. 12.3.14 (b) Machining quality level selection screen (10.4 inch) 4 Use cursor keys to move the new level mark and select the level. (The new level mark moves.) 5 Press soft key [APPLY] or MDI key to set the level. (The current...

  • Page 1531

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1501 - Overview ENDEDIT List screen Tool life management (list screen) Displayed items: - NEXT GROUP - SELECTED GROUP - GROUP NO. - LIFE - TOOL MANAGEMENT STATUS - GROUP TO BE CHANGE Functions: - Searching for groups - Clearing execu...

  • Page 1532

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1502 - If the ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) • The D code is displayed on the group editing screen. • If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) and bit 5 (TGN) o...

  • Page 1533

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1503 - NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, NEXT GROUP, USING GROUP, and SELECTED GROUP are each represented with an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. - Contents of (B) (B) displays the set life value, the ...

  • Page 1534

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1504 - M • The tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1). • Arbitrary group numbers are enabled (bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1). T • The current tool change type is ATC (bit 3 (TCT) of p...

  • Page 1535

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1505 - NOTE Setting bit 4 (GRS) of parameter No. 6800 to 1 enables execution data for all registered tool groups to be cleared. - Selecting tool groups Tool groups can be selected using the following methods. Method 1 1 Enter a tool group...

  • Page 1536

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1506 - (A) (B) Fig. 12.3.15.2 (a) Displaying tool life management (group editing screen) (10.4-inch display unit) NOTE If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a life value, and a tool life counter value is ...

  • Page 1537

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1507 - T-CODE : Tool number M H-CODE : Tool length compensation specification code D-CODE : Cutter compensation specification code T H-CODE : No display. D-CODE : Tool offset value specification code if ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of ...

  • Page 1538

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1508 - ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1) REST COUNT : Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 680...

  • Page 1539

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1509 - NOTE 3 The following editing operations may reset the tool change signal to “0”. - Adding tool numbers, leading to tools whose life has not expired being set in the tool group of interest. - Selecting tool clear. Procedure - Set...

  • Page 1540

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1510 - (Example) Adding tool number 1550 between numbers 1 and 2 (for the M series) 1 Move the cursor to the data for number 1, enter “1550”, and press [INSERT]. 2 The entered T code 1550 is inserted in the position of number 2. The ...

  • Page 1541

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1511 - 2 Press soft key [NO.SRH]. NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group is selected by searching for an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. Method 2 1 Press page key or to display the target too...

  • Page 1542

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1512 - Table rotation axis positions 1 and 2 are specified for rotation axes. No position must be specified for axes (including virtual axes) other than table rotation axes. So, no such item is displayed for setting. Table rotation axis posi...

  • Page 1543

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1513 - Fig. 12.3.17 (a) Pattern menu screen (10.4-inch display unit) On this screen, a pattern to be used can be selected. The following two methods can be used to select patterns. • Using the cursor 1 Move the cursor to a pattern name ...

  • Page 1544

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1514 - 3 After entering all necessary data, select the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button. Machining begins. Explanation - Explanations about the pattern menu screen HOLE PATTERN An arbitrary character string consisting of 12...

  • Page 1545

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1515 - Fig. 12.3.18 (a) Tool offset screen (10.4-inch display unit) Fig. 12.3.18 (b) Tool offset screen (10.4-inch display unit) X : Set the X-axis tool offset value. Z/LENGTH : Set the Z-axis tool offset value or tool length compensatio...

  • Page 1546

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1516 - 4 To set the offset value, enter the value and press soft key [INPUT]. To change the offset value, enter a value to be incremented to or decremented from the current setting and press soft key [+INPUT]. Alternatively, enter a new offs...

  • Page 1547

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1517 - Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit 12.3.19 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15/19-inch Display Unit) Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable...

  • Page 1548

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1518 - Fig. 12.3.19 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (15-inch display unit) 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys . 5 Enter a new value and press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. Explanation - PARAMETER WRITE ...

  • Page 1549

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1519 - - SEQUENCE NO. Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the EDIT mode. 0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion. 1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertio...

  • Page 1550

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1520 - Fig. 12.3.20 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (15-inch display unit) 5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP the number (1 to 99999999) of the program containing the sequence number with which operation stops. 6 Enter in (SEQUENCE NO.)...

  • Page 1551

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1521 - 12.3.21 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15/19-inch Display Unit) Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined parts can be displayed. This data can be...

  • Page 1552

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1522 - - PARTS COUNT This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed. The value can also be set by parameter No. 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches the number of pa...

  • Page 1553

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1523 - 12.3.22 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (15/19-inch Display Unit) Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and ex...

  • Page 1554

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1524 - 12.3.23 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured (15/19-inch Display Unit) This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiece coordinate sys...

  • Page 1555

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1525 - Fig. 12.3.23 (b) WORK COORDINATES screen (15-inch display unit) 6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set. 7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example)....

  • Page 1556

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1526 - Fig. 12.3.24 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (15-inch display unit) 3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the variable number and press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH]. • Move the cu...

  • Page 1557

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1527 - 12.3.25 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data (15/19-inch Display Unit) Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros. RTM variables are divided into temporary real time macro variable...

  • Page 1558

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1528 - Displaying and setting DI/DO variables Procedure For setting in byte units: 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [R.TIME MACRO]. 3 Press vertical soft key [BYTE SELECT]....

  • Page 1559

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1529 - Fig. 12.3.26 (a) Without the manual handle feed function (15-inch display unit) Fig. 12.3.26 (b) With the manual handle feed function (15-inch display unit)

  • Page 1560

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1530 - Fig. 12.3.26 (c) (15-inch display unit) 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the desired condition. 6 Press one of the fo...

  • Page 1561

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1531 - - Jog feed and arrow keys The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters (Nos. 7210 to 7217). - General purpose switches For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by mach...

  • Page 1562

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1532 - 5 To set the tool management data number of a pot, type the tool management data number, then press MDI key . To delete the tool management data number set for a pot, follow the steps below. <1> Press horizontal soft key [ERASE...

  • Page 1563

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1533 - Fig. 12.3.27.2 (a) Tool management data screen (15-inch display unit) 4 By using the page keys, cursor keys, and horizontal soft keys [←] and [→], move the cursor to the position of the tool information of the tool number for wh...

  • Page 1564

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1534 - 7 To end the edit operation, press horizontal soft key [EXIT]. This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen. Fig. 12.3.27.2 (b) Tool management data screen (check function) (15-inch display unit) 8 Whe...

  • Page 1565

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1535 - - Displayed information • Life information Fig. 12.3.27.2 (c) Tool management data life status screen(15-inch display unit) NO. : Tool management data numbers are displayed. These numbers can be displayed but cannot be set. The t...

  • Page 1566

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1536 - L-STATE : Current tool state One of the four states, including invalid (0), present (1, 2), not present (3), and broken (4), is indicated. The numbers in parentheses are data values used when these states are input in MDI. • Spin...

  • Page 1567

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1537 - D : Cutter compensation number (for machining center systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. TG : Tool geometry compensation number (for lathe systems only). A value from 0 to 999 can be set. TW : Tool wear compensation n...

  • Page 1568

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1538 - When cutting is performed for 10 minutes with an override of 0.1, one minute is counted in the tool life counter. - Tool management extension function When tool management extension functions are enabled, you can use the following ...

  • Page 1569

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1539 - Explanation - Header The following four data items are displayed: NO., TYPE NO., MG, and POT. When the data table of a tool extends over two or more pages, the same header is displayed on these pages. - Data table The data table sh...

  • Page 1570

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1540 - Horizontal soft key [NEXT.TOOL] Proceeds to the next tool management number. Horizontal soft key [F INPUT] Inputs data related to the tool management function. Can be used only in the standard mode. Requires placing the NC in the ...

  • Page 1571

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1541 - 3 Press vertical soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total life data screen appears. 4 Using horizontal soft key [CHANGE] can switch total tool life data displays between specification by count and specification by duration. Fig. 12.3.27.4 (...

  • Page 1572

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1542 - Either of the two states (UNDONE and DONE) is displayed. NUM : Number of tools with the same tool type number When bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 0 and bit 2 (TRT) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 1, the tool life arr...

  • Page 1573

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1543 - Fig. 12.3.27.4 (c) Detailed life data screen (15-inch display unit) - Displayed information TYPE NO. : Tool type number ORDER : Sequential number in ascending order of remaining life times or the order in which the customize data ...

  • Page 1574

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1544 - Horizontal soft key [CLOSE] Closes the detailed life data screen and returns to the total life data screen. NOTE When horizontal soft key [CLOSE] is pressed and the total life data screen is displayed again, the cursor on the total...

  • Page 1575

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1545 - LOWER : Sets the number of pots under the reference pot that are to be occupied. A value between 0 and 4 can be set. (Use this item when the magazine is of the matrix type.) Key operations - Operations in the standard mode MDI ...

  • Page 1576

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1546 - Fig. 12.3.27.5 (b) Example of setting data on the tool geometry data screen (15-inch display unit) - Display of occupied pots in the magazine management table Each pot occupied by a tool stored in another pot is indicated with an a...

  • Page 1577

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1547 - Fig. 12.3.27.5 (d) Searching for an empty pot for a oversize tool (15-inch display unit) Enter the tool geometry number in the key-in buffer and press a search horizontal soft key. The cursor moves to an empty pot fit for the geomet...

  • Page 1578

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1548 - Fig. 12.3.27.5 (f) Tool geometry number (15-inch display unit)

  • Page 1579

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1549 - 12.3.28 Displaying and Switching the Display Language (15/19-inch Display Unit) The language used for display can be switched to another language. A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of t...

  • Page 1580

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1550 - 9. Spanish 10. Dutch 11. Danish 12. Portuguese 13. Polish 14. Hungarian 15. Swedish 16. Czech 17. Russian 18. Turkish Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a list of switch...

  • Page 1581

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1551 - Fig. 12.3.29.1 (a) Operation level setting screen (15-inch display unit) 4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT PASSWD]. 5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or ...

  • Page 1582

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1552 - 12.3.29.2 Password modification (15-inch display unit) The current operation level is displayed. The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified. Displaying and setting the password modification screen Procedure 1 Pr...

  • Page 1583

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1553 - NOTE 3 Whether a password can be changed at the current operation level is determined as follows: • Password of an operation level higher than the current operation level Cannot be changed. • Password of the current operation lev...

  • Page 1584

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1554 - NOTE When the protection level of PMC data is set, soft key [SWITCH PMC] is used to switch between PMC paths to be set, for multi-path PMC. Explanation When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation le...

  • Page 1585

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1555 - Initial protection level Type of data Change Output PMC memory 0 0 I/O configuration 0 0 I/O Link group selection 0 0 Registration of I/O device 0 0 NOTE 1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided. 2 When the pro...

  • Page 1586

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1556 - Fig. 12.3.29.4 (a) Program directory screen (15-inch display unit) 3 Press horizontal soft key [DETAIL ON] to switch to detail displays. 4 Move the cursor to a desired program. 5 Press the continuous menu key to display horizontal ...

  • Page 1587

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1557 - Value RMS value 1 10 Precision level (RMS value: Root-Mean-Square value) Fig. 12.3.30 (a) Image of "level" Procedure for precision level selection 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Press function ke...

  • Page 1588

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1558 - 12.3.31 Machining Level Selection (15/19-inch Display Unit) 12.3.31.1 Smoothing level selection An intermediate smoothing level between the parameters for smoothing level 1 and the parameters for smoothing level 10 set on the machinin...

  • Page 1589

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1559 - 7 If there is an axis in addition to the currently displayed axes, press page key or several times to display the screen for the axis. 12.3.31.2 Precision level selection For details of precision level selection, See Subsection, ...

  • Page 1590

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1560 - Fig. 12.3.32 (b) Machining quality level selection screen (15-inch display unit) 4 Use cursor keys to move the new level mark and select the level. (The new level mark moves.) 5 Press soft key [APPLY] or MDI key to set the level. (...

  • Page 1591

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1561 - 12.3.33 Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data (15/19-inch Display Unit) Displaying tool life management data on a screen enables the current status of tool life management to be grasped. Also on the screen, tool life manage...

  • Page 1592

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1562 - • If bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 = 1 Remaining set values are displayed on the group editing screen. The group editing screen always displays H and D codes. T The T series is provided with two tool change types, turret type ...

  • Page 1593

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1563 - NEXT GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is started by the next M06 command. USING GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way. SELECTED GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is c...

  • Page 1594

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1564 - Fig. 12.3.33.1 (b) Displaying arbitrary group numbers Arbitrary group numbers are enabled by setting the following parameters. M • The tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1). • Arbi...

  • Page 1595

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1565 - Method 2 1 Place the cursor on the tool life counter for a desired tool group. 2 Enter the value from the keypad. 3 Press key. - Clearing execution data All existing execution data for a tool group selected by the cursor can be cle...

  • Page 1596

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1566 - (A) (B) Fig. 12.3.33.2 (a) Displaying tool life management (group editing screen) (15-inch display unit) NOTE If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a life value, and a tool life counter value is di...

  • Page 1597

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1567 - T-CODE : Tool number M H-CODE : Tool length compensation specification code D-CODE : Cutter compensation specification code T H-CODE : No display. D-CODE : Tool offset value specification code if ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) o...

  • Page 1598

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1568 - REST COUNT : Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 = 1) ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1) OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 680...

  • Page 1599

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1569 - NOTE 2 The following editing operations may set the tool change signal to “1”. - Selecting tool skip for the last tool. - Deleting tool numbers, resulting in any tool other than those whose life has expired or who have been skippe...

  • Page 1600

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1570 - - Adding tool numbers Tool numbers can be added to a tool group as follows: 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) just before a tool number to be added. 3 Enter the tool number from th...

  • Page 1601

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1571 - 4 Press horizontal soft key [CLEAR]. - Selecting a tool group A tool group can be selected as follows: Method 1 1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad. 2 Press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH]. NOTE If arbitrary group numbers ar...

  • Page 1602

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1572 - 12.3.34 Displaying and Setting Workpiece Setting Error Compensation Data (15/19-inch Display Unit) An amount of error used in workpiece setting error compensation can be set on the workpiece setting error screen. The workpiece setting...

  • Page 1603

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1573 - • After a workpiece setting error number you want to display is entered, pressing horizontal soft key [NO.SRH] causes a setting screen for the target workpiece setting error to appear. • After a number is entered, pressing horizon...

  • Page 1604

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1574 - • Using the cursor 1 Move the cursor to a pattern name you want to select, using cursor key or , and then press soft key [SELECT] or . • Specifying a pattern number 1 Enter a number displayed at the left side of a pattern name, a...

  • Page 1605

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1575 - *BOLT HOLE CIRCLE* The comment text consists of nine 12-character blocks, or the comment can be up to 12 lines (10.4-inch display unit) or 8 lines (8.4-inch display unit) with one block counted as one line. Machine tool builders s...

  • Page 1606

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1576 - 12.3.36 Built-in 3D Interference Check On the setting screens of built-in 3D interference check function, the following operations can be performed: • Sets each target figure for interference check. • Checks the current setting. ...

  • Page 1607

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1577 - Fig. 12.3.36.1 (a) Monitor menu screen 10.4” Fig. 12.3.36.1 (b) Monitor menu screen 15” To display the monitor menu screen, use the following procedure: 1. Press function key . 2. Press soft key [3D INTER.]. 3. Press soft key ...

  • Page 1608

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1578 - [UPDATE STOP] Stops updating the drawing of the figure for check. [ROTATION] Rotates the figure for check. Soft key [UPDATE START] or [UPDATE STOP] is displayed when it can be used depending on the drawing update state. Pressing so...

  • Page 1609

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1579 - 12.3.36.2 Tool monitor screen Screen configuration When a tool is selected on the monitor menu screen, the tool number and offset number are displayed. When bit 2 (ICT) of parameter No. 10930 is set to 0, the tool number is not displa...

  • Page 1610

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1580 - Pressing soft key [ROTATION] causes soft keys for rotation operation to appear. Fig. 12.3.36.2 (c) Soft keys for rotation operation Soft key [↑] Rotates the figure for check upward. Soft key [↓] Rotates the figure for check down...

  • Page 1611

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1581 - Operation On the tool holder and object monitor screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [MENU] Displays the monitor menu screen. [UPDATE] Updates the display of the figure for check. [ROTATION] Rotates th...

  • Page 1612

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1582 - Fig. 12.3.36.4 (b) Figure setting menu screen 15” The maximum number of objects that can be set is 3 in 1-path control and parameter ENO (No.10930#6) is set to 0. The maximum number of objects that can be set is 6 in 1-path contro...

  • Page 1613

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1583 - • Reference position: Reference position used when a figure is defined • Reference angle 1(master rotation axis): Angle of the master rotation axis to be assumed for the measurement of each figure when the object rotates as the ...

  • Page 1614

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1584 - If no shape is defined for a figure, alarm PS0492, “3DCHK FIG. ILLEGAL: [String1]” is issued. If data is not set or is invalid for a set shape number, an asterisk (*) is displayed to the right of the shape number. Move the cursor ...

  • Page 1615

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1585 - Fig. 12.3.36.5 (d) Shape type soft keys 4. Press the soft key corresponding to the shape type you want to set. Pressing the soft key selects the relevant shape type and displays the relevant setting screen. Procedure for changing t...

  • Page 1616

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1586 - Specify each figure element that makes up the figure of a tool holder. Up to six figure elements can be input. In the SHAPE NO. field, specify a value between 1 and the number of shapes (number of displayed shapes set on the display ...

  • Page 1617

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1587 - Fig. 12.3.36.6 (b) Tool holder figure setting screen 15” The number of figures that can be defined for tool holders is as follows: Up to 120 in a 1-path system Up to 60 in a 2-path system Up to 40 in a 3-path system Up to 30 in a ...

  • Page 1618

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1588 - Tool type Making method Kind of shape to be automatically made Ball end mill Making method 2 Cylinder Tap Making method 2 Cylinder Reamer Making method 2 Cylinder Boring tool Making method 2 Cylinder Face mill Making method 2 Cylinder...

  • Page 1619

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1589 - The method of making tip figure corresponding to each tool setting is as follows. 1. When tool setting of the each tool is set as Table12.3.36.6 (b), tip figure is made as Fig.12.3.36.6 (d). Table12.3.36.6 (b) Tool type Tool setting...

  • Page 1620

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1590 - Tool type Tool setting Grooving tool Round-nose tool Point nose straight tool Multifunctional tool - Thickness of the tip (a) : The opposite direction of adjacent vertex 1 of figure element 1 - Length of the tip (b) : The sam...

  • Page 1621

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1591 - Tool reference position Reference positioAdjacent vertex 1 Adjacent vertex 2 Adjacent vertex 3Tip Figure element 2Figure element 1 (a)(b) (c)Tip (c) Fig.12.3.36.6 (f) NOTE When tool setting is set to 0, the method of making tip figu...

  • Page 1622

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1592 - NOTE • The tool tip direction determines the tool axis direction at machining time. The plane selection commands (G17, G18, G19) do not automatically change the axis direction. • For the side tool for drill, when tool setting of t...

  • Page 1623

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1593 - Tool width 2 / 2Tool width 2 / 2Adjacent vertex 1Adjacent vertex 3Tool ref. pointRef. vertex Tool tip direction Fig.12.3.36.6 (i) - Adjacent vertex 1 (a): Tool tip direction set to tool holder (Length = Tool width 2) - Adjacent ve...

  • Page 1624

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1594 - Tip lengthTip widthTip thicknessTip figure Fig.12.3.36.6 (k) 2. In case that figure element 1 of tool holder is cylinder Figure element 1 and 2 are defined as the cylinder. Tool element 1 direction End point (Tool holder)Start poi...

  • Page 1625

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1595 - Tool length 1Tool width 1Tool width 2Tool length 2Start point (element 2)Start point(element 1)End point(element 1)End point(element 2) Fig.12.3.36.6 (m) - The end point: Tool tip direction set to tool holder (Length = Tool width 1...

  • Page 1626

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1596 - Each figure is defined as follows. 1. In case that figure element 1 of tool holder is rectangular parallelepiped Figure element 1, 2 and 3 are defined as rectangular parallelepiped. Adjacent vertex 2 ( Tool holder ) Adjacent vertex...

  • Page 1627

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1597 - - Adjacent vertex 3 (c): The same direction to adjacent vertex 3 of figure element 1 (Length = Tool width 2) • Figure element 3 - The reference vertex: Calculated as Fig.12.3.36.6 (q) Adjacent vertex 1(element 2) Ref. vertex (el...

  • Page 1628

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1598 - End point (Tool holder)Start point (Tool holder)Tool ref. point Tool element 1 directionTool element 2 direction= Tool tip direction (set to tool holder) Tool element 3 direction = Opposite direction of tool element 1 Tool tip ...

  • Page 1629

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1599 - Tip thicknessEnd point of element 2Tip widthTip length Fig.12.3.36.6 (u) NOTE 1 When you use the back tool, the number of figures that can be defined by other figure decreases. For example, when the back tool is used in 1-path, the ...

  • Page 1630

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1600 - Fig. 12.3.36.6 (v) Soft keys for rotation operation Soft key [↑] Rotates the figure for check upward. Soft key [↓] Rotates the figure for check downward. Soft key [←] Rotates the figure for check to left. Soft key [→] Rotat...

  • Page 1631

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1601 - 4. Pressing soft key [EXEC] causes the setting screen for the selected shape type to appear. The shape data before change is cleared. To cancel the change of the shape type, press soft key [CANCEL]. Procedure for editing shape data T...

  • Page 1632

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1602 - Fig. 12.3.36.7 (b) Rectangular parallelepiped setting screen 15” Operation On the rectangular parallelepiped setting screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [SHAPE LIST] Displays the shape number list ...

  • Page 1633

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1603 - Fig. 12.3.36.8 (a) Cylinder setting screen 10.4” Fig. 12.3.36.8 (b) Cylinder setting screen 15” Operation On the cylinder setting screen, the following soft keys are available to perform operation: [SHAPE LIST] Displays the...

  • Page 1634

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1604 - • Normal vector : Vector perpendicular to the plane • Numerical unit : Machine unit or input unit Fig. 12.3.36.9 (a) Plane setting screen 10.4” Fig. 12.3.36.9 (b) Plane setting screen 15” Operation On the plane setting scr...

  • Page 1635

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1605 - 12.3.36.10 Shape number list screen The shape number list screen displays a list of the figure names and figure numbers assigned to shape numbers. This list screen is the same as the shape number list screen displayed from the tool h...

  • Page 1636

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1606 - Moving the cursor on a shape number and pressing soft key [EDIT] causes the setting screen for the relevant shape to appear to enable the editing of the setting. In Fig. 12.3.36.10 (a) and Fig. 12.3.36.10 (b), data of shape number 1 c...

  • Page 1637

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1607 - Fig. 12.3.36.10 (f) Soft keys displayed when the current setting is plane 3. Press the soft key corresponding to the shape type you want to set. Pressing the soft key causes a confirmation message and the soft keys shown in Fig. 12....

  • Page 1638

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1608 - Fig. 12.3.36.11 (a) Interference check valid figure selection screen 10.4” Fig. 12.3.36.11 (b) Interference check valid figure selection screen 15” In the setting example shown in Fig. 12.3.36.11 (a) and Fig. 12.3.36.11 (b), 3...

  • Page 1639

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1609 - 12.3.36.12 Moving axis setting menu screen and moving axis setting screen On the moving axis setting menu screen, select a target item in the same way as on the figure setting menu screen. To display the moving axis setting menu scree...

  • Page 1640

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1610 - Fig. 12.3.36.12 (a) Moving axis setting screen 10.4” Fig. 12.3.36.12 (b) Moving axis setting screen 15”

  • Page 1641

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1611 - NOTE 1 Set the direction of the rotation center axis of the rotation axis. 1: On X-axis 2: On Y-axis 3: On Z-axis 4: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the X-axis from the positive X-axis to positive Y-axis 5: On an axis tilted a ...

  • Page 1642

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1612 - 12.3.36.13 Setting screens On setting screens, set the following items: • Names of tools, tool holders, and objects • Number of displayed shapes • Whether to display or hide the figure setting screen and moving axis setting scre...

  • Page 1643

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1613 - Interference check target item names Number Tool Tool holder Object 11 “WORK LIMIT” Default names The default names listed in Table 12.3.36.14 (b) below are used. In a combined system in multi-path control, the default names o...

  • Page 1644

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1614 - Fig. 12.3.36.14 (b) Name setting screen 15” 12.3.36.15 Display setting screen Define the items displayed on built-in 3D interference check function setting screens. Set the following items: • Number of shapes: Set a numeric valu...

  • Page 1645

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1615 - Fig. 12.3.36.15 (a) Display setting screen 10.4” Fig. 12.3.36.15 (b) Display setting screen 15” When the display of a figure setting screen is set to "NO", the figure setting screen, moving axis setting screen, and...

  • Page 1646

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1616 - Number Drawing coordinate system 5 ZX 6 XYZ 7 YXZ 8 YZX Fig. 12.3.36.16 (a) Drawing coordinate system setting screen 10.4” Fig. 12.3.36.16 (b) Drawing coordinate system setting screen 15” An asterisk (*) is displayed to the l...

  • Page 1647

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1617 - 1. Use the cursor keys <↑>, <↓>, <←>, and <→> to move the cursor to the drawing coordinate system you want to set. As the cursor moves, the displayed figure of the coordinate system and figure for check...

  • Page 1648

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1618 - Fig. 12.3.36.17 (b) Setting input/output screen 15” Input setting data for 3D interference check The setting data for built-in 3D interference check are loaded into the memory of the CNC from a memory card. The input format is the...

  • Page 1649

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1619 - 5. Press soft key [I/O]. 6. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 7. Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 8. Press soft key [F OUTPUT]. 9. Type the file name that you want to output. If the file na...

  • Page 1650

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1620 - NOTE • Up to ten ASCII characters can be set to the comment. When over ten characters are input, ten characters from the head are set to the comment. • Refer to the Table12.3.36.17 (a) which lists the character that can be set as ...

  • Page 1651

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1621 - (3) Number of shapes displayed on the shape number list screen G10 L32 P_ ; P_ : Number of displayed shapes (0 to 150) (4) Display setting G10 L33 P_ Q_ D_ I_ ; P_ : Type of interference check target item (1 to 2) 1: Object 2: Tool...

  • Page 1652

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1622 - (7) Shape definition information There are the following types of shape definition information: No definition, rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder, and plane, which are classified according to T_. T0=No definition T1=Rectangular p...

  • Page 1653

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1623 - N_ : The valid figure number (0 to 10 ) When N0 is specified, the meaning is the following in accordance with parameter ICV (No.10930#3). 0: Figure 1 is effective. 1: No figure. (Removed from interference check target) (9) Moving axi...

  • Page 1654

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1624 - 12.3.37 Setting and Displaying Data When the Tool Offset for Milling and Turning Function Is Enabled (15/19-inch Display Unit) The tool offset for milling and turning function enables offset data to be displayed and operated on a tool...

  • Page 1655

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1625 - Fig. 12.3.37 (b) Tool offset screen (15-inch display unit) X : Set the X-axis tool offset value. Z/LENGTH : Set the Z-axis tool offset value or tool length compensation value. Y : Set the Y-axis tool offset value. NOSE R/RAD : Set t...

  • Page 1656

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1626 - The input of the tool offset values in any specified range from the MDI can be disabled by setting the number of the first target tool offset value in parameter No. 3294 and the number of target tool offset values starting from the fi...

  • Page 1657

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1627 - 12.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or ot...

  • Page 1658

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1628 - Normally, the user need not change parameter setting. Procedure for displaying and setting parameters Procedure 1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure for enabling/disabling parameter writing described below...

  • Page 1659

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1629 - Fig. 12.4.1 (b) SETTING screen (10.4-inch display unit) 4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys. 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [ON:1] to enable parameter writing. At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state S...

  • Page 1660

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1630 - 12.4.2 Servo Parameters This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time of field tuning of the machine tool. Procedure for servo parameter setting Procedure 1 Turn on the p...

  • Page 1661

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1631 - 12.4.3 Servo Tuning Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set. Procedure for servo tuning Procedure 1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state. 2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tu...

  • Page 1662

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1632 - 12.4.4 Spindle Setting Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring are provided. Setting spin...

  • Page 1663

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1633 - 12.4.5 Spindle Tuning Spindle tuning data is displayed and set. Setting for spindle tuning Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function key , continuous menu k...

  • Page 1664

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1634 - 12.4.6 Spindle Monitor Spindle-related data is displayed. Displaying the spindle monitor Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press function key , continuous menu key...

  • Page 1665

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1635 - 12.4.7 Color Setting Screen Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen. Displaying the color setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [COLOR]. 3 Pres...

  • Page 1666

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1636 - (When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.) COLOR1 Standard color data parameters Nos. 6581 to 6595 COLOR2 Parameters Nos. 10421 to...

  • Page 1667

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1637 - • Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations • Ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acc...

  • Page 1668

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1638 - Fig. 12.4.8.1 (b) Machining parameter tuning screen (AI contour) (10.4-inch display unit) 4 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows: Press page key or , and cursor keys , , and /or to move the cursor ...

  • Page 1669

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1639 - Explanation - Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Set an acceleration rate for a linear portion in look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Unit of data: mm/sec2, inch/sec2, deg/sec2 (machine ...

  • Page 1670

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1640 - Set an allowable acceleration change value per ms for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations. The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning sc...

  • Page 1671

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1641 - Parameter No. 1737: Allowable acceleration rate for each axis applicable to the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour control CAUTION When bit 0 (MCR) of parameter No. 13600 is set to 1, the deceleration functio...

  • Page 1672

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1642 - • Display Tuning target parameter numbers are displayed. CAUTION As arbitrary items, the numbers of the following parameters cannot be specified: • Bit parameter • Spindle parameters (Parameters Nos. 4000 to 4799) • Real-...

  • Page 1673

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1643 - Fig. 12.4.8.2 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (nano smoothing) (10.4-inch display unit) 5 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows: Press page key or , and cursor keys , , and /or to move the cur...

  • Page 1674

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1644 - Parameter No. 11684 (smoothing level 1) Parameter No. 11685 (smoothing level 10) Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the smoothing level: Parameter No. 19547: Tolerance specified for rotary axes in nano smoothi...

  • Page 1675

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1645 - Explanation A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options: Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal) Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal) Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal) Double display (8 bytes in dec...

  • Page 1676

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1646 - 12.4.10 Parameter Tuning Screen The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the following: 1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collecti...

  • Page 1677

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1647 - Fig. 12.4.10.1 (a) Menu screen for parameter tuning (10.4-inch display unit) 6 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or . 7 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen. Returning ...

  • Page 1678

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1648 - 3 Press soft key [MENU]. The screen display returns to the parameter tuning menu screen. 4 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "DISABLED". NOTE Some setting screens ca...

  • Page 1679

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1649 - 12.4.10.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified. The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FA...

  • Page 1680

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1650 - NOTE 1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed. 2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits can be input...

  • Page 1681

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1651 - 12.4.10.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen, see the descr...

  • Page 1682

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1652 - 12.4.10.6 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting ...

  • Page 1683

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1653 - 12.4.10.8 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified. For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting)”. Fig. 12.4.1...

  • Page 1684

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1654 - 12.4.10.10 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Tuning”. Fig. 12.4.10.10 (a...

  • Page 1685

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1655 - 12.4.10.12 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the machining parameter tuning screen, see the Subsection...

  • Page 1686

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1656 - *2 : When intra-path axis number ≤ 8, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path axis number - 1) When intra-path axis number ≥ 9, no standard value is available. Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes: 0,1,...,7,(none) for ...

  • Page 1687

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1657 - Table 12.4.10 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes: 0:Metric (millimeter machine) / 1:In...

  • Page 1688

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1658 - Table 12.4.10 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Coordinate 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position 1241 Machine coordina...

  • Page 1689

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1659 - Explanation There are four periodic maintenance screens: the status screen, the setting screen, the machine menu screen, and the NC menu screen. Status screen : Item names, remaining times, and count statuses are displayed, and item n...

  • Page 1690

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1660 - Fig. 12.4.11 (a) Status screen - Item name As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter t...

  • Page 1691

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1661 - NOTE 1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names. 2 When an item name c...

  • Page 1692

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1662 - Setting screen On the setting screen, the life time, remaining time, and count type of a managed consumable are set. Fig. 12.4.11 (b) Setting screen Display procedure 1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [(OPRT)]....

  • Page 1693

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1663 - Move the cursor to the remaining time of a target registered number, type a remaining time, then press soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The remaining time is then set. When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added t...

  • Page 1694

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1664 - NOTE 1 If [NO CNT], [ALL] or [POWER ON] is set to count type, “--” is displayed. In this case, if the setting is operated, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. 2 If the setting is beyond the valid data range, the warning “...

  • Page 1695

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1665 - Machine menu screen On the machine menu screen, the names of consumables of the machine are registered. From this screen, item names can be added to the status screen. For the method of addition to the status screen, see the descripti...

  • Page 1696

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1666 - Two-byte character codes must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE".) When typing 2-byte characters, type an asterisk "*" before and after the character codes. An item name to ...

  • Page 1697

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1667 - NOTE On the NC screen, the registration, deletion, and I/O of item names cannot be performed. When a blank item name is selected, a blank is set. 12.4.12 System Configuration Screen The system configuration screen provides informat...

  • Page 1698

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1668 - Hardware configuration screen This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC. Fig. 12.4.12 (b) Hardware configuration screen Software configuration screen This screen shows the names and series/editions of the s...

  • Page 1699

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1669 - Fig. 12.4.12 (d) Servo information screen Spindle information screen When a spindle system is connected to the NC, the ID information of the connected spindle devices (spindle motors and spindle amplifiers) can be displayed on the N...

  • Page 1700

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1670 - Fig. 12.4.13 (a) Power consumption monitoring screen for 10.4-inch display unit Procedure for 8.4-inch display unit 1 Press function key . 2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [POWMON] appears. 3 Press soft key ...

  • Page 1701

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1671 - Fig. 12.4.13 (c) Power consumption monitoring screen (Bar-graph) for 8.4-inch display unit Operation of power consumption monitoring screen Switch of display axis When information on all axes is not displayed, the page is switched w...

  • Page 1702

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1672 - Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit 12.4.14 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit) When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order...

  • Page 1703

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1673 - 3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen. Fig. 12.4.14 (b) SETTING screen (15-inch display unit) 4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys. 5 Press horizontal soft key [ON:1] to enable paramete...

  • Page 1704

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1674 - 12.4.15 Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit) This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time of field tuning of the machine tool. Procedure for servo parameter settin...

  • Page 1705

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1675 - 12.4.16 Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit) Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set. Procedure for servo tuning Procedure 1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state. 2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to d...

  • Page 1706

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1676 - 12.4.17 Spindle Setting (15/19-inch Display Unit) Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring ...

  • Page 1707

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1677 - 12.4.18 Spindle Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit) Spindle tuning data is displayed and set. Setting for spindle tuning Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press funct...

  • Page 1708

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1678 - 12.4.19 Spindle Monitor (15/19-inch Display Unit) Spindle-related data is displayed. Displaying the spindle monitor Procedure 1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens. 2 Press functio...

  • Page 1709

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1679 - 12.4.20 Color Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen. Displaying the color setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to ...

  • Page 1710

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1680 - COLOR1 Standard color data parameters (Nos. 6581 to 6595) COLOR2 Parameters (Nos. 10421 to 10435) COLOR3 Parameters (Nos. 10461 to 10475) 2 Press horizontal soft key [MEMORY]. The horizontal soft key display switches to the fo...

  • Page 1711

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1681 - • Ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation • Allowable acceleration rate • Acceleration rate of acceleration/deceleration after interpola...

  • Page 1712

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1682 - 8 In addition to the setting method described above, a parameter setting method using horizontal soft keys is available. Pressing horizontal soft key [INIT] displays the standard value (recommended by FANUC) of the item selected by th...

  • Page 1713

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1683 - Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level: Parameter No. 1772: Time constant for bell-shaped look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation of constant acceleration time type CAUTION ...

  • Page 1714

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1684 - NOTE This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function is enabled. - Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Unit of data: % Set the ratio ...

  • Page 1715

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1685 - The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters: Parameter No. 13624 (velocity-emphasized parameter) Parameter No. 13625 (precision-emphasized parameter) Moreover, the following pa...

  • Page 1716

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1686 - • Tolerance (rotary axis) For details of each parameter, see the descriptions of nano smoothing. By setting bit 0 (MPR) of parameter No. 13601 to 1, this screen can be hidden. For the method of setting a smoothing level, see the des...

  • Page 1717

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1687 - The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen (smoothing) is reflected in the following parameters: Parameter No. 11682 (smoothing level 1) Parameter No. 11683 (smoothing level 10) Moreover, the following parameter is al...

  • Page 1718

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1688 - Fig. 12.4.22 (a) Memory contents display screen (15-inch display unit) 4 Key in a desired address (hexadecimal) then press horizontal soft key [ADDRES SEARCH]. Starting at the specified address, 256-byte data is displayed. (Example...

  • Page 1719

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1689 - WARNING 1 If a memory address that must not be accessed in address search is input, a system alarm is issued. When making an address search, check that the address is accessible and that the address is input correctly. 2 This functio...

  • Page 1720

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1690 - 12.4.23 Parameter Tuning Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the following: 1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine ...

  • Page 1721

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1691 - Fig. 12.4.23.1 (a) Parameter tuning menu screen (15-inch display unit) 5 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or . 6 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen. Retur...

  • Page 1722

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1692 - 3 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "DISABLED". NOTE Part of the setting screens can be displayed also by using a vertical soft key for chapter selection. When these...

  • Page 1723

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1693 - 12.4.23.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15/19-inch display unit) This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified. The parameters can be initialized to the standard...

  • Page 1724

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1694 - NOTE 1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed. 2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits can be input...

  • Page 1725

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1695 - 12.4.23.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen (15/19-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB servo amplifier set...

  • Page 1726

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1696 - 12.4.23.6 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen (15/19-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description...

  • Page 1727

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1697 - 12.4.23.8 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) (15/19-inch display unit) The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified. For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system ...

  • Page 1728

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1698 - 12.4.23.10 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen (15/19-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Tuni...

  • Page 1729

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1699 - 12.4.23.12 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen (15/19-inch display unit) From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the machining parameter tuning ...

  • Page 1730

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1700 - *2 : When intra-path axis number ≤ 8, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path axis number - 1) When intra-path axis number ≥ 9, no standard value is available. Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes: 0,1,...,7,(none) for ...

  • Page 1731

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1701 - Table 12.4.23 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes: 0:Metric (millimeter machine) / 1:In...

  • Page 1732

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1702 - Table 12.4.23 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description Standard setting AXIS SETTING Coordinate 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position 1241 Machine coordina...

  • Page 1733

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1703 - 12.4.24 Periodic Maintenance Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life tim...

  • Page 1734

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1704 - Fig. 12.4.24 (a) Status screen (15-inch display unit) - Item name As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu scre...

  • Page 1735

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1705 - NOTE 1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names. 2 When an item name c...

  • Page 1736

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1706 - Setting screen On the setting screen, the life time, remaining time, and count type of a managed consumable are set. Fig. 12.4.24 (b) Setting screen (15-inch display unit) Display procedure 1 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE]. ...

  • Page 1737

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1707 - A value ranging from 0 to (life time) can be set. When horizontal soft key [ERASE] then horizontal soft key [EXEC] are pressed, the same value as the life time is set. NOTE 1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or ...

  • Page 1738

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1708 - Registration from a program The item name, life time, remaining time, count type and path number can be registered in the status screen and the setting screen by executing the program of the following format. Format G10 L60 Px [n] ...

  • Page 1739

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1709 - - Displaying the screen 1 When the status screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [MACHINE]. On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods: • Registration from a program • R...

  • Page 1740

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1710 - NC menu screen From this screen, an item name can be registered on the status screen. For the method of registration to the status screen, see the description of the status screen. Fig. 12.4.24 (d) NC menu screen (15-inch display un...

  • Page 1741

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1711 - Fig. 12.4.25 (a) System configuration screen (15-inch display unit) Hardware configuration screen This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC. Fig. 12.4.25 (b) Hardware configuration screen Software configu...

  • Page 1742

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1712 - Fig. 12.4.25 (c) Software configuration screen Servo information screen When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo motors and servo amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC. Displ...

  • Page 1743

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1713 - Fig. 12.4.25 (e) Spindle information screen 12.4.26 Power Consumption Monitoring Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) The electric power data of servo axis and spindle axis consumption and regeneration can be displayed. Display of powe...

  • Page 1744

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1714 - Explanation TIME Integrating time of power consumption is displayed. Axis name Axis name of servo and spindle is displayed. "ALL" means the total of all servo and spindle axes. CONSUMP Integral power consumption is display...

  • Page 1745

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1715 - 12.5 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY By pressing the function key , data such as alarms, alarm history, external operator message, and external operator message history data can be displayed. For details of alarms and alarm history...

  • Page 1746

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1716 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3112 OMH [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 OMH The external operator message history screen is: 0: Not displayed. 1: Displayed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3113 MS1 MS0 ...

  • Page 1747

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1717 - NOTE 4 If text (such as single-byte katakana or kanji characters) is entered in character code, the number of characters recorded in the external operator message history may be smaller than the maximum number of characters set by bit...

  • Page 1748

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1718 - 12.6 SWITCHING BETWEEN MULTI-PATH DISPLAY AND SINGLE-PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION Overview In a multi-path system, the screen can be switched between simultaneous multi-path display and single-path display by soft key operation. This functi...

  • Page 1749

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1719 - 4 Press soft key [SINGLE PATH]. The single-path display appears as shown below: 5 Press soft key [MULTI PATHS]. The multi-path display appears. Procedure (15/19-inch display unit) The procedure is explained using the current posi...

  • Page 1750

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1720 - 2 Press horizontal soft key [SINGLE PATH]. The single-path display appears as shown below: 3 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI PATHS]. The multi-path display appears. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11355 MTS [Input ...

  • Page 1751

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1721 - #3 MTS The function for switching between simultaneous multi-path display and single-path display is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11304 PGR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 PGR Wh...

  • Page 1752

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1722 - 12.7 FIVE AXES DISPLAY IN ONE SCREEN FOR THE 8.4-INCH DISPLAY UNIT The positions for up to five axes can be displayed simultaneously on one screen on a 8.4-inch display unit. This function is enabled when bit 4 (9DE) of parameter No. ...

  • Page 1753

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1723 - Overall position display screen Fig. 12.7 (b) Overall position display screen

  • Page 1754

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1724 - Handle interruption screen Fig. 12.7 (c) Handle interruption screen Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11350 9DE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 9DE On 8.4-inch display unit, the maximum number of ax...

  • Page 1755

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1725 - 12.8 PATH NAME EXPANSION DISPLAY FUNCTION The path name expansion display function enlarges the path name displayed at the upper right of the screen, which makes easy to check the currently selected path. Explanation When this functi...

  • Page 1756

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1726 - Table 12.8 (a) Enlarged display character colors and parameters Character color Background color 0: A normal display No. 3 color No. 10 color Bit 0 (PNI) of parameter No. 11352 1: A reverse display No. 10 color No. 3 color Fig. 12...

  • Page 1757

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1727 - NOTE This parameter is effective to 10.4/15/19-inch display units. 3141 Path name (1st character) 3142 Path name (2nd character) 3143 Path name (3rd character) 3144 Path name (4th character) 3145 Path name (5th character) ...

  • Page 1758

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1728 - Automatic screen erasure function When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key. - Screen erasure ...

  • Page 1759

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1729 - 12.10 LOAD METER SCREEN Overview The servo and spindle load meters can be displayed in place of the modal code display part and the remaining travel distance part of the current position display on the program check screen. This funct...

  • Page 1760

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1730 - Screen switching The servo load meter and spindle load meter are displayed by pressing soft key [MONITOR] on the left side of the screen. Initially the servo load meter is displayed. Each time soft key [MONITOR] is pressed, the servo ...

  • Page 1761

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1731 - Fig. 12.10.2 (b) Spindle load meter screen

  • Page 1762

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1732 - Screen switching By pressing soft key [LOAD METER], the screen display can be switched among the modal information display, servo load meter display, and spindle load meter display. Modal information ...

  • Page 1763

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1733 - 13140 First character in spindle load meter display 13141 Second character in spindle load meter display [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte spindle [Valid data range] These parameters set character codes to set the na...

  • Page 1764

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1734 - 12.11 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER/NAME, SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS, AND WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION The program number, program name, sequence number, and current CNC status are always displayed on t...

  • Page 1765

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1735 - When the program number is 5-digit or more, “O” plus a 8-digit numeric is displayed. Fig. 12.11.1 (c) Program number is 5-digit or more 12.11.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation The cu...

  • Page 1766

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1736 - Alternatively, tool retract and recover operation state (The state in which a recover operation and repositioning operation are being performed) (3) Axis moving status/dwell status MTN : Indicates that the axis is moving. DWL : Indi...

  • Page 1767

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1737 - WZR : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (workpiece origin offset value) is set. TOFS : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (tool offset value of the T series) is set. OFSX : Indicates that the active of...

  • Page 1768

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1738 - Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit 12.11.3 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and Sequence Number (15/19-inch Display Unit) The number and name of the program currently selected or currently executed and the current seque...

  • Page 1769

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1739 - 12.11.4 Displaying the Program Name When bit 4 (DPC) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 0, the program name (comment) of main program is displayed between the screen title and O number. Fig. 12.11.4 (a) Program name (15inch) A prog...

  • Page 1770

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1740 - 12.11.5 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit) The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the next to last line ...

  • Page 1771

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 1741 - *** : Indicates a state other than the above. (4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting for the complete signal from the PMC) *** ...

  • Page 1772

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1742 - OFSZ : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (Z-axis tool offset value of the T series) is set. OFSY : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (Y-axis tool offset value of the T series). TCP : Indicates that op...

  • Page 1773

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1743 - 13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION Chapter 13, "GRAPHIC FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 13.1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY .....................................................................................................................1743 13....

  • Page 1774

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1744 - Fig. 13.1 (a) Tool path graphic screen (M series) Fig. 13.1 (b) Tool path graphic screen (T series) - Tool path In a graphic coordinate system set by the graphic parameters described later, a tool path in the workpiece coordinate system is ...

  • Page 1775

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1745 - NOTE Up to three graphic axes are used with the M series, and up to two graphic axes are used with the T series. - Graphic coordinate system On the lower-right portion of the screen, the coordinate axes and axis names of the graphic coordinat...

  • Page 1776

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1746 - - Graphic parameter screen page 2 Fig. 13.1 (d) Graphic parameter screen page 2 On graphic parameter screen page 2, graphic colors, rotation angles, and whether to perform automatic erase operation are set. - Graphic parameter screen page 3...

  • Page 1777

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1747 - T - Graphic parameter screen page 1 Fig. 13.1 (f) Graphic parameter screen page 1 On graphic parameter screen page 1, a graphic coordinate system, graphic range, and so forth are set. In the setting of a graphic coordinate system, the coordin...

  • Page 1778

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1748 - - Graphic parameter screen page 3 Fig. 13.1 (h) Graphic parameter screen page 3 On graphic parameter screen page 3, coordinate axes to be used for drawing are set. Graphic parameter setting Explanation For tool path drawing, a graphic coor...

  • Page 1779

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1749 - T Setting = 0 Setting = 1Setting = 2Setting = 3 Setting = 4 Setting = 5Setting = 6Setting = 7 X ZZZZZ ZZZ XXX X XXX Fig. 13.1 (j) Graphic coordinate system (T series) M - Horizontal rotation angle When a 3-dimensional graphic coordinate syst...

  • Page 1780

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1750 - A vertical rotation axis can be set with the angle with the horizontal axis of the screen on the horizontal plane. This angle can be set with parameter No. 24832. In Fig. 13.1 (l) below, the graphic coordinate system XYZ is converted to X'Y'Z' ...

  • Page 1781

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1751 - NOTE When the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic range are set, the graphic center coordinates and scale are automatically updated. However, when the graphic center coordinates and scale are changed, the maximum values and minimum ...

  • Page 1782

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1752 - Procedure for tool path drawing Procedure - Start of drawing (1) Display the tool path graphic screen. (2) Press the [START] soft key. The state that enables the movement of the tool in automatic operation or manual operation to be drawn is set...

  • Page 1783

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1753 - Before graphic movement After graphic movement Fig. 13.1 (m) Graphic movement (magnification = 2.00) - Procedure for changing the graphic range with a rectangle A tool path can be drawn by enlarging a specified rectangular area. (1) Press...

  • Page 1784

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1754 - 13.2 DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY Overview The dynamic graphic display function has two features: • Path Drawing The path of coordinates specified in a program is drawn on the screen. By displaying a travel path on the screen, the path can be check...

  • Page 1785

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1755 - Fig. 13.2.1.1 (a) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (first page) Fig. 13.2.1.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page) 2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a de...

  • Page 1786

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1756 - - Graphic coordinate system Select a graphic coordinate system for drawing from the following and set its number. Y X Setting=0 (XY) ZYSetting=1 (ZY) ZY Setting=2 (YZ) Z X Setting =3 (XZ) Setting=5 (XYZ) Z XY Setting=6 (YXZ)ZYXXZSetting=4 (ZX...

  • Page 1787

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1757 - Figure Select a type of blank figure from the following (Table 13.2.1.1 (a)) and set the corresponding value: Table 13.2.1.1 (a) Setting Figure 0 Column or cylinder (parallel with the Z-axis) 1 Rectangular parallelepiped Position Set the...

  • Page 1788

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1758 - + - Rotation center Horizontal plane rotation angle Set a rotating angle at the vertical direction center in front of the screen. The rotation direction is as follows. + - Rotation center Screen center rotation angle Set a rotating ang...

  • Page 1789

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1759 - Setting 0: The previously drawn path is not erased. 1: The previously drawn path is erased. - Tool offset(Path) For tool path drawing, whether to enable or disable the tool offset function (tool length compensation, cutter/tool-noise radius ...

  • Page 1790

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1760 - Fig. 13.2.1.2 (b) PATH GRAPHIC screen 3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The soft keys for tool path drawing are displayed. Fig. 13.2.1.2 (c) PATH GRAPHIC screen (operation) 4 Press the continuous menu key to display the soft keys for enlargin...

  • Page 1791

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1761 - Fig. 13.2.1.2 (g) Program list screen ([DRAW SELECT] soft key) Pressing the [DRAW SELECT] soft key selects a drawing target program and switches the screen display to the PATH GRAPHIC screen. The file whose name is prefixed by a "#"...

  • Page 1792

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1762 - The operations of these soft keys are as follows: • [STOP] soft key This soft key terminates the execution of the drawing target program to stop drawing. • [PAUSE] soft key This soft key temporarily stops the execution of the drawing target...

  • Page 1793

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1763 - - End of drawing When M02 or M30 is executed, the program executed for drawing terminates drawing. Upon program termination, the soft key display returns to the soft keys (Fig. 13.2.1.2 (c)) displayed before drawing is started. - Erasing a d...

  • Page 1794

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1764 - - Changing the graphic coordinate system The following soft keys displayed by step 5 are used. A graphic coordinate system selected here is the same one as set in the graphic parameter for the graphic coordinate system. • [XY] soft key This ...

  • Page 1795

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1765 - NOTE 1 Set the travel increment made by one rotation operation in parameter No. 14716. 2 The rotation angle of the graphic coordinate system set here is not set in the graphic parameter for rotation angle. 13.2.1.3 PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) ...

  • Page 1796

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1766 - Fig. 13.2.1.3 (b) PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen For the method of checking the current tool position, see the explanation. Pressing a soft key other than the [TOOL POS] soft key displays the corresponding screen. Explanation Use the f...

  • Page 1797

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1767 - NOTE 3 When the graphic parameter of the graphic coordinate system, scale, graphic range center, blank figure / position / dimensions and rotation angle is changed, the drawn tool path drawn is erased. Therefore, please draw the tool path again...

  • Page 1798

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1768 - Fig. 13.2.2.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page) 2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a desired setting item. 3 Move the cursor to a desired settin...

  • Page 1799

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1769 - Figure Select a type of blank figure from the following and set the corresponding value: Setting Figure 0 Column or cylinder (parallel with the Z-axis) 1 Rectangular parallelepiped Position Set the reference position of a blank with coo...

  • Page 1800

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1770 - - Tool length offset (Anime) For animation drawing, whether to enable or disable the tool length offset can be selected. Setting 0: The tool length offset is disabled for drawing. 1: The tool length offset is enabled for drawing. NOTE In an...

  • Page 1801

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1771 - Animation Graphic Screen Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen. 2 Press the [ANIME EXEC] soft key. The ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen is displayed. ...

  • Page 1802

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1772 - Explanation The operations listed below are the same operations as for the tool path drawing screen. See the explanation of the tool path drawing screen. • Graphic program selection • Rewind of a drawing target program • Starting / Stoppi...

  • Page 1803

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1773 - NOTE 1 Set the travel increment made by one horizontal move operation in parameter No. 14714. 2 Set the travel increment made by one vertical move operation in parameter No. 14715. 3 The graphic range modified here is not set in the graphic para...

  • Page 1804

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1774 - • [CCW] soft key This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system counterclockwise. • [OK] soft key This soft key changes the rotation angle of the current graphic coordinate system to the one set by one of the soft keys above. • [CANCE...

  • Page 1805

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1775 - Tool name Tool geometry size dataTool compensation Parameter No. Point nose straight Setting Tip position No.27366#0 tool Cutting edge angle Cutting edge length No.27367 Tool angle Holder length No.27368 Holder width No.27369 Holder le...

  • Page 1806

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1776 - If the tool geometry size data corresponding to a specified number does not exist or the tool geometry size data is not set correctly, tool drawing is disabled with the warning "ILLEGAL SETTING OF TOOL FIGURE DATA". 13.2.3 Programmabl...

  • Page 1807

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1777 - Blank figure Address I Address J Address K Cylinder Diameter of outer circle of cylinder Diameter of inner circle of cylinder Length of cylinder The specified value are set in parameter No.11345 (address I), parameter No.11346 (address J), and ...

  • Page 1808

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1778 - 13.2.5 Note NOTE 1 The coordinates used in drawing are absolute coordinates. Therefore, even if the coordinate system is changed while it is drawing, it draws in the coordinate system when having begun to draw. 2 The drawing target axes are the ...

  • Page 1809

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1779 - - Functions that operate differently in drawing execution and automatic operation The operations of the following functions in drawing execution differ from the operations in automatic operation: 1. Operations that differ, depending on the cu...

  • Page 1810

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1780 - 5) G10.6 (tool retract data setting) 6) G81.1 (chopping) 7) G25/G26 (spindle variation detection on/off) 8) G10 (programmable data input) NOTE If G10 (programmable data input) is specified, drawing can be temporarily stopped with the warning &...

  • Page 1811

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1781 - NOTE 4 In animation drawing, shape by the movement of back boring cycle command is different from actual shape. 5 In animation drawing, movement to shift amount at the bottom of a hole in the fine boring cycle and back boring cycle command is no...

  • Page 1812

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1782 - • Origin point of the polar coordinate interpolation plane in drawing If bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No. 11329 is 0, the coordinates used for drawing are absolute ones, so that even if the coordinate system is changed with the workpiece coordin...

  • Page 1813

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1783 - NOTE 1 For the G10.9 command in the background operation, the diameter/radius specification switching status signal of the function of dynamic switching of diameter/radius specification is not output. 2 The diameter/radius specification switchin...

  • Page 1814

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1784 - (1) The execution macro specified with system variable #8610 is called. If bit 4 (P98) of compilation parameter No. 9163 is 0, the execution macro is called with an operation equivalent to a simple call (G65), and if P98 is 1, it is called with ...

  • Page 1815

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 1785 - So, when using the VGA window, determine the screen of this function by screen number and close the VGA window before switching the screen display. - Use of the CNC screen display function The following restriction exists when the screen of dy...

  • Page 1816

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1786 - 14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION Chapter 14, "VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY ........................................................................................................

  • Page 1817

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION - 1787 - - Simultaneous pressing of two keys The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET" keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follows: (1) Press the "SPCL" key. The &...

  • Page 1818

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1788 - Operation - Function key page switching Pressing "MENU" located near the lower right corner of the screen switches the screen to page 1, page 2, page 3, and back to page 1 in this order. Function keys on page 1 Function ke...

  • Page 1819

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION - 1789 - Fig. 14.1 (d) Key tops in the shift state - Simultaneous pressing of two keys The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET" keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follow...

  • Page 1820

    15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1790 - 15 TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION 15.1 Template Program Function Overview This function is used to manage machining programs, offsets, parameters and so on in folders, as batches. (Such a folder and the data in it are collectively called mac...

  • Page 1821

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1791 - //CNC_MEM SYSTEM/MTB1/MTB2/USER/xxxx/yyyy/PATH1/xxxx/yyyy/PATH2/TEMPLATE/WORKS/SP_WORK1/ SP_WORKn/ LIBRARY/TMP1/TMPn/ Fig. 15.1.1 (a) Initial folder configuration NOTE TMP1, TMPn, SP_WORK1, and SP_WORKn are examples of user-created f...

  • Page 1822

    15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1792 - Template folder The template folder is for templates of machining data. Folders created here and the programs in the folders are handled as templates of machining data. When new machining data is to be created, it is possible to create ...

  • Page 1823

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1793 - Setting the workpiece origin offset for an additional workpiece coordinate system G10 L20 Pn IP_ ; G11 ; Pn : Specification code of the workpiece coordinate system for which to set a workpiece origin offset n : 1 to 48 or 1 to 300 IP_ ...

  • Page 1824

    15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1794 - 15.1.2 Operation Creating a template A template can be created by only those operators whose operation level is 6 or higher. 1. Display the program folder screen. 2. Move to the template folder. 3. Enter a folder name and press the so...

  • Page 1825

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1795 - 4. A list of templates (list of folders in the template folder) is displayed. Using the up and down cursor keys, select a template, and press the soft key [SELECT]. It is possible to search for a template by entering the name of the te...

  • Page 1826

    15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1796 - When machining data is selected, the program in the folder that is named "machining-data-name.TEMPL" is selected as a program for automatic operation. The selected machining data folder is set as a foreground folder and a back...

  • Page 1827

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1797 - Storage file name The name entered in the key-in buffer before pressing [EXEC] in step 5 of the above procedure will be the storage file name. Up to 32 characters can be specified as a storage file name. If no storage file name is spec...

  • Page 1828

    15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1798 - 15.1.3 Protection Function Protecting the template folder The template folder is protected with the 8-level data protection function. The template folder is not displayed to those operators whose operation level is lower than 6. Those ...

  • Page 1829

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION 15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION - 1799 - • It is not possible to make insertions into, make changes to, and make deletions from a block that has (R) at the beginning. • It is not possible to make insertions, changes, deletions, and replacements that will cause (R) to appea...

  • Page 1830

    15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1800 - 15.1.4 Limitations • This function cannot be used together with the limitations of folder manipulation due to bit 6 (FPF) of parameter No. 11302 and bit 7 (CFP) of parameter No. 11304. The settings of FPF and CFP of these parameters a...

  • Page 1831

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1801 - 16.MULTI-PATH PROGRAMMANAGEMENT FUNCTION16 MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 16.1 MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION Overview The multi-path lathe and the complex machine that have plural turret or head machine work piece by two or more machining programs...

  • Page 1832

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1802 - 16. MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 16.1.1.1 Multi-path program folder The folder, in which the main programs and the subprograms of each path necessary for the machining, is called the "Multi-path program folder". Moreover, various data necessary...

  • Page 1833

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1803 - 16.MULTI-PATH PROGRAMMANAGEMENT FUNCTIONExample) When the Multi-path program folder named SHAFT (Three paths system) is created. Main program (SHAFT.P-1, SHAFT.P-2, SHAFT.P-3) in each path is automatically created. NOTE 1 The Multi-path progr...

  • Page 1834

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1804 - 16. MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 16.1.1.3 Edit of multi-path program By following procedures, main programs can be displayed and edited at the same time by arranging on one screen. Programs of up to three paths can be displayed simultaneously. 1 Perf...

  • Page 1835

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1805 - 16.MULTI-PATH PROGRAMMANAGEMENT FUNCTION NOTE 1 If the main program does not exist even in one path, warning message "MAIN PROG OF NUM OF PATH IS DEFICIENT" is displayed, and it is not possible to select the Multi-path program. If there is a path not use...

  • Page 1836

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1806 - 16. MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 7 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 8 Press the soft key [P GET] or type the name of Multi-path program folder. 9 Press the soft key [FOLDER SET]. 10 Press the soft key [P GET] or type the output file name. 11 P...

  • Page 1837

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1807 - 16.MULTI-PATH PROGRAMMANAGEMENT FUNCTIONMain program of path 1 Main program of path 2 Main program of path 3 Subprogram 4 Select the WORKS folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/WORKS/). 5 Press the soft key [READ]. 6 Type the input file name, and press the soft key [F SET]...

  • Page 1838

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1808 - 16. MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 16.1.1.6 Name change of the multi-path program folder The name of Multi-path program folder and main programs in the folder can be changed simultaneously. 1 Select “all paths EDIT mode”. 2 Press function key . ...

  • Page 1839

    B-64484EN/03 OPERATION - 1809 - 16.MULTI-PATH PROGRAMMANAGEMENT FUNCTION 6 Move the cursor to the check box of "CAN NOT ENTER MULTIPATH PROG FOLDER", by pressing the key. 7 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 8 Press the soft key [OFF:0]. By this operation it becomes possible to select t...

  • Page 1840

    OPERATION B-64484EN/03 - 1810 - 16. MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION NOTE 1 When the check mark is put in this item while displaying the folder in the Multi-path program folder on the program folder screen, the protection function doesn't become effective for the folder under the display. ...

  • Page 1841

    IV. MAINTENANCE

  • Page 1842

  • Page 1843

    B-64484EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1813 - 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE This chapter describes routine maintenance work that the operator can perform when using the CNC. WARNING Only those persons who have been educated for maintenance and safety may perform maintenance work not describe...

  • Page 1844

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64484EN/03 - 1814 - 1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED If an unexpected operation occurs or an alarm or warning is output when the CNC and machine are used, the problem needs to be solved quickly. For this purpose, the status of the problem must be ...

  • Page 1845

    B-64484EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1815 - 1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS With the CNC, various data items such as offset data and system parameters are stored in the SRAM of the control unit and are protected by a backup battery. However, an accident can erase the data. By storin...

  • Page 1846

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64484EN/03 - 1816 - CAUTION Before recovery of the following data items, consult with the machine tool builder of the machine used: • System parameters • PMC data • Macro programs and custom macro variables • Pitch error compensation values NOTE The...

  • Page 1847

    B-64484EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1817 - 1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY This chapter describes how to replace the control unit backup battery and absolute Pulsecoder battery. This section consists of the following subsections: 1.3.1 Replacing Battery for Control Unit................

  • Page 1848

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64484EN/03 - 1818 - 1.3.1 Replacing Battery for Control Unit When using a lithium battery (for LCD-mounted type control unit) Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0323-K102). <1> Turn the power to the machine (control unit) on. After about ...

  • Page 1849

    B-64484EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1819 - CAUTION Steps <1> to <3> should be completed within 30 minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost. If steps <1> to <...

  • Page 1850

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64484EN/03 - 1820 - <5> Reinstall the cover onto the battery case. CAUTION In the power-off state, the battery should be replaced as in the case of the lithium battery, which is descried above. Connection terminal on the back Case4 mounting holes 2 ...

  • Page 1851

    B-64484EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1821 - 1.3.2 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the PANEL i. This battery is factory-set in the PANEL i. This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year. When the battery voltage b...

  • Page 1852

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64484EN/03 - 1822 - 1.3.3 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders 1.3.3.1 Overview • When the voltage of the batteries for absolute Pulsecoders becomes low, alarm 307 or 306 occurs, with the following indication in the CNC state display at the bottom of th...

  • Page 1853

    B-64484EN/03 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - 1823 - WARNING • The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the αi/αi S series servo motors and the βi S series servo motors (βi S0.4 to βi S22) has a built-in backup capacitor. Therefore, even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the b...

  • Page 1854

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64484EN/03 - 1824 - CAUTION • Purchase the battery from FANUC because it is not commercially available. It is therefore recommended that you have a backup battery. • When the built-in battery is used, do not connect BATL (B3) of connector CXA2A/CXA2B. Also...

  • Page 1855

    APPENDIX

  • Page 1856

  • Page 1857

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1827 - A PARAMETERS This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual. For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other parameters, refer to the parameter manual. NOTE A parameter that is valid with only one of the path contro...

  • Page 1858

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1828 - NOTE 4 When EIA code is used for data output (ISO = 0), set bit 3 (ASI) of parameter No.101 and 111 and 121 to 0. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0001 FCV [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #1 FCV Program format 0: Series 16 standa...

  • Page 1859

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1829 - The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external input/output device and the host computer: Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2) Memory card interface Data server interface Embedded Ethernet...

  • Page 1860

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1830 - #0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using 0: ASCII codes. 1: ISO codes. NOTE See Appendix J, "ISO/ASCII code conversion tool" for conversion between ISO and ASCII code. WARNING 1 Unless ...

  • Page 1861

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1831 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Set the path control type of each path. The following two path control types are available: T series (lathe system) : 0 M series (machining system) : 1

  • Page 1862

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1832 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1001 INM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0: In mm ...

  • Page 1863

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1833 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1004 IPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #7 IPR When a number with no decimal point is specified, the least input increment of each axis is: 0: Not 10 times greater than the least command increme...

  • Page 1864

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1834 - #0 ROTx Setting linear or rotary axis. #1 ROSx Setting linear or rotary axis. ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°) (3) Stored pitch erro...

  • Page 1865

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1835 - #5 G90x A command for a rotary axis control is: 0: Regarded as an absolute/incremental programming according to the G90/G91 mode setting. 1: Regarded as an absolute programming at all times. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 RRLx RABx ROAx [In...

  • Page 1866

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1836 - #0 ISAx #1 ISCx #2 ISDx #3 ISEx Increment system of each axis Increment system Bit 3 (ISE) Bit 2 (ISD) Bit 1 (ISC) Bit 0 (ISA) IS-A 0 0 0 1 IS-B 0 0 0 0 IS-C 0 0 1 0 IS-D 0 1 0 0 IS-E 1 0 0 0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1015 DWT [Inp...

  • Page 1867

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1837 - NOTE 3 When the custom macro function is enabled, the same extended axis name as a reserved word cannot be used. Such an extended axis name is regarded as a reserved word. Because of reserved words of custom macros, extended axis names that start with ...

  • Page 1868

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1838 - Example) When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis by using the first spindle, set -1. • For tandem controlled axes or electronic gear box (EGB) controlled axes, two axes need to be specified as one pair. So, make a setting as d...

  • Page 1869

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1839 - NOTE ZPR is valid while a workpiece coordinate system function is not provided. If a workpiece coordinate system function is provided, making a manual reference position return always causes the workpiece coordinate system to be established on the basi...

  • Page 1870

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1840 - Program example G90 G17 G54 G68.2 X_Y_Z_ I_ J_ K_ G53.1 G43H_ G55 X_Y_Z_ G56 X_Y_Z_ G57 X_Y_Z_ G49 G69 Machine zero point X_Y_Z_: Coordinate system zero point shift amount G54 Coordinate system zero point shift amount Feature coordinate system (G68.2)...

  • Page 1871

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1841 - 1244 Coordinate value of the floating reference position in the machine coordinate system [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the ap...

  • Page 1872

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1842 - NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, the alarm is issued if the tool enters stored stroke limit 1 during automatic operation. #2 LMS The stored stroke check 1 select signal (EXLM3, EXLM2, or EXLM when stored stroke check 1 area expansion is used) f...

  • Page 1873

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1843 - NOTE 1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter programming is specified. 2 The area outside the area set by parameters Nos. 1320 and 1321 is a prohibited area. 1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on...

  • Page 1874

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1844 - 1353 Coordinate value IV of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis 1354 Coordinate value V of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis 1355 Coordinate value V of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direct...

  • Page 1875

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1845 - #0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time to the completion of the reference position return. 0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.) 1: Enabled #1 LRP Positioning (G00) 0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positio...

  • Page 1876

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1846 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FC0 FM3 1404 FC0 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 FM3 The increment system of an F command without a decimal point in feed per minute is: 0: 1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min for inch input) 1: 0....

  • Page 1877

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1847 - Set the dry run rate at the 100% position on the jog feedrate specification dial. The unit of data depends on the increment system of the reference axis. 1411 Cutting feedrate NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before op...

  • Page 1878

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1848 - Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis. 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit...

  • Page 1879

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1849 - [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)...

  • Page 1880

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1850 - NOTE 1 To this feedrate setting 100%, a rapid traverse override (F0, 25, 50, or 100%) is applicable. 2 For automatic return after completion of reference position return and machine coordinate system establishment, the normal rapid traverse rate is used...

  • Page 1881

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1851 - Set a maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode such as AI contour control. When the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode is not set, the maximum cutting feedrate set in parameter No...

  • Page 1882

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1852 - niFF100max=Δ (where, i=1 or 2) In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions of the manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained. Fmaxi refers to the upper limit of the feedrate for a one-digit F code feed co...

  • Page 1883

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1853 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1490 PGF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #7 PGF The feedrate specified for circular interpolation, involute interpolation, spiral/conical interpolation, and NURBS interpolation in the high-spee...

  • Page 1884

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1854 - #0 SHP When automatic operation is started, the state equivalent to the specification of G5.1Q1 for AI contour control is: 0: Not set 1: Set Upon reset, the state where G5.1Q1 is specified is set. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1606 MNJx [Input ...

  • Page 1885

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1855 - For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration Speed Rapid traverse rate (Parameter No. 1420) Time T1 T2T2 T2T2 T1 T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620 T2 : Setting of parameter No. 1621 (However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.) Total acceleration (decelerat...

  • Page 1886

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1856 - If 0 is set, the specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed. If a maximum allowable acceleration rate set for one axis is greater than a maximum allowable acc...

  • Page 1887

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1857 - Feedrate in tangent directionM axim um acceleration rate not exceedingmaximum allow able acceleration rate set byparam eter N o. 1671 for each axis isautom atically calculated.T im e set by param eter N o. 1672(A )(B )(B )(B )(B )(A )(A )(C )(C ) 1710 ...

  • Page 1888

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1858 - 1712 Override value for inner corner override [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding. 1713 Start distance (Le) for inner c...

  • Page 1889

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1859 - [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) With the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation, an optimum feedrate is automatically calculated so...

  • Page 1890

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1860 - In circular interpolation, however, the deceleration function based on feedrate control using acceleration in circular interpolation (parameter No. 1735) is enabled. 1738 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration i...

  • Page 1891

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1861 - Feedrate in tangent directionOptimum inclination is automaticallycalculated from the setting of parameterNo. 1660.Time set by parameter No. 1772(A)(B)(B)(B)(B)(A)(A)(C)(C) 1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on ...

  • Page 1892

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1862 - Set a maximum allowable acceleration change rate for each axis in feedrate control based on acceleration change under control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive linear interpolation operations. In feedrate control based on acceleration ...

  • Page 1893

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1863 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1802 DC2x DC4x [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #1 DC4x When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks: 0: An absolute position is established by detecting thr...

  • Page 1894

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1864 - #4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position detector is used 0: Not corresponding 1: Corresponding When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after the absol...

  • Page 1895

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1865 - #1 RF2x If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (reference position establishment signal ZRF = 0) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute address reference marks...

  • Page 1896

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1866 - Relationship between the increment system and the least command increment (1) T series Least input increment Least command increment0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm Millimeter input 0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch (diame...

  • Page 1897

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1867 - Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and the capacity of the reference counter least command increment ×CMR Error counter DA Converter ×DMRPosition detectorReference counter Command pulse Feedback pulse Detection unit To velocity ...

  • Page 1898

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1868 - [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 Set a reference counter size. As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference position return based on the grid method. When a value less than 0 is set, the specificatio...

  • Page 1899

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1869 - 1841 Position deviation limit of each axis in moving state during other than Dual Check Safety monitoring (for Dual Check Safety Function) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Para...

  • Page 1900

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1870 - [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] -999999999 to 999999999 1884 Distance 2 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference marks) or di...

  • Page 1901

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1871 - [Example of parameter settings] When an encoder as shown Fig. A.1 (b) is used with an IS-B, millimeter machine: 20.000 19.980 9.94010.0609.960 10.040 9.980 10.0205.00020.000mm20.020mm -[9960/(20020-20000)*20000+5000] = -9965000Mark 1Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark...

  • Page 1902

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1872 - Mark 1Mark 2Mark 1Mark 2Mark 1Mark 1 Mark 2Reference position 10.020 9.98010.0409.96010.0609.940Base point 20.000 20.020 Fig. A.1 (c) If the reference position is located in the positive direction when viewed from the base point, set a positive val...

  • Page 1903

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1873 - #0 FMD The FSSB setting mode is: 0: Automatic setting mode. (When the relationship between an axis and amplifier is defined on the FSSB setting screen, parameters Nos. 1023, 2013#0, 2014#0, 3717, 11802#4, 24000 to 24103 are automatically set. 1: Manua...

  • Page 1904

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1874 - Set the same value for two axes that are placed under axis synchronous control. The servo axis numbers of the synchronized master axis and slave axis must be assigned so that an odd number is assigned to the master axis and the next axis number is assig...

  • Page 1905

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1875 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3002 OVM POV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 POV Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. #7 OVM In Dwell/Auxiliary function time override function, overrid...

  • Page 1906

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1876 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: <X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>, <X0600 to...

  • Page 1907

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1877 - Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement position arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (M series) or XAE and ZAE (T series)), and tool offset write signals (±MIT1 and ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned. Example 1...

  • Page 1908

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1878 - Value of parameter No. 3021 (the first digit) Setting value Input signal address Output signal address 0 0 0 1 1 1 : 7 7 7 [Example of setting] Axis number No. 3021 Signal allocation 1 0 +J1<G0100.0>, -J1<G0102.0>, ZP1<F0090.0>, ......

  • Page 1909

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1879 - [Example of setting] Spindle number No. 3022 Signal allocation 1 0 TLMLA<G0070.0>, TLMHA<G0070.1>, ALMA<F0045.0>, ... 2 1 TLMLB<G0074.0>, TLMHB<G0074.1>, ALMB<F0049.0>, ... 3 10 TLMLA<G1070.0>, TLMHA<G1070.1&...

  • Page 1910

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1880 - #3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set 0: Not preset 1: Preset NOTE If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position display: (1) ...

  • Page 1911

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1881 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3107 MDL SOR [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #4 SOR Display of the program directory 0: Programs are listed in the order of registration. 1: Programs are listed in the order of name. NOTE In the ...

  • Page 1912

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1882 - NOTE When using the electronic gear box (EGB) function, set 1 for the EGB dummy axis to disable current position display. #1 NDAx The current position and the amount of the movement to be made in absolute and relative coordinates are: 0: Displayed. ...

  • Page 1913

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1883 - NOTE If even one axis in a path uses an extended axis name when bit 2 (EAS) of parameter No. 11308 is set to 0, subscripts cannot be used for axis names in the path. 3141 Path name (1st character) 3142 Path name (2nd character) 3143 Path name (3r...

  • Page 1914

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1884 - #0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999 0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, progra...

  • Page 1915

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1885 - #6 MER When the last block of a program has been executed at single block operation in the MDI mode, the executed block is: 0: Not deleted 1: Deleted NOTE When MER is set to 0, the program is deleted if the end-of-record mark (%) is read and execut...

  • Page 1916

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1886 - 3210 Program protection (PSW) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets a password for protecting program Nos. 9000 to 9999. When a value other than zero is set in this parameter and this va...

  • Page 1917

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1887 - [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 When the same value as the password (PSW) is set in this parameter, the lock is released (unlock state). The value set in this parameter is not displayed. The value of this parameter is initialized to 0 automatically whe...

  • Page 1918

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1888 - NOTE When an M198 external subprogram call or DNC operation is performed on the Data Server, set this bit to 0. For the foreground and background folders, refer to Chapter, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT". #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3280 NLC ...

  • Page 1919

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1889 - #1 MGC When a single block specifies multiple M commands, an M code group check is: 0: Made. 1: Not made. #5 PGD The G10.9 command (programmable diameter/radius specification switching) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. NOTE 1 The option for the diamet...

  • Page 1920

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1890 - NOTE G code system B and G code system C are optional functions. When no option is selected, G code system A is used, regardless of the setting of these parameters. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G23 CLR FPM G91 G01 3402 G23 CLR G91 G19 G18 G01 [I...

  • Page 1921

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1891 - NOTE The following notes apply when this parameter is set to 1: 1 When two or more M codes are acceptable to one block, up to three M codes can be specified in the same block. Specifying more than three results in the alarm PS5074. 2 You can specify a...

  • Page 1922

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1892 - #2 SBP In an external device subprogram call, the address P format is based on: 0: File number specification 1: Program number specification NOTE In memory card operation, the program number specification format is used, regardless of the setting of...

  • Page 1923

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1893 - #1 DWL The dwell time (G04) is: 0: Always dwell per second. 1: Dwell per second in the feed per minute mode (G94), or dwell per rotation in the feed per rotation mode (G95). #3 G36 As a G code to be used with the automatic tool length measurement f...

  • Page 1924

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1894 - Parameter G code group C03 03 : : C30 30 3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range]...

  • Page 1925

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1895 - When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameters Nos. 3421 and 3422, 3423 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432, buffering for the next block is not performed until the execution of the block is com...

  • Page 1926

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1896 - #7 BDX When ASCII code is called using the same address as the address for the second auxiliary function (specified by parameter No. 3460), this parameter prevents the argument unit used when the option for the second auxiliary function is selected f...

  • Page 1927

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1897 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3454 G1B DTO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #2 DTO The method of specifying a rotation axis in cylindrical interpolation mode is set. 0: In cylindrical interpolation mode, the rotation axis is sp...

  • Page 1928

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1898 - NOTE 1 The parameters LIB, MC2, MC1, and SYS are used to set a search folder for the following subprogram/macro calls: • Subprogram call based on an M code • Subprogram call based on a particular address • Subprogram call based on a second auxilia...

  • Page 1929

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1899 - 3) MTB-dedicated folder 2, which is an initial folder (MTB2) 4) MTB-dedicated folder 1, which is an initial folder (MTB1) 5) System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM) The folders of 2) through 5) can be excluded from search target folders by se...

  • Page 1930

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1900 - When ESL is 0, the alarm SR1090, "PROGRAM FORMAT ERROR" is displayed upon registration or comparison. During operation, the alarm PS1090, "PROGRAM FORMAT ERROR" is issued. NOTE 1 Program transfer by the program batch input/output fu...

  • Page 1931

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1901 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3602 APE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 APE The input type of Stored Pitch Error Compensation data is...

  • Page 1932

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1902 - 3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Vali...

  • Page 1933

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1903 - Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = maximum feedrate/7500 Unit : mm, inch, deg or mm/min, inch/min, deg/min [Example] When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions i...

  • Page 1934

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1904 - 3627 Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference position is made from the direction opposite to the direction of reference position return NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before opera...

  • Page 1935

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1905 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3700 NRF CRF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 CRF Reference position setting at an arbitrary position under Cs contour control is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. NOTE When this function is used, an at...

  • Page 1936

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1906 - NOTE 1 When an analog spindle is used, the option for spindle analog output is required. 2 When a serial spindle is used, the option for spindle serial output is required. 3 The option for the number of controlled spindles needs to be specified. 3717 ...

  • Page 1937

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1907 - Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No.3736) Spindle speed command (S command) Max. speed (4095, 10V)Spindle motor minimum clamp speed (Parameter No.3735) Spindle motor speedGear 1 Max. speed(Parameter No.3741) Gear 2 Max. speed(Parameter No.37...

  • Page 1938

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1908 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4900 FDTs FDEs FLRs [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle #0 FLRs When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, the unit of an allowable ratio (q) and fluctuation ratio (r) set by pa...

  • Page 1939

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1909 - NOTE 1 If bit 4 (FDE) of parameter No. 4900 is 0 for all spindles, spindle speed fluctuation detection is enabled for the spindle selected with the position coder selection signal as is conventionally. If the parameter FDE is 1 for all spindles, spindle...

  • Page 1940

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1910 - [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 99999 When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, set an allowable fluctuation width (i) for not issuing an alarm. 4914 Time (p) from the change of a specified speed until spindle speed ...

  • Page 1941

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1911 - 4961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Valid data range] 6 to 97 Set an M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode on the spindle positioning axis. NOTE 1 Do not set an M c...

  • Page 1942

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1912 - [Data type] Real spindle [Unit of data] Degree [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 0 to 60 This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for half-fixed angle positioning using M codes. 49...

  • Page 1943

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1913 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EVO 5001 EVO TAL TLB TLC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 TLC #1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type. Type TLB TLC Tool length compensation A 0 0 Tool len...

  • Page 1944

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1914 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 SUV SUP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 SUP #1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of tool radius - tool nose radius compensation. SUV SUP Type Operation...

  • Page 1945

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1915 - NOTE This parameter is valid only for an axis based on diameter specification. For an axis based on radius specification, specify a radius value, regardless of the setting of this parameter. #2 ODI The setting of a tool radius - tool nose radius co...

  • Page 1946

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1916 - When using memories common to paths, set the number of common tool compensation values in this parameter. Ensure that the setting of this parameter does not exceed the number of tool compensation values set for each path (parameter No. 5024). [Example ...

  • Page 1947

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1917 - WARNING Before changing the setting of this parameter, cancel the offset. If the setting is changed while the offset is applied, the subsequent offset operation may not be performed correctly or an alarm PS0368 occurs. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5042 ...

  • Page 1948

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1918 - [Input type] Parameter Input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axis This parameter specifies the controlled axis numbers of the first and second axis for which grinding-wheel wear compensation is applied. 5081 1st-...

  • Page 1949

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1919 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5105 TFA #5 TFA During tool center point control or tool length compensation in tool axis direction, canned cycles: 0: Cannot be used. 1: Can be used. However, an alarm PS5424, “ILLEGAL TOOL DIRECTION” is issued ...

  • Page 1950

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1920 - Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72) 5177 Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle(G77) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of control...

  • Page 1951

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1921 - NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, an alarm PS0456, “ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN GRINDING” is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed w...

  • Page 1952

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1922 - NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or grinding axis is specified, an alarm PS0456, “ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN GRINDING” is issued at the time of execution...

  • Page 1953

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1923 - #2 CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, 01 group G code, reset, etc.) : 0: Canceled after rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to “0”. 1: Canceled before rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to “0”. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2...

  • Page 1954

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1924 - 5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first gear) 5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second gear) 5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third gear) Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (fourth gear) 5244 [Input type]...

  • Page 1955

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1925 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5401 SCLx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #0 SCLx Scaling on this axis: 0: Invalidated 1: Validated #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5402 DMK [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit pat...

  • Page 1956

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1926 - This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first spindle to the third spindle (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a s...

  • Page 1957

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1927 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets control axis numbers of linear axis to execute polar interpolation. 5461 Axis (rotation axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation [Input type] ...

  • Page 1958

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1928 - N1 Tool center path N2 Travel distance Programmed pathFor straight line When the travel distance of N2 in the figure on the left does not exceed the setting, block N2 is machined with the tool being normal to block N1. N3Diameter Programmed path Tool c...

  • Page 1959

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1929 - This parameter sets an amount of linear axis division in exponential interpolation when bit 0 (SPN) of parameter No. 5630 is set to 0 or when address K is not specified.

  • Page 1960

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1930 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBM HGO MGO G67 6000 SBM HGO V15 MGO G67 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 G67 If the macro modal call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro modal call mode (G66/G66.1) is not set: ...

  • Page 1961

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1931 - If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To cont...

  • Page 1962

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1932 - #6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are: 0: Cleared to <null> by reset 1: Not cleared by reset NOTE Cleared variables are as the table according to the combination of added options. Option “Addition of custom mac...

  • Page 1963

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1933 - #2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5140: 0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation memories are available.) 1: An interru...

  • Page 1964

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1934 - #4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows: 0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications. 1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed. [Example] When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local varia...

  • Page 1965

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1935 - #7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments: 0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined. 1: Argument specification I is always used. Example When K_J_I_ is specified: • When this parameter is set to 0: Argument speci...

  • Page 1966

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1936 - [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path *0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set. =0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set. #0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or IS...

  • Page 1967

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1937 - #2 DPD When argument D is specified for a macro call without a decimal point, the number of decimal places: 0: Is assumed to be 0. [Example] When G65PppppD1 is specified, #7=1.0000 is passed as the argument. 1: Depends on the increment system of the...

  • Page 1968

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1938 - Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 ...

  • Page 1969

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1939 - NOTE 1 To use up to #199, the option for adding custom macro common variables is required. 2 To use up to #499, the embedded macro option is required. 3 When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is not used. 4 When the option for emb...

  • Page 1970

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1940 - Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value s...

  • Page 1971

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1941 - Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes with a decimal point at a time. With G codes with a decimal point as many as the value set in parameter No. 6043 starting with the G code with a decimal point set in parameter No. 60...

  • Page 1972

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1942 - Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set i...

  • Page 1973

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1943 - NOTE 1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these parameters are disabled: 1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each parameter 2) (Value of parameter No. 6048 + value of parameter No. 6049 - 1) > 9999 2 ...

  • Page 1974

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1944 - 6069 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9049 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] -999 to 999 Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9040 to 9049. H...

  • Page 1975

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1945 - 6085 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9025 6086 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9026 6087 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9027 6088 M code used to call the custom macro of progra...

  • Page 1976

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1946 - Address Parameter setting value T series M series X 88 X O Y 89 X O Z 90 X O NOTE 1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified. 2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called. 6093 Top address of custom macro interface signal R address (i...

  • Page 1977

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1947 - This parameter sets the number of digits after the decimal point in two values to be compared using the custom macro relational operator. The two values are rounded off to the specified number of digits before comparison. NOTE 1 This function is enable...

  • Page 1978

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1948 - [Data type] Bit path #1 SEB When a skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on while the skip function, or the automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the accumulated pulses and ...

  • Page 1979

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1949 - Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled Parameter Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 Bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 Bit 7 (SKPXE) of parameter No .6201 Skip signal SKIPP Skip signal SKIP Multistage skip signals SKIP2-SKIP8 0 0 0 Disabled Enab...

  • Page 1980

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1950 - 1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8 Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip function. The following table shows the ...

  • Page 1981

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1951 - #2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is: 0: Feedrate of a programmed F code. 1: Feedrate set in a parameter from...

  • Page 1982

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1952 - Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)High-speed skip signals These signals are ignored. 6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] 2msec [Valid data r...

  • Page 1983

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1953 - NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285. 6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) 6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) 6284 Feedrate for the skip function ...

  • Page 1984

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1954 - When 16 groups of five are used, the meanings of parameters are changed as follows: Group A No. 6411(1) to No. 6415(5) Group B No. 6416(1) to No. 6420(5) : Group P No. 6486(1) to No. 6490(5) When 10 groups of eight are used, they are changed as foll...

  • Page 1985

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1955 - (3) Cycle start lamp signal STL<Fn000.5> is set to 1. (4) Check mode input signal MMOD<Gn067.2> is set to 1. (5) Handle input signal MCHK<Gn067.3> is set to 1 in the check mode. #6 HST When the manual handle retrace function is used...

  • Page 1986

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1956 - This parameter sets an override value (equivalence) for clamping the rapid traverse rate used with the manual handle retrace function. If a value greater than 100 is set in parameter No. 6405, the rapid traverse rate is clamped to an override of 100%. T...

  • Page 1987

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1957 - 6443 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (1) to to 6446 M code of group I in manual handle retrace (4) 6447 M code of group J in manual handle retrace (1) to to 6450 M code of group J in manual handle retrace (4) 6451 M code of group K i...

  • Page 1988

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1958 - For an M code which is not set in any group by any of the above parameters, the M code for forward movement is output. With these parameters, an M code in the same group can be output in backward movement only when the M code is the first M code in each...

  • Page 1989

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1959 - 6711 Number of machined parts [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specifie...

  • Page 1990

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1960 - 6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2 [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automati...

  • Page 1991

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1961 - NOTE After changing this parameter, set data again by using G10 L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups). #3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signals TL01 to TL512 <Gn047.0 to Gn048.1>, the group number is: 0: Not input by the t...

  • Page 1992

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1962 - #3 EMD In the tool life management function, the mark "*" indicating that the life has expired is displayed when: 0: The next tool is used. 1: The life has just expired. NOTE If this parameter is set to 0, the "@" mark (indicatin...

  • Page 1993

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1963 - T If the life count is specified by use count, when a tool group command (T code) is specified after the M99 command is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is selected from a specified group, and the tool life counter is incremented by one. ...

  • Page 1994

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1964 - #4 ARL Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3> of tool life management is: 0: Output for each tool. 1: Output for the last tool of a group. This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is set to 1. #5 TGN In the...

  • Page 1995

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1965 - The tool life arrival notice signal is turned off when one of the following operations is performed for the currently used group: • Clears the execution data on the tool life management list screen. • Deletes all tool group data at a time, adds a to...

  • Page 1996

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1966 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6805 TAD TRU TRS LFB FGL FCO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows: 0: Every second. 1: Every 0.1 second. Acc...

  • Page 1997

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1967 - NOTE If the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 1), cutting time less than 0.1 second is always rounded up and is counted as 0.1 second. #7 TAD With tool change type D (bit 7 (M6E) of parameter No. 6801 is s...

  • Page 1998

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1968 - This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight. When the tool life management function is not used, 0 must be set. Set this parameter so that the total number of groups...

  • Page 1999

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1969 - 6930 Maximum value of the operating range of the 1st position switch (PSW101) 6931 Maximum value of the operating range of the 2nd position switch (PSW102) to to 6945 Maximum value of the operating range of the 16th position switch (PSW116) [Inpu...

  • Page 2000

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1970 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7001 JST MIT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 MIT Manual intervention and return function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #2 JST In manual numerical specification, the cycle start lamp signal ...

  • Page 2001

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1971 - #2 RPS When the tool retract signal TRESC <Gn059.0> is set to “1” after G10.6 is specified alone: 0: The tool is not retracted. 1: The tool is retracted with the value set for parameter No. 7041 or 11261 used as the incremental retraction di...

  • Page 2002

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1972 - #1 THD In the TEACH IN JOG mode, the manual pulse generator is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #3 HCL The clearing of handle interruption amount display by soft key [CAN] operation is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7102 HNGx...

  • Page 2003

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1973 - Other than 0: The feedrate is clamped to the rapid traverse rate. However, those handle pulses that exceed the rapid traverse rate are not ignored. In connection with the manual handle feed travel distance selection signals MP1 and MP2 <Gn019.4, G...

  • Page 2004

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1974 - #3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed #4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run se...

  • Page 2005

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1975 - [Example] Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. <8↑> to the positive direction of the Z axis, <2↓> to the negative d...

  • Page 2006

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1976 - 7310 Ordinal number of an axis along which a movement is made in dry run after program restart [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to (Number of controlled axes) This parameter sets the ordinal number of an axis alo...

  • Page 2007

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1977 - [Data type] Bit path #4 LC1 #5 LC2 LC2 LC1 End timing of servo learning function during high-speed cycle cutting retract function 0 0 Disables the servo learning function, after which retract operation starts. 0 1 Disables the servo learning fun...

  • Page 2008

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1978 - NOTE If data distributed at one time is longer than one word because of the least input increment and the maximum feedrate, this parameter is used. If bit parameter HUN is set to 1 for an axis, high-speed cycle machining/high-speed binary program opera...

  • Page 2009

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1979 - Since variables are sequentially assigned to each path from path 1 to path 2 and so on, to some paths, the specified number of variables may not be assigned depending on the setting. When this parameter is set to 0 for all paths, however, all variables ...

  • Page 2010

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1980 - [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets the control axis number of a rotation tool axis used for polygon turning. However, when a G51.2 command is executed by setting 0 in this parameter, operation stops with the alarm PS03...

  • Page 2011

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1981 - 7641 Polygon synchronous axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Within a path) This parameter sets the polygon synchronous (slave) axis in...

  • Page 2012

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1982 - 7643 Polygon synchronous axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning (spindle number common to the system) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Common to the system) This parameter ...

  • Page 2013

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1983 - When HDR = 1 +C C : +, Z : +, P : + Compensation direction:+ (a) -Z +Z +CC : +, Z : +, P : - Compensation direction:-(b)+CC : +, Z : -, P : + Compensation direction:-(c)+C C : +, Z : -, P : - Compensation direction:+ (d) -Z +Z C : -, Z : +, P : + C : Co...

  • Page 2014

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1984 - #3 ART The retract function executed when an alarm is issued is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. When an alarm is issued, a retract operation is performed with a set feedrate and travel distance (parameters Nos. 7740 and 7741). NOTE If a servo alarm is iss...

  • Page 2015

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1985 - NOTE 1 Parameters ARE and ARO are valid when bit 3 (ART) of parameter No. 7702 is set to 1 (when the retract function executed when an alarm is issued ). 2 This parameter is valid when bit 1 (ARE) of parameter No. 7703 is set to 1. 7710 Axis number of...

  • Page 2016

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1986 - #6 EPA Automatic phase synchronization for the electronic gear box is performed in such a way that: 0: The machine coordinate 0 of the slave axis is aligned to the position of the master axis one-rotation signal. 1: The position of the slave axis at ...

  • Page 2017

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1987 - Gear ratio of the spindle to the detector B: 1/1 (The spindle and detector are directly connected to each other.) Number of detector pulses per spindle rotation β: 80,000 pulses/rev (Calculated for four pulses for one A/B phase cycle) FFG N/M of the E...

  • Page 2018

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1988 - This parameter sets the angle shifted from the spindle position (one-rotation signal position) which the workpiece axis uses as the reference of phase synchronization. 7778 Acceleration for acceleration/deceleration for the workpiece axis [Input typ...

  • Page 2019

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1989 - 7783 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 999999999 For a slave axis, set the number of pulses generated f...

  • Page 2020

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1990 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 RDE OVE MLE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK <Gn108> is valid for PMC-controlled axes 0: Valid 1: Invalid The axis-by-axis machine lock si...

  • Page 2021

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1991 - #4 PF1 #5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the PMC. Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 Feedrate unit 0 0 1 / 10 1 1 / 101 0 1 / 1001 1 1 / 1000 #6 FR1 #7 ...

  • Page 2022

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1992 - NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is invalid. #6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is: 0: Invalid. With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm PS0224, “ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED” is not is...

  • Page 2023

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1993 - P8010 Description 35 DI/DO 35th group (G8166toG8177) is used. 36 DI/DO 36th group (G8178toG8189) is used. 37 DI/DO 37th group (G9142toG9153) is used. 38 DI/DO 38th group (G9154toG9165) is used. 39 DI/DO 39th group (G9166toG9177) is used. 40 DI/DO 40th g...

  • Page 2024

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1994 - NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M code: 0: The path individual signal interface is used. 1: The path common signal interfa...

  • Page 2025

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1995 - NOTE 1 With an axis for which polar coordinate interpolation is specified, set this parameter to 1. If this parameter is set to 0, a coordinate shift can occur when a single block stop or feed hold is performed in the polar coordinate interpolation mod...

  • Page 2026

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1996 - #3 SGSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the end of synchronous control, a tool offset is: 0: Considered. 1: Not considered. NOTE SGSx is enabled when bit 2 (SPSx) of parameter No. 8163 or bit 6 (SPVx) of parameter No. 8167 is set...

  • Page 2027

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1997 - NOTE When parameter SFH is set to 0 and superimposed control is applied for high-speed cycle cutting or high-speed binary program operation, alarm DS0070, “SUPERIMPOSE FOR HIGH-SPEED CYCLE CANNOT BE USED” is issued. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8169 ...

  • Page 2028

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 1998 - This parameter sets the path number and intra-path relative axis number of a superimposed master axis for each axis when superimposed control is exercised. When zero is specified, the axis does not become a slave axis under superimposed control and the ...

  • Page 2029

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 1999 - NOTE 1 For the parameters that can be set automatically, refer to Subsection 1.6.10, "Automatic Setting of Parameters for Slave Axes", in Connection Manual (Function) (B-64483EN-1). 2 Set this parameter to the same value for both the master an...

  • Page 2030

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2000 - [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between the master axis and slave axis position deviations. When the absolute value of a positional deviation difference exceeds the va...

  • Page 2031

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2001 - 8332 Maximum allowable synchronization error for synchronization error excessive alarm 2 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of da...

  • Page 2032

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2002 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the chopping/oscillation axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) The d...

  • Page 2033

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2003 - 8376 Chopping compensation factor [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 The value obtained by multiply the sum of the servo delay in an chopping operation and the acceleration/deceleration d...

  • Page 2034

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2004 - For the function of decelerating according to the cutting load in AI contour control, the override set in a parameter can be applied according to the angle at which the tool moves downward along the Z-axis. The feedrate obtained according to other condi...

  • Page 2035

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2005 - This parameter specifies a block length used as a reference to decide whether to apply smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing. If the line specified in a block is longer than the value set in the parameter, smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing is not ...

  • Page 2036

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2006 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10335 MSC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MSC The reconfirming of midway block start of operator error prevent function is: 0: Enabled independently for each path. 1: Enabled for the local pat...

  • Page 2037

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2007 - The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is assumed. [Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2,...

  • Page 2038

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2008 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999) If a va...

  • Page 2039

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2009 - #2 ICT The method for built-in 3D interference check function to find tool offset number changed is: 0: The PMC window (function code 431) 1: The tool management function with the PMC window (function code 329) #3 ICV In built-in 3D interference fu...

  • Page 2040

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2010 - #1 TDIC101 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool 1 and object 1 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #2 TDIC102 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool 1 and object 2 is: 0: ...

  • Page 2041

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2011 - #1 TDIC109 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 2 and object 3 is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10933 TDIC207 TDIC206 TDIC205TDIC204TDIC203TDIC202 TDIC201 TDIC200 [Input type] Param...

  • Page 2042

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2012 - #7 TDIC207 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 1 and object 5 is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10934 TDIC215 TDIC214 TDIC213TDIC212TDIC211TDIC210 TDIC209 TDIC208 [Input type] Param...

  • Page 2043

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2013 - #7 TDIC215 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 4 and object 5 is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10935 TDIC223 TDIC222 TDIC221TDIC220TDIC219TDIC218 TDIC217 TDIC216 [Input type] Param...

  • Page 2044

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2014 - #7 TDIC223 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 1 and tool holder 2 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10936 TDIC231 TDIC230 TDIC229TDIC228TDIC227TDIC226 TDIC225 TDIC224 [Input type] ...

  • Page 2045

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2015 - #7 TDIC231 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 5 and tool holder 2 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10937 TDIC234 TDIC233 TDIC232 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit...

  • Page 2046

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2016 - #2 TDIC302 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool holder 1 and tool 3 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #3 TDIC303 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool holder 1 and tool...

  • Page 2047

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2017 - #2 TDIC310 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 4 and tool 3 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #3 TDIC311 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 4 and tool holder 3 ...

  • Page 2048

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2018 - #2 TDIC318 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool holder 2 and tool 3 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #3 TDIC319 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool holder 2 and tool...

  • Page 2049

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2019 - #5 TDIC405 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 1 and tool holder 4 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #6 TDIC406 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 2 and tool 4 ...

  • Page 2050

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2020 - #5 TDIC413 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 5 and tool holder 4 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #6 TDIC414 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between object 6 and tool 4 ...

  • Page 2051

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2021 - #5 TDIC421 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool 3 and tool holder 4 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #6 TDIC422 In built-in 3D interference check function, check for interference between tool holder 3 and tool...

  • Page 2052

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2022 - #2 TDIR102 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between tool 1 and object 2 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disable...

  • Page 2053

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2023 - #1 TDIR109 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 2 and object 3 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disab...

  • Page 2054

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2024 - #6 TDIR206 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 1 and object 4 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disab...

  • Page 2055

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2025 - #5 TDIR213 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 3 and object 5 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disab...

  • Page 2056

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2026 - #4 TDIR220 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between tool holder 1 and tool 2 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Di...

  • Page 2057

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2027 - #3 TDIR227 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 3 and tool holder 2 is: 0: Enabled. 1: ...

  • Page 2058

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2028 - #2 TDIR234 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between tool 2 and tool holder 2 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Di...

  • Page 2059

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2029 - #6 TDIR306 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 2 and tool 3 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disable...

  • Page 2060

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2030 - #5 TDIR313 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 5 and tool holder 3 is: 0: Enabled. 1: ...

  • Page 2061

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2031 - #4 TDIR320 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between tool 3 and tool holder 3 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Di...

  • Page 2062

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2032 - #6 TDIR406 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 2 and tool 4 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disable...

  • Page 2063

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2033 - #5 TDIR413 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between object 5 and tool holder 4 is: 0: Enabled. 1: ...

  • Page 2064

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2034 - #4 TDIR420 In built-in 3D interference check function, during cutting feed, canned cycle or 3D interference check between specified targets disable signal (TDISD) = “1”, check for interference between tool 3 and tool 4 is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled....

  • Page 2065

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2035 - 10960 Figure number of tool holder 1 in built-in 3D interference check function [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to the number of tool holder 1 figures In built-in 3D interference check function, the figure number ...

  • Page 2066

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2036 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10966 TDISH14 TDIST14 TDISH13TDIST13TDISH12TDIST12 TDISH11 TDIST11 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit CAUTION This parameter is not updated until the power supply is turned off once or built-in 3D interference ...

  • Page 2067

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2037 - CAUTION This parameter is not updated until the power supply is turned off once or built-in 3D interference check setting change signal TDICHG<G519.4> is set to “1”. #0 TDIST21 In built-in 3D interference check function, when tool 1 and o...

  • Page 2068

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2038 - #1 TDISH31 In built-in 3D interference check function, when tool holder 1 and object 3 interfere, 0: OT alarm occurs. 1: OT alarm does not occur, and interference is notified by the signal. #2 TDIST32 In built-in 3D interference check function, whe...

  • Page 2069

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2039 - #4 TDIST43 In built-in 3D interference check function, when tool 3 and object 4 interfere, 0: OT alarm occurs. 1: OT alarm does not occur, and interference is notified by the signal. #5 TDISH43 In built-in 3D interference check function, when tool...

  • Page 2070

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2040 - #6 TDIST54 In built-in 3D interference check function, when tool 4 and object 5 interfere, 0: OT alarm occurs. 1: OT alarm does not occur, and interference is notified by the signal. #7 TDISH54 In built-in 3D interference check function, when tool ...

  • Page 2071

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2041 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11005 SIC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 SIC Spindle indexing is: 0: Performed based on absolute coordinates. 1: Performed based on machine coordinates. 11090 Path number with which the rotatio...

  • Page 2072

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2042 - At the start of the Path Table Operation, the difference between the actual spindle speed and commanded spindle speed at the spindle command table is checked. If the difference exceeds the parameter, the alarm is generated. If 0 is set in the parameter,...

  • Page 2073

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2043 - When bit 1 (PSM) of parameter No.11104 is set to 1, the reductive effect of torque command by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation becomes larger because the timing of changing speed by axis movement commands is in every 4msec. If bit 1 (PSM) o...

  • Page 2074

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2044 - [Valid data range] 0, 1 When feed hold is detected during the table of spindle position reference being executed: 0: Alarm PS0452, “ILLEGAL PATH TABLE OPERATION” (detail alarm No.74) is issued, and Path Table Operation of all paths is stopped. The...

  • Page 2075

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2045 - Parameter No. 11201 5 6 7 8 Least input increment (deg) 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 0.00000001 Maximum settable value (deg) ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999 ±99.9999999 ±9.99999999 Note, however, that a value from 1 to 8 can be specified in this parameter. ...

  • Page 2076

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2046 - #1 D3R In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, tilted working plane indexing mode, or workpiece setting error compensation mode, rapid traverse in canned cycle for drilling is: 0: Performed in the cutting feed mode. 1: Performed in th...

  • Page 2077

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2047 - #2 IMG Inch/metric changeover is: 0: Performed with the G20/G21 (G70/G71). 1: Not performed with the G20/G21 (G70/G71). NOTE If bit 2 of parameter No. 11222 is 1 (inch/metric changeover with G20/G21 is disabled), only bit 2 of parameter No. 0 can be ...

  • Page 2078

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2048 - #3 MCO If, in the program restart auxiliary function output function, multiple MSTB codes are specified in the program to restart (or multiple M codes are specified), the output to the MDI program is as follows: 0: Each code is output to a single bloc...

  • Page 2079

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2049 - NOTE This parameter is regarded as being set to 0 in the following modes: 1) 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion 2) Tilted working plane indexing 3) Workpiece setting error compensation 4) Cutting point command If 1 is set in this parameter, ma...

  • Page 2080

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2050 - When the total number of the sets exceeds 10, the set number is assigned in order with small path number by priority. Example) In case of setting as the followings, Path1: 6sets, Path2: 8sets, Path3: 4sets. Actually the set number is assigned as the f...

  • Page 2081

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2051 - NOTE - "Non 5-axis machining control axis" means the axis which is not subject to tool center point control. - In case that the number of non 5-axis machining control axes are two or more and some of them should be included in commanded feedra...

  • Page 2082

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2052 - NOTE If program numbers are changed from eight digits to four digits, all programs will be automatically deleted from program memory. If this parameter is changed from 1 to 0 and the power is turned off and back on, the following message appears on th...

  • Page 2083

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2053 - When the first set is displayed, switching to the second set can be made by pressing then pressing the chapter selection soft key being selected. When the above operation is performed again, the displayed set changes to the first set. The display sequ...

  • Page 2084

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2054 - [Data type] Bit path #3 BGM Coordinates used by the dynamic graphic display function are: 0: Absolute coordinates. 1: Machine coordinates. #7 GST When drawing cannot be performed for a command with the dynamic graphic display function: 0: The com...

  • Page 2085

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2055 - Blank type Dimension I Dimension J Dimension K Hollow cylinder Diameter of outer circle of cylinder Diameter of inner circle of cylinder Cylinder length Rectangular prism Length in X-axis direction Length in Y-axis direction Length in Z-axis directi...

  • Page 2086

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2056 - #6 QLS The machining quality level adjustment screen is: 0: Not displayed. 1: Displayed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11352 MPC PNI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 PNI The display by the path name enlarged display funct...

  • Page 2087

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2057 - #1 CRS While data transmission is awaited using the DPRNT/BPRNT of the custom macro or macro executor, screen switching is: 0: Not possible. 1: Possible. #4 DPC In the screen title, program comments corresponding to O-numbers are: 0: Displayed. 1:...

  • Page 2088

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2058 - #2 RPD During executing the program backward by manual handle retrace, the block displayed at the start of the program is: 0: The block being executed. 1: The block just before the block being executed. NOTE This parameter is effective at bit 1 (APD...

  • Page 2089

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2059 - 11419 The interval of the tool offset number when cutting point command is used with tool compensation memory A and B [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to [(the maximum number of tool compensation values)-1]/2 (...

  • Page 2090

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2060 - 11428 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 4) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 200 These para...

  • Page 2091

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2061 - 11441 Permissible acceleration at P0 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 1) 11442 Permissible acceleration at P1 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 1) 11443 Permissible acceleration at P2 in o...

  • Page 2092

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2062 - 11467 Permissible deceleration at P1 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 2) 11468 Permissible deceleration at P2 in optimum acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping (gear 2) 11469 Permissible deceleration at P3 in op...

  • Page 2093

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2063 - NOTE 3 In other automatic operation, if there is no movement in the machine coordinate system, the alarm is not issued. 4 This function is invalid for the dummy axis. (Parameter KSV(No.11802#4)=1 or DMY(No.2009#0)=1) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11502 IP...

  • Page 2094

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2064 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11506 PCU [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 PCU If there is a USB memory interface on the CNC side, the USB memory interface used when the CNC screen display function is started via the HSSB interfac...

  • Page 2095

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2065 - #1 MDE In the MDI mode, the external device subprogram call (M198) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. NOTE If instructing M198 at the parameter MDE(No.11630#1)=0, the alarm PS1081"EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL MODE ERROR" is generated. #2 TFR ...

  • Page 2096

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2066 - It is necessary to set the value of both level1 and level10. 11684 Tolerance of rotary axes when nano smoothing 2 is used (smoothing level 1) 11685 Tolerance of rotary axes when nano smoothing 2 is used (smoothing level 10) [Input type] Parameter ...

  • Page 2097

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2067 - 11753 Upper limit on the workpiece setting error Δa 11754 Upper limit on the workpiece setting error Δb 11755 Upper limit on the workpiece setting error Δc [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Min. unit o...

  • Page 2098

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2068 - 11776 Tolerance of Tool center point path for High-speed Smooth TCP (G43.4P3, G43.5P3) [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [V...

  • Page 2099

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2069 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11802 KSVx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #4 KSVx Servo axis is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. NOTE 1 ...

  • Page 2100

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2070 - 12310 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based vertical direction handle feed/interrupt are performed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range...

  • Page 2101

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2071 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 24 This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E <Gn018.0 to Gn018.3, Gn411.0> for the first manual handle) or the manual handle interrupt axis selectio...

  • Page 2102

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2072 - 12314 States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when the second rotation axis is turned in tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 24 This parameter sets...

  • Page 2103

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2073 - #0 TWD The directions of 3-dimensional machining manual feed (other than tool tip center rotation feed) when the tilted working plane indexing is issued are: 0: Same as those not in the tilted working plane indexing. That is, the directions are: Tool...

  • Page 2104

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2074 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 to 90 When a tilted working plane indexing (G68.3) is issued to perform 3-dimensional machining manual feed in the latitude direction, longitude direction, and...

  • Page 2105

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2075 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13113 CFD CLR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 CLR Upon reset, the display of a travel distance by 3-dimensional machining manual feed is: 0: Not cleared. 1: Cleared. #3 CFD As feedrate F, t...

  • Page 2106

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2076 - 13132 Simultaneous multi-path display order number [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of paths included in a simultaneous multi-path display group This parameter sets the display order of a path defined...

  • Page 2107

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2077 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 0 (arrival notice for each type number). #3 ETE The tool life arrival notice signal is output: 0: For each tool type. 1: For each tool. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13201 ...

  • Page 2108

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2078 - #3 DOB On the tool management function screen, B-axis offset data is: 0: Displayed. 1: Not displayed. NOTE This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe system or compound system. #4 DO2 On the tool management function screen...

  • Page 2109

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2079 - 13221 M code for tool life count restart of tool management or tool life management [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] • When tool management function is used: When 0 is set in this parameter, this parameter i...

  • Page 2110

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2080 - 13227 Number of data items in the second cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by th...

  • Page 2111

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2081 - 13237 Number of data items in the fourth cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the...

  • Page 2112

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2082 - • When tool life management function is used: Usually, when H99 is specified, tool length offset is enabled by the H code of the tool being used. By setting any H code in this parameter, the H code instead of H99 can be used. If 0 is specified, H99 i...

  • Page 2113

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2083 - #4 MFC When the cutting is executed without specifying a feedrate (F) after the modal G code of group 05 was changed by G93(inverse time feed) / G94(feed per minute) / G95(feed per revolution) command, 0: The feedrate (F) is inherited as a modal. 1: A...

  • Page 2114

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2084 - #0 MCR When an allowable acceleration rate adjustment is made with the machining condition selection function or machining quality level adjustment function (machining parameter adjustment screen, precision level selection screen), parameter No. 1735 ...

  • Page 2115

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2085 - Each of these parameters sets an acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) in AI contour control. Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision. 13614 Allowable acceleratio...

  • Page 2116

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2086 - 13618 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation when AI contour control is used (precision level 1) 13619 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration i...

  • Page 2117

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2087 - [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is ...

  • Page 2118

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2088 - 13630 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when AI contour control is used 13631 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when A...

  • Page 2119

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2089 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 14000 IRFx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. When this function is enabled for an axis, if ...

  • Page 2120

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2090 - NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. When the bit 3 (RGE) of parameter No. 14250 is set to 0 14270 Angle 1 (θ - data for G diagrams) 14271 Angle 2 (θ - data for G diagrams) 14272 Angle 3 (...

  • Page 2121

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2091 - NOTE When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] ×1/512 [Min. unit of data] -32768(×-63) to 32767(×64.9) Set these parameters for ...

  • Page 2122

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2092 - Set -1.0 in the parameter for "maximum number of items used + 1", where items refer to angles. The table gives values if angles 1.0 to 75.0 are set in 1-degree steps. If there are multiple pivot axes, the settings are used universally to all t...

  • Page 2123

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2093 - NOTE 1 When bit 3 (RGE) of parameter No. 14250 is set to 1, the number of angles and the number of settings for the gain multipliers for the angles vary depending on the number of controlled axes. [Example] For eight axes, up to 80 items can be set, an...

  • Page 2124

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2094 - #1 RTW At the start of a re-forward movement operation of the manual handle retrace function in a multi-path system, 0: The re-forward movement operation is performed immediately on each path. 1: Those paths for which reverse movement is prohibited ar...

  • Page 2125

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2095 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19500 FNW [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #6 FNW When the feedrate is determined according to the feedrate difference and acceleration in AI contour control: 0: The maximum feedrate at which the...

  • Page 2126

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2096 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19515 ZG2 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 ZG2 When the deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration based on Z-axis fall angle) is used: 0: Stepwise override...

  • Page 2127

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2097 - (2) Bit 6 (CYS) of parameter No. 19530) is set to 1 If the amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation is smaller than the value set in this parameter, cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation is performed together with t...

  • Page 2128

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2098 - Setting an acceleration pattern A cceleration Speed FbFaA a P1 P2P3P4P5A b A cceleration pattern P0 Set the speed at each of the acceleration setting points (P0 to P5) in a corresponding parameter, then in parameters for each axis, set acceleratio...

  • Page 2129

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2099 - 19545 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in + direction and acceleration) 19546 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P1 during movement in + direction and acceleration) 19547 Optimal to...

  • Page 2130

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2100 - 19568 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P5 during movement in - direction and deceleration) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 0.01% [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 For each travel direction and ...

  • Page 2131

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2101 - This parameter sets the tolerance of rotation axes in a program created using small line segments in nano smoothing 2. This parameter is valid only for the rotation axes specified in nano smoothing 2. When 0 is set in this parameter, a minimum amount of...

  • Page 2132

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2102 - #3 WCD This parameter specify a direction of compensation vector by a sign of offset value in grinding-wheel wear compensation Offset vale by D code Minus Plus 0 Direction from compensation center to command end position. Direction from command end p...

  • Page 2133

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2103 - #1 NI5 The interference check in 3-dimensional cutter compensation is performed by: 0: Projecting a look-ahead command position onto a plane perpendicular to the tool axis direction of a block for which compensation is planned. Interference avoidance...

  • Page 2134

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2104 - [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment ...

  • Page 2135

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2105 - The interference check/avoidance function of 3-dimensional tool compensation machining is executed when the angle difference between the tool direction vectors for the target two points is less than the setting. This parameter is valid when bit 1 (NI5)...

  • Page 2136

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2106 - # 1 SRD Direction of rotation of the swivel head axis is 0: Counter-clockwise. 1: Clockwise. # 2 INW Amount of wear is 0: Taken into account in the offset calculate. 1: Not taken into account in the offset calculate. 19642 Reference angle of the...

  • Page 2137

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2107 - [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -99999...

  • Page 2138

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2108 - Shift of controlled point Tool length offsetTool holder offset Controlled-point shift vector DE Tool center pointControlled pointSecond rotary axis of tool F First rotary axis of tool [Controlled-point shift vector when automatically calculated] #5 ...

  • Page 2139

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2109 - Set the shift vector for the controlled point. This value becomes valid when bit 5 (SVC) of parameter No. 19665 is set to 1, and bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665 is set to 1. NOTE Set a radius value. 19680 Mechanical unit type [Input type] Param...

  • Page 2140

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2110 - Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis. For a hypothetical axis (when bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is 1), set 0. [Example] Assuming that the axis configuration in path 1 is X,Y,Z,B,C and the axis configuration in path 2 is X,Z...

  • Page 2141

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2111 - Parameter No.19682YZX 546 Parameter No.19683 19684 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Set the direction in which the first rotation axis rotates as a mechanic...

  • Page 2142

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64484EN/03 - 2112 - 19687 Axis direction of the second rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Specify the axis direction of the second rotation axis. 1: On X-axis 2: On Y-axis 3: On Z-axis 4: On an axis tilted a certa...

  • Page 2143

    B-64484EN/03 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 2113 - 19691 Controlled-axis number for the third rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the controlled-axis number for the third rotation axis. [Example] Assuming that the ax...